Kip 8000

(K-77)

SERVICE MANUAL
Version H.0

K77sm_cover_Kipstar (Ver. H.0)

This service manual contains the basic information required for carrying out field service to support the
product quality and functions of the KipStar 8000.

Chapter 1 Introduction : Features, specifications

Chapter 2 Installation : Installation place and procedure/Unpacking

Chapter 3 Copy Process : Brief explanation of image formation and copy processes

Chapter 4 Electrical Systems : Basic principles of electrical system and operation

Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems : Mechanical structure, disassembly, assembly, and

adjustment methods

Chapter 6 Maintenance/Checking : Periodic replacement parts table, consumables durability

yardstick table, periodic service table

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting : Procedures and handling against malfunctions and image

quality

Chapter 8 Service Mode & User Mode

Chapter 9 Appendices : Overall timing chart, overall circuit diagram, printed circuit
diagram, etc.

Some of the information contained in this manual may be changed by product upgrades etc.
Such information will be communicated as engineering notices as necessary. Read this service manual
and any engineering notices carefully. A deep and correct understanding of this machine is the only way
to develop the skills for maintaining the product quality and functions of this product for a long period of
time and the applied capacity for finding the causes of breakdowns.

K77sm_cover_Kipstar (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 1
Introduction

Page
1.1 Features 1- 1

1.2 Specifications 1- 2

1.3 Appearance 1- 4
1.3.1 Front view 1- 4
1.3.2 Right side view 1- 5
1.3.3 Rear view 1- 6
1.3.4 Operation Panel 1- 8
1.3.5 Media Indicators 1-10
1.3.6 “in use” Indicators 1-11

1.4 Optional Configurations 1-13

K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.1 Features
(1) New Contact Development Technology with non-magnetic mono-component toner
Benefits you will obtain are:
Superior image quality High definition line, distinctive greyscale and consistent solid
black can be produced.
100% toner efficiency No toner is wasted. Neither cleaning mechanism nor waste
toner receptacle is needed. It is environmentally friendly and
also can reduce the running cost.

(2) Superior printing productivity

Print speed is 240mm / second (11 A0 prints / minute).
It is enough processible a large volume of print/copy.

(3) Long parts life and low frequency of service maintenance

Mortal parts such as Photoconductive Drum or Image Corona Wire, which are key parts to gain a
nice image, are durable for very long term use.
You will continuously gain a nice image for a long term without maintenance as the printer is
provided with self-cleaning functions.

(4) Pre-calibrated LED Head

All LED pixels are individually calibrated in advance to produce the best image.

(5) Image Smoothing Technology

Printed diagonal and curved lines look smoother because of the optimization by the Image
Smoothing Technology.

(6) Replacement of media and Toner Cartridge without interrupting print production
It is possible to replace the roll media or the Toner Cartridge without interrupting the continuous
print operation.

(7) Long print

The maximum print length guaranteed is 6 meters (plain paper) but it is possible to print up to
24 meters optionally. (Quality of print is not guaranteed.)

1-1 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.2 Specifications
Subject Specification
Model KipStar8000 / StarPrint8000
Type Console
Printing method LED Array Electro Photography
Photoconductor Organic Photoconductive Drum
Print speed 240mm / second (11 A0 prints / minute)
Exposure method LED Print Head
Resolution 400dpi x 400dpi
Print width Maximum : 914mm (36 inches)
Minimum : 297mm (11 inches)
Print length Maximum : Plain paper 6000mm, or 5 x standard length
Tracing paper A0
Film A0
Minimum : 210mm

NOTE : If the print is longer than 6m, KIP does not guarantee image
quality or the reliability of media feeding system.
Warm up time Shorter than 6 minutes
(At 23 degrees centigrade, 60% RH and 230V)
First print time Shorter than 12.5 seconds (A0)
Fusing method Heat roller fusing
Development Contact type mono component non-magnetic development system
(Initial toner is unnecessary. One toner cartridge contains 500g.)
Charging method Corona
Media feeding method Automatic (4 Roll Decks) and manual (50 cut sheets capacity)
Transfer method Corona
Separation method Corona and LED
Input power 220 to 240V (+6% to -10%), 16A and 50/60Hz in U.S.A. and Europe
Interface KIP Interface 8 (2 channels)
Maximum power When 230V, 50/60Hz and Dehumidify Heater is ON
consumption Stand by 0.63 Kwh
Printing 2.45 Kwh
Warm up 3.4 Kwh
Acoustic noise Less than 70db (Printing)
NOTE : Impact noise such as cutting sound is excluded.
Less than 55db (Stand by)
Ozone Less than 0.05ppm (Average of 8 hours)
Dimensions 1360mm (Width) x 980mm (Depth) x 885mm (Height)
Weight About 400kg
Media Specified media
Plain paper SHN
Tracing paper KMS-75
Film FA-75

(Available types)
Plain paper 70 to 90g/m2
Tracing paper 70 to 90g/m2
Film Thickness is 100 micrometer or thinner.

1-2 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

Subject Specification
Environmental condition Temperature 10 to 32.5 degrees centigrade
Humidity 20 to 80% RH
Storage condition of Print media Wrap the media surely to shut out the humidity.
consumables Toner Keep the toner cartridge away from the direct
sunlight, and store it in the condition of 0 to 35 oC
and 10 to 85% RH.

NOTE
These specifications may be changed without notice.

1-3 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3 Appearance

1.3.1 Front view

Power Switch Operation Panel Toner Cover

Bypass Feeder

Right Side Door

Roll Decks

Media Indicator “in use” Indicators

Name of part Function

Power Switch The printer is turned on and off.
Bypass Feeder Cut sheet media can be set here and fed into.
It is possible to set 50 sheets in maximum if the media is A2 (594mm)
or narrower. (24” or narrower)
Operation Panel It informs you of printer’s status, error, mis-feed location and so on.
Roll Decks There are 4 Roll Decks (Drawers are 3 but Roll Spools are 4.).
Each Roll Deck holds one roll of media.
Roll Deck 1 : (Top drawer)
Roll Deck 2 : (Middle drawer)
Roll Deck 3 : (Front side of bottom drawer)
Roll Deck 4 : (Rear side of bottom drawer)
Media Indicator It informs you of the size and the material of roll media loaded on each
Roll Deck.
Toner Cover Open the Toner Cover and access the Toner Supplying Mechanism
when you replace the Toner Cartridge.
Right Side Door When a mis-feed of media occurs inside of the machine, open the Right
Side Door and remove the mis-fed media.
“in use” Indicators These indicators let you know which drawer must not be opened during
print.

1-4 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3.2 Right side view

Toner Cartridge Fuser Handle

Cutter Handle

Counter A

Counter B

Internal Transportation Unit Lever

Name of part Function

Cutter Handle If the mis-fed media has not been cut yet, rotate the Cutter Handle to
cut it manually.
Counter A Counter A counts the linear meter (inch) of total prints.
Counter B Counter B counts the square meter (inch) of total prints.
Internal Transportation Move this lever to unlock and open the Internal Transportation Unit, and
Unit Lever then remove the mis-fed media.
Fuser Handle When a media mis-feed occurs in the Fuser Unit, it is possible to eject it
manually from the print exit rotating the Fuser Handle.
Toner Cartridge It contains 500 grams of toner, and supplies the toner to the Developer
Unit little by little.

1-5 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3.3 Rear view

Dehumidify Heater Switch

Interface Connector for scanner (Channel A) Top Rear Cover

Outlet for scanner

Exit Cover

Power Cord

Folder Port Data Upload / Download Port Interface Connector Outlet for Controller
for controller (Channel B)

FOLDER DIAG. IF-VIII(CH-B)

COM2 COM1

COM2 Port Com1 Port (Not used)

1-6 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

Name of part Function
Interface Connector for Connect the cable here, which comes from the image scanner.
scanner (Channel A) Connector type is D-Sub Connector 37 pins : max.5Vdc (large)
Exit Cover When a media mis-feed occurs in the Fuser Unit, open the Exit Cover
and remove the mis-fed media.
Top Rear Cover Open the Top Rear Cover and access the Dehumidify Heater Switch.
Power Cord Connect to the wall outlet alone.
Outlet for scanner It is possible to supply the power from the printer to the scanner if you
connect the power cord to this outlet.
(220 - 240V, 2A max.)
Dehumidify Heater Turn on the Dehumidify Heater pressing “|” side of this switch to
Switch dehumidify the printing media.
Press “O” side to turn it off.
Folder Port Connect this port and the Folder with a cable.
Data Upload / Download Connect this port and PC with a cable, and then download or upload
Port the data between printer and PC.
COM2 Port Connect this port and the LCD of controller with a cable.
COM1 Port Connect this port and the COM1 Port of controller with a cable.
The “Shutdown” signal is sent from the printer to the controller through
this cable.
Interface Connector for Connect the cable here, which comes from the controller PC.
controller (Channel B) Connector type is D-Sub Connector 37 pins : max.5Vdc (large)
(D-Sub Connector 9 pins : max.12Vdc (small) is also available.)
(Not used) This is not used so it is covered.
Outlet for Controller In case you place the controller PC outside of the printer, it is possible
to supply the power from the printer to the controller PC if you connect
the power cord to this outlet.
(220 - 240V, 1A max.)

1-7 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3.4 Operation Panel
There is an Operation Panel on the upper right of printer’s front face.
Names and functions of key and indication LED are as follows.

1 2 3 4 5 8 12 15

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

6 7 9 10 11 13 14 16

No. Name of part Function

1 Ready Indicator It flashes green when the printer is warming up, and it lights green
when the printer is ready for printing.
2 Open Indicator It lights orange when some door or unit is open or unlocked.
3 Toner Empty It flashes red when the toner is near empty. (Toner Cartridge has no
Indicator toner.)
And it lights red when the toner is completely empty. (Developer Unit
has no toner. No more print is available.)
4 Roll Empty Indicator It lights red if the roll media in use is empty.
5 Mis-feed Indicator It lights red when the print media is mis-fed.
(A mis-feed code like “J-XX” is indicated on the Status Display and
some indication LED of Mis-feed Location Indicator lights red to
inform you of the location of mis-feed.)
6 WIRE-CLEAN Key It is possible to clean the Image Corona Wire to avoid the defective
image.
7 EXP-CLEAN Key It is possible to clean the LED Head to avoid the defective image.
8 Roll Deck Indicator It indicates which roll media you will make initial cut.
9 SELECT Key Before making the initial cut, select the Roll Deck of which roll media
you will make initial cut.
10 CUT Key After selecting the Roll Deck with the SELECT Key, press the Cut
Key to make initial cut.
11 Mis-feed Location If the print media is mis-fed, some indication LED lights red to show
Indicator where the mis-fed media exists.
(The Mis-feed Indicator lights red and a mis-feed code like “J-XX” is
indicated also on the Status Display to inform you of the location of
mis-feed.)
12 Density Indicator It indicates the density level presently selected.
13 COPY DENSITY It is possible to change the density level with this key.
Key Please change the density level if you feel the printed image (print
from the PC or copy from the scanner) is too dark or too light.
14 MENU Key These keys are used in the User Mode and the Service Mode.
Key
Key
* Key
ENTER Key

1-8 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

No. Name of part Function
15 Status Display It indicates kinds of information as error codes or mis-feed codes.
16 ONLINE Key & The ONLINE Indicator lights green when the controller is online, and
Indicator it is put out when offline.
It is possible to switch between online and offline pressing the
ONLINE Key.

1-9 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3.5 Media Indicators
There is a Media Indicator on the right of printer’s front face.
It informs you of the size (width) and the material of roll media loaded in each Roll Deck.

plain paper
1 vellum / tracing
film

plain paper
2 vellum / tracing
film

plain paper
3 vellum / tracing
film

plain paper
4 vellum / tracing
film

Example 1 : Metric mode Example 2 : In the metric mode

Roll Deck 1 : A0 plain paper Roll Deck 1 : 36” vellum
Roll Deck 2 : A1 tracing paper Roll Deck 2 : 30” plain paper
Roll Deck 3 : A3 film Roll Deck 3 : 24” film
Roll Deck 4 : A4 plain paper Roll Deck 4 : 12” plain paper

plain paper
plain paper 1
1 vellum / tracing
vellum / tracing
film
film

plain paper
plain paper 2
2 vellum / tracing
vellum / tracing
film
film

plain paper
plain paper 3
3 vellum / tracing
vellum / tracing
film
film

plain paper
plain paper 4
4 vellum / tracing
vellum / tracing
film
film

1-10 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.3.6 “in use” Indicators
There are 3 “in use” Indicators on the right of printer’s front face being concerned to 3 drawers.
These indicators show whether it is possible or not to open the concerning drawer when the printer is
on printing.

in use

4
3

One or two of them light orange when the printer is on printing.

If the “in use” Indicator is lighting orange, do not open the concerning drawer.
If it is not lighting, you may open the concerning drawer.

Example : “in use” Indicators of top and middle drawers are lighting orange, so do not open them.
You may open the bottom drawer because its “in use” Indicator is not lighting.

1
in use

2
in use

4
3
in use

1-11 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Reference

Even if the KipStar8000 is on printing with the roll media fed from one drawer, it is possible to
open another drawer and install the roll media without interrupting to print.
However, it is not necessarily allowed to open any drawer.
We do not allow you to open a certain drawer in the following cases.

1. When the roll media is fed from that drawer.

2. Roll media is not fed from that drawer but another roll media fed from a different drawer
is passing through in that certain drawer.

See the following section diagram.

Media feeding paths from each Roll Deck is integrated into one path in the middle drawer.
When the KipStar8000 is printing with the roll media fed from the Roll Deck 1, for example, it is
allowed to open only the bottom drawer.
(“in use” Indicators for top and middle drawers will light orange in this case to forbid you to
open them.)

Top Drawer is not

allowed to open. in use
Roll Deck 1

Middle Drawer is not

allowed to open. in use

Roll Deck 2

Roll Deck 4
Bottom Drawer is
in use
allowed to open.
Roll Deck 3 D4

1-12 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

1.4 Optional Configurations
(1) Combination with the image scanner

Interface 8

Image Scanner

KipStar8000
StarPrint8000

(2) Combination with the controller PC

Interface 8

Controller PC

KipStar8000
StarPrint8000

1-13 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Combination with the controller PC and the image scanner

Controller PC

SCSI

Interface 8 Interface 8

Image Scanner

KipStar8000
StarPrint8000

(2) Connection to the network

Ethernet

KipStar8000
Controller PC StarPrint8000
(Embedded type)

NOTE
UL Listed Communication Cable should be used as the LAN cable to the Controller.

1-14 K77sm1e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 2
Installation

This machine is packaged and shipped after careful adjustment and passed a strict inspection in
our factory.
Installation is important work to reappear the efficiency of the machine that has passed the test in
our factory after having installed at customer site.
A service engineer has to understand this machine’s function very well, install this machine in a
good environmental place in a correct procedure, and check this machine completely.

Page
2.1 Installation Requirements 2- 1

2.2 Unpacking 2- 2

2.3 Levelling the Printer 2- 3

2.4 Removing Tapes and Screws 2- 4

2.5 Confirmation of Service Mode Lists, Shading Sheet and Drum Cleaning Blade 2- 6

2.6 Setting up the Process Unit (LED Head, Developer & Drum) 2- 7

2.7 Installing the Toner Cartridge 2-24

2.8 Loading the Roll Media into Roll Deck 2-27

2.8.1 In case of roll deck 1, 2 and 3 2-27
2.8.2 In case of roll deck 4 2-32

2.9 Installing the Manual Tray 2-34

2.10 Turning on the Printer 2-35

2.11 Supplying the Toner into Developer Unit 2-36

2.12 Initial Cut 2-38

K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.1 Installation Requirements
The following conditions are required for installation of the equipment.

(1) Power source should be as follows (according to your region).

U.S.A. / Europe 220 to 240V (+6% to -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz

(2) The equipment must be on an exclusive circuit.

The outlet must be near the equipment and easy accessible.

(3) Make sure to connect this equipment to a grounded outlet.

(4) The site temperature range = 10 to 32.5 degrees centigrade, with the humidity between 20% to
80.0% RH (NON CONDENSING).
Keep the equipment away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators.

(5) The installation site must not have open flames, dust or ammonia gases.

(6) The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight.

Please draw curtains to block any sunlight.

(7) Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is within
safe levels. (see certifications)
Ventilate the room, if required.

(8) Levelling Bolts on the bottom of the printer should touch the floor correctly.
And the equipment must be levelled.
Floor strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the equipment.

(9) Keep ample room around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.
Required space is noted.

195cm (76.7 inch) or wider

Rear

50cm
(19.7 inch)
or wider
120cm (47.2 inch) or wider

Front
100cm (39.4 inch) or wider

2-1 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.2 Unpacking
CAUTION
1. When this printer is to be installed in winter, if a printer that has been kept in a cold warehouse is
moved to a warm room and is unpacked, it may cause several troubles since each part of the
printer will be dewed.
In this case, leave the printer in the room for 6 hours or longer before it is unpacked, then start
installation work.

2. Handle with great care when you unpack or install the printer because its net weight is heavier
than 400Kg.

NOTE
The printer package does not include toner cartridge and printing paper.
So ask them separately before installing the printer.

1) Remove a top crate, and also remove 4 pieces of side crate.

2) Remove both the wrapping film and the protection paper from the printer.
You will find 2 boxes and 1 package, which include the following 5 kinds of accessory.

A : Drum Package
B : LED Head Package
C : Manual Tray
D : Drum Stand and a sheet of paper
E : Setup Procedure and User’s Manual
F : Setup Toner Bottle (Inside of the Right Side Door)

3) Lift up the machine using a folk lift, with the forks set to the widest possible position to fit into the
inner skid, and place the printer directly onto the floor.

4) Remove the vinyl from the printer.

5) Remove the wrapping film from the printer.

A C

D
E

2-2 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.3 Levelling the Printer
It is necessary to level the printer to get a proper print image.
By tightening or loosening the Height Adjusting Bolts on the bottom, please level the printer.

PA PE R
DEC K
W IR E
-CLE A N

MF
EX P- CLE 1
AN 2 3
4
D1
C UT
S EL EC T E XIT
D2

D3 PF

D4 C OP Y
D ENSI TY

MENU
←
→
*
E NTE R
R E SE T

3 4

Height Adjusting Bolt

Put the level on the specified places of the printer.

See the right figure.

Put the level here.

2-3 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.4 Removing Tapes and Screws
Several movable parts of KIP8000 have been fixed with screws, tapes or shock absorbers before
shipment, so as not to be broken by the shock or the vibration during transportation.
Please remove these screws, tapes and shock absorbers at the time of installation.

1) Remove 2 screws with the tag on the bottom of the Fuser.

These screws are not reused.

Screw with the tag

NOTE
We have separated the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller each other so as not to damage
them during transportation, by pulling the Pressure Roller with the above shown 2 screws.
But please remove these screws at the time of installation because it is necessary to contact
Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller strongly.
Otherwise, the toner image will not be fixed to the paper firmly.

2) Draw out each Roll Deck.

Remove the tape and the shock absorber which hold the Roll Spool.

Tape Shock absorber

2-4 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

3) Open the Toner Cover.
Remove the tape which holds the Toner Cartridge Cover.

Tape

Toner Cover Toner Cartridge Cover

4) Open the Right Side Door.

Remove the tapes fixing the following parts.

Cutter Handle
Inner Transportation Unit Lever
Hook

Remove the shock absorber with tag also.

Cutter Handle Shock Absorber with tag

Right Side Door Inner Transportation Unit Lever Hook

2-5 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.5 Confirmation of Service Mode Lists,
Shading Sheet and Drum Cleaning Blade
Service Mode Lists, Shading Sheet and Drum Cleaning Blade are inside of the Cover on the right.
Open the Cover at the time of installation and confirm they are included.

NOTE
1. Setting values of Service Modes, which are uniquely decided for each machine, are
written in the Service Mode Lists.

2. If you make some product service pulling out the Process Unit, cover the Drum with
Shading Sheet so as not to expose the Drum to the light.

3. Drum Cleaning Blade is used when the Drum gets dirt and white spots appear on the print.

1) Open the Right Side Door.

2) Remove 2 screws to remove the Cover.

You will find the Service Mode List, the Shading Sheet and the Drum Cleaning Blade.

Service Mode List Drum Cleaning Blade

Cover Shading Sheet

2-6 K77sm2e1 (Ver. H.0)

2.6 Setting up the Process Unit
(LED Head, Developer & Drum)
1) Open the Right Side Door.

Right Side Door

2) Twist the Inner Transportation Lever counter-clockwise to unlock the Inner Transportation Unit,
bring down the Inner Transportation Unit and hold it with the Hook.

Inner Transportation Unit

Inner Transportation Unit Lever Hook

2-7 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of M4x10 screw.
Also, remove 4 pieces of M4x14 screw which are enclosed with the sponges.

M4x10 screws

M4x14 screws

NOTE
Do not remove the sponges as it prevents
the M4x14 screws from dropping off.
Sponge

Machine
side M4x14

4) Catch the Handles and draw out the Process Unit.

Process Unit Handles

NOTE
Make sure to catch both Handles when you draw it out.

2-8 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

5) Open the Top Rear Cover, and remove the shock absorber with tag on one side.
Disconnect a connector on another side, remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw, and then remove
the Top Center Cover.

Tooth washer screws Tooth Washer Screws

Shock absorber with tag Top Rear Cover Top Center Cover Connector

6) Open the box of LED Head.

There are wrapped LED Head and small box in it.
The small box includes a Cleaning Pad.

LED Head

Small box
(Cleaning Pad)

2-9 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove the wrapping from the LED Head, and take out the Cleaning Pad from the box.
Loosen the screw, install the Cleaning pad there and tighten the screw.

Cleaning Pad

Cleaning
Screw Pad

8) Since the Cleaning Motor is protected with the box, remove it.

Protection box

2-10 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

 9) Insert the Positioning Bars on the motor side of LED
Head Unit into the slits on the left side of printer. Positioning Bar
Ground Plate

Slits

NOTE
There are 3 pieces of Ground Plates. Be careful not to break them.

10) Fit the projection on another side of LED Head to the notch on the right side of printer.
Then, hold the LED Head temporarily with the M4x10 screws which you have removed at the
step 3).

CAUTION
Do not tighten the M4x10 screws positively!
The LED Head must be moved easily up and down when you close the Process Unit in the
later step 12).

Projection M4x10 screws

Notch

11) Connect 3 connectors to the LED Head, and connect the connector of Cleaning Motor.

Connectors Cleaning Motor

Connector

2-11 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

12) Make sure that the LED Head is easily moved up and
down (M4x10 screws are loosed), push in the Process
Unit into the printer.

NOTE
Make sure to close the Process Unit without tightening the M4x10 screws.
The Positioning Bars of the LED Head are fitted into the slits of the Process Unit.

Slits Positioning Bars

These Positioning Bars are curved upward, and the LED Head is smoothly moved up when
the bars are fitted into the slits. By this, a proper gap can be kept between LED Head and
Drum.

Slit

LED Head
Proper gap

Bar
Drum

Process Unit

If you close the Process Unit when the LED Head is not movable being fixed with the M4x10
screws, the gap between LED Head and Drum is not adjusted properly. Or you may bend the
Positioning Bars in the worst case.

Gap is not
proper

Bar is bent.
Tightened

2-12 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

13) Fix the Process Unit tightening 4 pieces of M4x14 screw, and then fix the LED Head tightening 2
pieces of M4x10 screw.

M4x10 screws

M4x14 screws

NOTE
It is necessary to fix the Process Unit before fixing the LED Head.
So make sure to tighten M4x14 screws first, and then tighten M4x10 screws

14) Put back the Top Center Cover and close the Top Rear Cover.

Top Center Cover Top Rear Cover

2-13 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

15) Draw out the Process Unit again.

Process Unit

16) Disconnect the connector of the Wire Cleaning Motor, remove 2 screws at both sides and remove
the Image Corona.

Image Corona

Connector

Screws

2-14 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

17) The Developer Unit is held with 4 tapes and is protected with a paper.
Remove them.

Tapes

Protection paper

NOTE
The Developer Roller is covered with the toner.
Be careful not to remove it when you remove the protection paper.

2-15 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

18) The Regulation Roller has been separated from the Developer Roller so as not to damage the
Developer Roller during transportation.
But the Regulation Roller must press the Developer Roller when the printer operates.

To make the Regulation Roller press the Developer Roller, carry out the following matters

1. Loosen the screw with tag, which is on the connector side and fixes the Pressure Brackets.
As the spring will pull the Pressure Brackets, the Regulation Roller comes to press the
Development Roller. Then, tighten the said screw. (Please remove the tag.)

Screw with tag

(Loosen then tighten it.)

2. Remove the screw with tag on another side.

(This screw is not reused.)

Screw with tag

(This is not reused.)

2-16 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

19) Remove the Toner Hopper Cover.

Toner Hopper Toner Hopper Cover

Cover

20) The accessory package includes a sheet of paper of which size is 36” (width) by 5” (length).
Insert this paper under the Sender Screw in the Toner Hopper.
Please shift the media more to the printer side.

Sender Screw
Paper
(36” x 5”) Paper (36” x 5”)

Shift the paper to

this direction.

21) Shake the Setup Toner Bottle to make the toner

smooth.
(Setup Toner Bottle contains 200g of toner.)

Setup Toner
Bottle

2-17 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

22) Supply the Setup Toner into the Toner Hopper evenly until the top of Sender Screw is hidden by
the toner.

Toner Sender Screw

23) Bring up and remove the printing paper.

Remove the paper.

24) Put back the Toner Hopper Cover.

Toner Hopper Toner Hopper Cover
Cover

2-18 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

25) There is a Cleaning Roller in the Process Unit.
As its both sides are fixed with the tapes, remove them.
One side is fixed with the bracket.
Loosen 2 screws (one is with tooth washer, and another is hexagon head) to remove the bracket.

Hex. Head Screw

Bracket

Cleaning Roller

Screw with
tooth washer

26) Bring up the Cleaning Roller.

As there are notches at both sides to put the Cleaning Roller temporarily, put the Cleaning Roller
there.

Notch
Notch
Cleaning Cleaning
Roller Roller

NOTE
Make sure to re-install the Cleaning Roller before you close the Process Unit!
If you close the Process Unit leaving the Cleaning Roller on the notches, the surface of
Cleaning Roller may be damaged.

2-19 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

27) Open the box of the Drum and take out the Drum.
Fit the Drum Bearing into the black Drum Guides at both sides of the Process Unit, and then
carefully bring down the Drum. (Place the Drum Gear on printer side.)

Drum Gear

Drum Bearing
Drum Guide

NOTE
There are Pins on the Drum Shaft which is in the printer, and there are Projections inside of
the Drum Bearing. When the Drum Shaft rotates, the Pins hold the Projections and the Drum
is rotated.
If you close the Process Unit when Pins and Projections are on the same line, the Pins may be
bent or broken.
Please place the Dents on the Drum Shaft and Marks on the Drum Bearing in the cross
position. Since the Dents show the position of Pins and the Marks show that of Projections,
you will not break the Pins.

Pins
Projections

Dents
Marks

2-20 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

28) Put back the Cleaning Roller, and fix it with Bracket and 2 screws you have removed at the
step 29).

Hex. Head Screw

Bracket

Cleaning Roller

Screw with
tooth washer

NOTE
1. Tighten screws while pressing the Bracket downward.
Tighten the Hexagon Head Screw with a wrench. (Do not use a screwdriver as you may
damage the Drum.)

2. Bracket has an Electrode Plate.

Confirm it is contacted to the shaft of the Cleaning Roller.

Contact
Bracket

Electrode Plate

2-21 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

29) Put back the Image Corona to the Process Unit, and fix it with 2 screws.
Connect the connector of the Wire Cleaning Motor.

Connector
Image Corona

Screw

Screw

30) Close the Process Unit, and fix it with 4 pieces of M4x14 screws.

M4x14 screws

2-22 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

31) Close the Inner Transportation Unit gently.
Confirm the unit is firmly locked with the Locking Hook.

Locking Hook
Inner Transportation Unit

32) Close the Right Side Door finally.

Right Side Door

2-23 K77sm2e2 (Ver. H.0)

2.7 Installing the Toner Cartridge
NOTE
The printer package does not include toner cartridge.
So ask it separately before installing the printer.

1) Open the Toner Cover, and also open the Cartridge Cover.

Cartridge Cover
Toner Cover

2) Shake the Toner Cartridge well to make the inner toner smooth.

Toner Cartridge

2-24 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) Set the Toner Cartridge with its green seal up.

Green seal

Toner Cartridge

4) Catching the left side of Toner Cartridge, rotate it quarter revolution until the green seal comes to
the front.
Green seal

2-25 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

5) Strip off the green seal.

Strip off the seal.

6) Rotate the Toner Cartridge quarter revolution more

until it is blocked.
(The opening of cartridge is moved to the bottom.)

NOTE
1. Do not forget to move down the opening.
Otherwise the toner is not supplied to the Developer Unit and you will have the Toner
Empty Error soon.

2. Do not catch the central part of Toner Cartridge when you rotate it, because the toner may
spout out from the opening.

7) Close the Cartridge Cover, and then close the Toner Cover.

Cartridge Cover Toner Cover

2-26 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

2.8 Loading the Roll Media into Roll Deck
NOTE
The printer package does not include printing paper.
So ask it separately before installing the printer.

2.8.1 In case of roll deck 1, 2 and 3

1) Draw out the concerning Roll Deck.

2) Rotate the Roll Spool to the winding direction (see the following drawing) for 1 revolution, and then
bring it up to take out.

Spool

NOTE
During normal use, gears on the left mesh
each other.
The purpose to rotate the Roll Spool to the
winding direction is to make these gears out of
mesh.
If you bring up the Roll Spool without rotating,
these gears may be broken.

Gear

2-27 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) Pressing down the green lever, insert the Roll Spool
to the new roll media.

NOTE
Be careful of the winding direction of roll media.
Please keep the correct direction as the following left drawing.

Correct Not correct

4) There are size guides on the Roll Spool.

Align the edge of roll media and the concerning size
guide.
Then release the green lever to catch the roll media Size guide
surely.

2-28 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

5) Install the Roll Spool into the Roll Deck.

NOTE
There is a driving belt inside of the Roll Deck.
This belt must be flat and contact the bottom of
black cylinder on the right of the Roll Spool.
It must not be twisted or separated from the
black cylinder.

Black cylinder Driving belt

Correct Not correct (Belt is twisted.)

2-29 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

6) There is a slit in each Roll Deck.
As it is possible to insert a cutter knife in this slit, cut the leading part of roll media to straighten the
leading edge.

Knife

Slit

7) Insert the leading edge of roll media between feeding rollers, and then rotate the upper feeding
roller as the drawing shows to feed the roll media about 1 or 2cm.

Feeding rollers

NOTE
There is a positioning hole only in the Roll Deck 3.
Feed the roll media until its leading edge can see in the hole, and stop feeding when the
leading edge is center of the hole.

Leading edge of roll media

Roll media

2-30 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

8) There is a Media Selector on the right of the Roll Media.
Press any of “PLAIN PAPER”, “VELLUM / TRACING” and “FILM” according to the type of media
you loaded.
If you loaded an inch media, select either “ENGINEERING” or “ARCHITECTURE”.
(You will select “ENGINEERING” when the button is up, and will select “ARCHITECTURE” when it
is down.)

NOTE
1. Do not make a wrong setting.
This setting of media type will effect on several printer settings as feeding speed or fusing
temperature.
If the media type selected on the Media Selector is different from the actual type of media,
you may have a problem like wrong print size or poor image.

2. The machine will recognize the selected media is “plain paper” when no button is pressed
down.

9) Close the Roll Deck finally.

2-31 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

2.8.2 In case of roll deck 4
The position of feeding roller in the Roll Deck 4 is different from other Roll Decks.
Therefore, the way of setting the roll media is a little different.
Only the points noted are shown below.
As for the other points, refer to [8.1 Roll Deck 1, 2 & 3] on and after the page 2-27.

1) Draw out the Roll Deck 4.

2) Remove the Roll Spool from the Roll Deck, and then
set the new roll media onto the Roll Spool.

NOTE
Please keep the correct direction as the following left drawing.
(It is the same way you make for Roll Deck 1, 2 & 3.)

Correct Not correct

2-32 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) Install the Roll Spool into the Roll Deck 4.

4) Insert the leading edge of roll media under the Roll media
feeding roller.
Feeding
roller

5) Rotate the green knob clockwise to feed the roll

media about 1 or 2cm.

Knob

6) Close the Roll Deck 4 finally.

2-33 K77sm2e3 (Ver. H.0)

2.9 Installing the Manual Tray
Install the Manual Tray to the setting holes on the front face.

Setting holes
PAPE R
DECK
WIRE -C
LEAN

EX P-CL 1 MF
EA N 2
3
4
C UT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2

D3 PF

D4 CO PY
D ENSITY

MENU
←
→
*
ENTER
RESET

3 4

Manual Tray

2-34 K77sm2e4 (Ver. H.0)

2.10 Turning on the Printer
1) Plug the printer to the exclusive wall outlet.

NOTE
Please confirm the outlet satisfies the following condition before plugging the printer into.

U.S.A. / Europe 220 to 240V (+6% to -10%), 16A, 50/60Hz

2) There is a Power Switch on the upper left of front side.

Press its “|” side to turn on the printer.

P AP ER
DEC K
W IR E-
CLEA N

E XP -C MF
LE AN 1 2
3
4
C UT D1
S EL EC
T E XIT
D2

D3 PF

C OP Y
D4 DE NS IT
Y

M ENU
←
→
*
EN TE R
R ESET

3 4

3) The Printer starts warming up the Fuser Unit, and the Ready Indicator on the Operation Panel
starts flashing.
It keeps on flashing until the Fuser Unit is enough warmed up and the printer gets ready for
printing.

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

Ready Indicator flashes.

4) It will take about 6 minutes until the printer gets ready.

When it gets ready, the Ready Indicator stops flashing but stays lighting.
Send a print job from the outer devices as PC and scanner.

2-35 K77sm2e4 (Ver. H.0)

2.11 Supplying the Toner into Developer Unit
1) Press and hold the [ * ] key, and then press switches in the order
of [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode.
The lamp of [MENU] Key lights green when you enter the Service Mode.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) You need select the Special Mode.

To select the Special Mode, press the [MENU] Key to indicate “9” on the most left digit, which is
the Mode Number of the Special Mode.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) You need select the Toner Supplying Mode.

To select the Toner Supplying Mode, press [ ] or [ ] Key to indicate “9” on the 2nd digit from
the left, which is the Mode Number of the Toner Supplying Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

2-36 K77sm2e4 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to start supplying the toner to the Developer Unit.
The printer will continue to operate for about 10 minutes.
“88” on 5th and 6th digits keeps on flashing during the operation, so do not turn off the printer.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

5) “88” on 5th and 6th digits stops flashing when the printer has stopped operating.
Press the [ONLINE] Key to cancel the Service Mode.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

2-37 K77sm2e4 (Ver. H.0)

2.12 Initial Cut
The leading edge of new roll media may be rough.
To straighten the leading edge easily, the printer has a convenient function called “Initial Cut”.
If you select one roll media and make the Initial Cut, the leading part (240mm from the leading edge) of
roll media is cut and ejected.
The leading edge of that roll media is straight after the Initial Cut.

Leading part of roll media

Make the Initial Cut in the following way.

1) Pressing the [SELECT] Key, select the Roll Deck of which roll media you would like to make Initial
Cut.
PAPER DECK PAPER DECK

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SELECT CUT SELECT CUT

2) Press the [CUT] Key.

The leading part of the selected roll media is cut and ejected automatically.

PAPER DECK

1 2 3 4

SELECT CUT

2-38 K77sm2e4 (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 3
Print Process

Page
3.1 Characteristic of Toner 3- 1

3.2 Print Processes 3- 2

3.2.1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 3- 4
3.2.2 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) 3- 5
3.2.3 Charge of Drum 3- 6
3.2.4 Exposure 3- 7
3.2.5 Development 3- 8
3.2.6 Pre-transfer LED 3-11
3.2.7 Transfer 3-12
3.2.8 Separation 3-13
3.2.9 Fusing 3-14

3.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit 3-15

3.4 Toner Collection Process 3-19

K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.1 Characteristic of Toner
The toner used for KIP8000 Printer has a characteristic to be charged “negative” (like a negative object),
which tends to be attracted to a relatively “positive” object.

Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows.

1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A.

2. Toner exists on the object A.

Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and the
object A is “negative”. (In another word, object B is more “positive” than the object A.)
As the toner is “negative”, it is attracted to the object B which is more “positive”.
If you move the object B close to the object A, therefore, the toner moves onto the object B.

Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner moves from A to B.

Object B with high potential B B

B
(Relatively positive)

On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher than
the object A.
Even if you move the object A close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B because
negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other.

Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner stays on B.

Object B with high potential B B

(Relatively positive) B

Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place with
a higher potential.
If we properly control the electric potentials, therefore, it is possible to move the toner from one place to
another as we intend, or it is also possible to remove the toner from unwanted place.
KIP8000 Printer controls the electric potentials properly working each part as Drum, Corona Units,
Lamps, Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller.
The movement of toner is controlled correctly and several processes as Development, Toner Transfer,
Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.

3-1 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2 Print Processes
One cycle of print consists of the following 9 processes.

1. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)

2. Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
3. Charge of Drum
4. Exposure
5. Development
6. Pre-transfer LED
7. Transfer
8. Separation
9. Fusing

Grid Plate

3
Image Corona
4

LED Head Cleaning Roller

Fuser Roller
2 Eraser Lamp

Regulation 1
Roller
9
5

Separation Corona

8 Separation Lamp Pressure Roller

6 7

Development Roller Transfer Corona

Toner Supply Roller Pre-transfer LED

3-2 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials.
The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner.

Voltage of
Cleaning Roller
+800V
+700V
+600V
+500V
+400V

+300V 2
Voltage of
+200V 7 Transfer Corona
+100V

0V
1 1
-100V 8
5
-200V

-300V 4
-400V Voltage of
SP1 6
-500V Development Roller
3
SP2
-600V

-700V

-800V
-900V

Potential on the surface of Drum

SP1 : For black image
SP2 : For white image

Name of part Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle Voltage during Toner
Collection Process
Image Corona About -5.8KV (-2.0mA +/-0.05mA) -
Wire
Grid Plate -780V +/-20V -
Development -250V +/-3V +350V +/-3V
Roller (It varies following the machine temperature.)
Regulation Roller -100V +/-3V from the voltage of Development 0V +/-3V from the voltage
(Center) Roller of Development Roller
Regulation Roller +365V +/-3V from the voltage of Development +120V +/-5V from the
(Both sides) Roller voltage of Development
Roller
Toner Supply -500V +/-3V from the voltage of Development -340V +/-3V from the
Roller Roller voltage of Development
Roller
Transfer Corona +520V +/-30V -
(When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Separation AC (11KVp-p) + DC (-250V +/-3V : Plain paper) -
Corona (-300V +/-3V : Tracing paper)
(-10V +/-3V : Film)
Cleaning Roller +800V +/-3V -500V +/-3V

Reference
When the printer is going to stop after printing, or when the used Roll Deck is changed with
other one, the KIP8000 Printer will make “Toner Collection Process” to take back the remained
toner into the Developer Unit until it starts next print job.
Refer to [3.4 Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-19 for the detail.

3-3 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)
As the first step of print cycle, it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the Drum,
which has remained there after the former print cycle.
The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light.
So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp.
The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V by this process.

0V Eraser Lamp
0V

Drum

Negative electric
charges

3-4 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.2 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
Some amount of toner was not transferred onto the printing media but remained on the Drum in the
former print cycle.
This remained toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller.
The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +800V (+/-3V), and the potential of Drum is 0V at this time
because the Eraser Lamp has removed the electric charges in the former “Erasing” process.
As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” and the Drum is “negative”, the toner moves from the
Drum to the Cleaning Roller.

Cleaning Roller
0V +800V
0V

Drum

Remained toner

NOTE
If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller
may not be able to remove all of them.
But this toner is removed from the Drum in the later Development Process.

3-5 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.3 Charge of Drum
The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum.
The surface of Drum is charged with -820V evenly as a result, which corresponds to the white area of
the printed image pattern.
Voltages (Current) supplied to the Image Corona Wire and the Grid Plate are as follows.

Corona Wire About -5.8KV (-2mA +/-0.05mA)

Grid Plate -780V +/-20V

Image Corona

-820V
-820V
0V
0V

0V
Drum

3-6 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.4 Exposure
According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws infrared light onto some part of Drum
which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern. As the Drum has a characteristic to lose
the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light, this part of Drum surface loses the charges and
its potential becomes about -50V. (This potential is not constant but is variable by the environment.)
The other part of Drum surface, which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head, keeps -820V of
potential that was given by the Image Corona.
An invisible electric image pattern consists of -820V area and -50V area is formed on the surface of
Drum as a result. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”.)

LED Head

-820V
-50V -820V
-50V
0V
0V

0V
Drum

(Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)

-50V -820V

Reference
Even if the toner remains on the Drum, it will not block the light from the LED Head as the
diameter of toner is much smaller than that of 1 pixel of LED.
You do not have to worry because the electric charges on the Drum are surely removed.

3-7 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.5 Development
The Development Roller, which is evenly covered with the toner, is contacted to the Drum because the
Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum side. (The width of contact point is about 5mm.)
The Development Roller is supplied with -250V (+/-3V) during print cycle.
And both -820V area and -50V area exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has
been formed in the former Exposure process.
Seen from the voltage of Development Roller (-250V), the -50V area on the Drum is relatively “positive”.
So the toner moves from the Development Roller to the -50V area of Drum.
On the other hand, the -820V area is relatively “negative” seen from the Development Roller. So the
toner does not move to the Drum but stays on the Development Roller.
A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result.

Drum Drum
-50V
-820V
-50V
-250V -820V
-50V

Development Roller

Development Roller

Before Development After Development : Toner moves only

to -50V area

-50V -820V

(Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image)

3-8 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

Even if some toner was not removed by the Cleaning Roller but remained on the -820V area of Drum
(It corresponds to the white area of the print) in the former [3.2.2 Drum Cleaning], this toner is removed
at the time of Development because it moves to the Development Roller of which potential (-250V) is
higher than Drum (-820V).
So there will be no case that unnecessary black spot is printed on the white area of the print.
The remained toner moved to the Development Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then
reused.

1. Toner remained on the Drum

2. Toner moves from the Drum to the Development Roller.
3. Development Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller
4. Toner Supply Roller carries the toner to the inside of the Developer Unit.
5. Toner is reused.

Remained toner

2
-820V

-250V
5

3
4

Before Development After Development

(Toner is remaining on the white area.) (Toner is removed from the white area.)

-50V -820V

3-9 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Reference

(1) The Developer Unit has not only the Development Roller but also 2 more rollers inside
which are also supplied with the individual voltages.
The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the
difference of potentials among these rollers, and covers the Development Roller with the
toner in the end.
Refer to [3.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] on the page 3-15
to know how the Developer Unit controls the movement.

(2) The print image tends to become lighter if the temperature inside machine is colder.
Even if the temperature is cold, however, it is possible to avoid the light image if the
voltage of the Development Roller (Developer Bias) is low.
The voltage actually provided to the Development Roller varies according to the
temperature therefore.
You will specify each Developer Bias Level for the cold situation (10oC or colder) and for
the hot situation (20oC or hotter) in the Service Mode.
Provided Bias is constant and its value follows the specifications in the Service Mode if the
temperature is 10oC or colder or 20oC or hotter.
Between 10oC and 20oC, the Developer Bias is automatically calculated considering the
Developer Bias Levels specified in the Service Mode, and its value gets lower if the
temperature is colder.
With the factory default, -300V is specified for 10oC or colder, and -250V is specified for
20oC or hotter.

10 20 Temperature (oC)

Developer Bias Level for 20oC or hotter

-250V

-300V
Developer Bias varies between 10 to 20oC.

Developer Developer Bias Level for 10oC or colder

Bias (V)

3-10 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.6 Pre-transfer LED
The potential of non-toner area of the Drum is still -820V after the Development.
If we take the next Transfer Process with this state, it is very difficult to separate the printing media
from the Drum and causes a jam as the media is strongly attracted to this -820V area by the static force.
To reduce the static force before the Transfer Process, the Pre-transfer LED throws light onto the Drum
to remove the negative electric charges from the non-toner area.
The potential of non-toner area is increased from -820V to -80V (This potential is not constant but is
variable by the environment.) by this process.

-820V
-80V -80V

Pre-transfer LED

3-11 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.7 Transfer
The printing media is charged positively as the Transfer Corona discharges positive electric charges
from under the media.
The toner existing on the -50V area on the Drum will move to the printing media because the potential
of the media comes to be higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process.
The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.

Transfer Corona Wire : +520V +/-30V (When the Insulated Drum is used.)

Positive electric charges

Drum
-50V
-50V -50V
-50V

Printing media

Transfer Guide Plate Transfer Corona

Reference

The Transfer Guide Plate, which exists before the transfer point, is grounded through the
Varistor to keep only the necessary amount of positive electric charges while dismissing over
charges to the ground.

1. If the Transfer Guide Plate is directly grounded, the positive electric charges given to the
printing media will escape to the ground through the Transfer Guide Plate.
As the printing media is not enough charged positive, much toner remains on the Drum
not being transferred onto the media.
The image looks very light in this case.

2. If the Transfer Guide Plate is floated from the ground so as to block the escape route of
the positive electric charges, it collects too much positive charges because the Transfer
Corona exists nearby it.
As the Transfer Guide Plate is strongly charged positive, it attracts the toner floating
inside the machine.
This toner attracted onto the Transfer Guide Plate will cause the dirt on the back of the
print.

3-12 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.8 Separation
The printing media is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer because the potential of media is positive
and that of Drum is negative (about -50 to -80V).
It is necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the media from the Drum by removing the static force
between them.
The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage (11KVp-p) and the
DC voltage (-250V for plain paper, -300V for tracing paper and -10V for film). Negative charges are
generated more than positive ones by the compensation of the DC voltage (-250V), which mainly
results in removing the positive charges of the printing media.
On the other hand, the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Corona Wires to remove the
negative charges of the Drum.
The static force between the printing media and the Drum is reduced as a result, and the media is
separated from the Drum by its weight.

Negative charges of the Drum are removed

by the light from the Separation Lamp.

-50V
-50V
-80V -50V -80V

Separation Lamp
Separation Corona

Positive charges of the media are

removed by the AC discharge.

NOTE
With the factory default setting, the Separation Lamp will not light if you use a film.
But the printed image may not be so clear if you use some special type of film.
You may be able to sharpen the image if you make the Separation Lamp light even in this
case.
It is possible to change the ON/OFF setting of Separation Lamp for film in the Service Mode
(Or User Mode).
Please refer to the following pages

[(35) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (Item No.C6)] on the page 8-75
[8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on the page 8-167

3-13 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.2.9 Fusing
After Transfer / Separation Processes, the printing media is transported to the Fuser Unit by the Inner
Transportation Unit.
The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller. The Fuser Roller is very hot,
and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller by the spring.
The toner is firmly fused onto the printing media by the heat and the pressure when the media passes
through between these rollers.

Fuser Roller

Inner Transportation Unit Pressure Roller

3-14 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner
in the Developer Unit
There are 3 kinds of rollers called “Development Roller”, “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply Roller”
in the Developer Unit.
Each roller is supplied with its own voltage.
In the following list, the voltage of the Development Roller (-250V) is measured against the ground.
The other voltages mean the difference against the voltage of Development Roller.

Name of roller Supplied voltage Supplied voltage

(Against the ground) (Against the voltage of Development Roller)
Development Roller -250V +/-3V -
Regulation Roller (Center) - -500V +/-3V
Regulation Roller (Both sides) - -100V +/-3V
Toner Supply Roller - +365V +/-3V

Regulation Roller : Both sides Insulator Regulation Roller : Center

(+365V against Development Roller voltage) (-100V against Development Roller
voltage)

Development Roller
(-250V against GND)

Toner Supply Roller

(-500V against Development Roller voltage)

NOTE
The Regulation Roller is divided into central area and both sides area by the insulator, and
individual voltages is supplied to each area.

3-15 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Reference

The print image tends to become lighter if the temperature inside machine is colder.
Even if the temperature is cold, however, it is possible to avoid the light image if the voltage of
the Development Roller (Developer Bias) is low.
The voltage actually provided to the Development Roller varies according to the temperature
therefore.
You will specify each Developer Bias Level for the cold situation (10oC or colder) and for the
hot situation (20oC or hotter) in the Service Mode.
Provided Bias is constant and its value follows the specifications in the Service Mode if the
temperature is 10oC or colder or 20oC or hotter.
Between 10oC and 20oC, the Developer Bias is automatically calculated considering the
Developer Bias Levels specified in the Service Mode, and its value gets lower if the
temperature is colder.
With the factory default, -300V is specified for 10oC or colder, and -250V is specified for 20oC
or hotter.

10 20 Temperature (oC)

Developer Bias Level for 20oC or hotter

-250V

-300V
Developer Bias varies between 10 to 20oC.

Developer Developer Bias Level for 10oC or colder

Bias (V)

The voltages for Toner Supply Roller, Regulation Roller (center) and Regulation Roller (both
sides) are decided taking the Developer Roller voltage as a standard.
If the Developer Roller voltage varies according to the temperature, therefore, these voltages
also vary same degree.
o o
10 C 20 C
300
Voltage for Regulation
Roller (both sides)
200

100

0
365V
Voltage for Development
-100 Roller
-200

-300 100V

-400 Voltage for Regulation

500V Roller (center)
-500
Voltage for Toner Supply
-600
Roller
-700

3-16 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is
controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.

1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Development Roller.

2. The voltage of the Toner Supply Roller is 500V lower than that of Development Roller.
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the
Development Roller.
Then the Development Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller.

3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Development Roller by the spring, and these
2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point.
Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required, the Regulation Roller limits the
amount of toner that can pass through between 2 rollers. So very small amount of toner can pass
through between rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside.
As the voltage of Development Roller is 100V higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), the
toner which has passed through between these rollers is firmly attracted to the Development
Roller.
Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Development Roller as a result.

4. Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside.
This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller.

Regulation Roller : Center

(-100V against Development Roller voltage)

Scraper

1 2

Toner Supply Roller Development Roller

(-500V against Development Roller voltage) (-250V against GND)

3-17 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

 5. Both sides of the Regulation Roller have higher potential than the Development Roller as the
voltage of Regulation Roller (both sides) is 365V higher than that of Development Roller.
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the Regulation
Roller.
The side areas of the Development Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, so it is
possible to avoid the toner drops into the machine from the side.

Regulation Roller : Center

(+365V against Development Roller voltage)

Development Roller
(-250V against GND)

Regulation Roller : Center

(-100V against Development Roller voltage)

Toner area

Regulation Roller : Both sides Non-toner area

(+365V against Development Roller voltage)

Development Roller
(-250V against GND)

3-18 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3.4 Toner Collection Process
As explained in [3.2.2 Drum Cleaning] on the page 3-5, the Cleaning Roller is supplied with +800V to
remove the remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle.
This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3 cases.

(1) When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and then going to stop.
(2) When the used roll media is ended and changed with another one.
(3) When the used roll media if changed from one to another because the print size specified in the
job is different.

This process to return the toner is called “Toner Collection Process”.

When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the printer will take the Toner
Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions.

1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from the
Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V.

2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -500V in the Toner Collection Process.
As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller, toner on the Cleaning Roller
moves onto the Drum.

Remained toner

Cleaning Roller

0V
0V
0V
-500V
0V

0V
Drum

3-19 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

3. The voltage supplied to the Development Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-3V) in the Toner
Collection Process.
As the potential of Development Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum
moves onto the Development Roller.
Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Development Roller and the Toner
Supply Roller.

Remained toner

0V

0V Drum

0V

+350V

Development Roller

3-20 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Reference

Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows.

Name of roller Supplied Voltage Supplied voltage

(Against the ground) (Against the voltage of Development
Roller)
Developer Roller +350V +/-3V -
Toner Supply Roller - -340V +/-3V
Regulation Roller - 0V +/-3V
(Center)
Regulation Roller - +120V +/-5V
(Both sides)

Regulation Roller : Both sides Regulation Roller : Center

(+120V against Development Roller voltage) (+0V against Development Roller voltage)

Development Roller Toner Supply Roller

(+350V against GND) (-340V against Development Roller voltage)

3-21 K77sm3e1 (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 4
Electrical Systems

Page
4.1 Summary 4- 1

4.2 Location of Electrical Components 4- 2

4.2.1 Printed Circuit Board 4- 2
4.2.2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer 4- 6
4.2.3 DC Power Supplies 4- 8
4.2.4 Motors 4-10
4.2.5 Blowers & Fans 4-12
4.2.6 Clutches & Brakes 4-15
4.2.7 Solenoids 4-17
4.2.8 Heaters & SSR 4-18
4.2.9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters 4-20
4.2.10 Relays 4-22
4.2.11 Micro Switches 4-24
4.2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat, Toner Sensors & SPS 4-25
4.2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks 4-28
4.2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder 4-31
4.2.15 Fuses 4-32

4.3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog Output from HVP & BIAS 4-34
4.3.1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4-34
4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1 (For Image Corona) 4-35
4.3.3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3 (For Transfer Corona) 4-37
4.3.4 Checking & Adjustment of HVP4 (For Separation Corona) 4-40
4.3.5 Checking & Adjustment of HVP5 (For Cleaning Roller) 4-43
4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6 (For Grid Plate of Image Corona) 4-46
4.3.7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS (For Developer Unit) 4-50
4.3.7.1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (for Print Cycle) 4-51
(1) Negative Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-51
(2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-54
(3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-57
(4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Both sides) 4-60
4.3.7.2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment (for Toner Collection Process) 4-63
(1) Positive Developer Bias for Development Roller 4-63
(2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller 4-65
(3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center) 4-67
(4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Both sides) 4-69

4.4 Location of Connectors 4-71

4.4.1 Process Unit 4-71
4.4.2 Base of machine 4-72
4.4.3 Back of machine 4-73
4.4.4 Top of machine 4-74
4.4.5 Left side of machine 4-75
4.4.6 Right side of machine 4-76
4.4.7 Bypass Feeder Unit 4-77
4.4.8 Top Drawer Unit 4-78
4.4.9 Middle Drawer Unit 4-79
4.4.10 Bottom Drawer Unit 4-80

K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.1 Summary
This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer, which is located on DC Controller.
This microcomputer reads input signals from sensors, control loads such as motors, SSRs, solenoid,
clutches and blowers on programmed timing.

Sensor Micro Computer Driver DC Load

(CPU & ROM)

DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5Vdc is applied on this DC Controller safely.

Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage.

0Vdc: blue Signal in to DC Controller (sensors): purple
5Vdc: yellow Signal out from DC Controller: gray
24Vdc: orange
36Vdc: pink

CAUTION
There are batteries on the DC Controller PCB (PW7720) and the Mother Board of IMA
Controller (Model K-77 ICA).

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Waste disposal method of battery:
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.

4-1 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2 Location of Electrical Components
4.2.1 Printed Circuit Board
1
2

3 4 5

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 PW7771 Indication PCB B PW7771 Several operations can be done
(Operation Panel PCB) and operational information is
indicated.
2 PW7770 Indication PCB A PW7770 Size and type of each roll media
(Media Indicator PCB) is indicated.
3 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Upper Deck “in use” indication
4 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Medium Deck “in use” indication
5 PW7170 Deck Indicator PW7170-01 Bottom Deck “in use” indication
6 PW7790 Paper Size PCB PW7790 Detecting cut sheet size

(Seen from the top)

10

11

7 8 9

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

7 PW7758 LED Driver PCB PW7758 Driver for Pre-Transfer LED
8 PW7755 DC Driver PCB PW7755 Driver for Motors, HVPs, Bias,
Fans, Solenoid and Clutches
9 PW3590 DC Translation PCB PW3590-01 Junction for LED Head
(DC Terminal PCB)
10 PW7757 Transmission Driver PCB PW7757 Driver for the Transmission PCB
(Toner Quantity Sensor used for toner quantity check
LED Driver PCB)
11 Surface Potential Sensor ES2A-4102 Detecting Surface Potential
PCB (600mm) (Always replace with SPS Sensor)

4-2 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Right side)

16 17

18

19

20 21

12 13 14 15

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

12 PW7720 DC Controller PCB PW7720 Overall Sequence Control with
Interface
13 PW5580 HUMID Humidity Sensor PCB PW5580 Detecting Humidity in the
machine
14 PW3599 Signal Terminal PCB PW3599 Signal Junction
15 PW7772 DCP Indication PCB PW7772 Indicating the output conditions
of DC Power Supplies.
16 PW7750 Transmission PCB PW7750 Checking the quantity of toner in
the Toner Cartridge.
(It is inside the Toner Cover and
LEDs throw light to the Receiver
PCB.)
17 PW7751 Receiver PCB PW7751 Checking the quantity of toner in
the Toner Cartridge.
(It is on the machine side and
receives the light from the
Transmission PCB.)
18 PW3575UA Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Media size and material selector
of Roll 1
19 PW3575UB Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Media size and material selector
of Roll 2
20 PW3575UC Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Media size and material selector
of Roll 3
21 PW3575UD Paper Choice PCB U PW3575 Media size and material selector
of Roll 4

CAUTION
There are batteries on the DC Controller PCB (PW7720) and the Mother Board of IMA
Controller (Model K-77 ICA).

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Waste disposal method of battery:
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.

4-3 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Left side)

22

23

24
28

25

26 27

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

22 TP0362 FUMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Fuser Motor Controller
23 TP1142 DRMTR Motor Controller PCB TP1142 Drum Motor Controller
24 PW7756 CUTMTR Motor Controller PCB A PW7756 Cutter Motor Controller
25 PW6125(C) Phase Control PCB C PW6125 Reducing flicker.
26 PW4210 AC Circuit Board B PW4210 Terminal of AC
27 TP0362 PFMTR Motor Controller PCB TP0362 Paper Feed Motor Controller
28 PW7740 Temperature Detect PW7740 Detecting the temperature of IR
PCB Lamps.

(Rear side)

33 34

29 30 31 32

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

29 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter
30 PW2215 Filter PCB C PW2215 AC line filter
31 PW6624 PC Controller PCB A PW6624 Shutting down the controller PC
32 PW4211 Filter PCB PW4211 Noise filter for the controller
33 PW5490 Reception PCB PW5490 Communication with optional
device
34 PW5491 Transmission PCB PW5491 Communication with optional
device

4-4 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Inside)

35 36

→
*
EN TE R
R ESET

39

37 38 40 41 42

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

35 PW7730 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB A PW7730 Removing electric charges from the
Drum before starting the print
process
36 PW7731 E_LAMP Eraser Lamp PCB B PW7731 Removing electric charges from the
Drum before starting the print
process
37 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB C PW1034 Removing the electric charges to
(Separation Lamp) help paper separation
38 PW1034 S_LAMP Eraser PCB I PW1034 Removing the electric charges to
(Separation Lamp) help paper separation
39 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 1 Roll Size Sensor
PCB
40 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 2 Roll Size Sensor
PCB
41 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 3 Roll Size Sensor
PCB
42 PW3597 DC Translation PCB P PW3597 Roll Deck 4 Roll Size Sensor
PCB

4-5 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.2 High Voltage Power Supplies & Transformer
(Seen from the top)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 HVP1 HV1 High Voltage Power KHKG-063 Supplying the high voltage to
Supply the Image Corona.
2 HVP5 HV5 High Voltage Power AHKG-067 Supplying the high voltage to
Supply the Cleaning Roller.

(Left side)
5

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

3 HVP3 HV_TR High Voltage Power BHKG-070 Supplying the high voltage to
Supply the Transfer Corona.
4 HVP4 HV_AC High Voltage Power FHKG-046 Supplying the high voltage AC to
Supply the Separation Corona.
5 HVP6 HV6 High Voltage Power KHKG-065 Supplying the high voltage to
Supply the Grid Plate.
6 BIAS Bias Power Supply KHKG-062 Supplying the Developer Bias to
each roller in the Developer Unit.
Output 1 : Toner Supply Roller
Output 2 : Developer Roller
Output 3 : Regulation Roller
(Center)
Output 4 : Regulation Roller
(Both sides)

4-6 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Rear side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

7 T1 Insulation Transformer KCT-01B Converting the inputted AC into
(EUR & USA) 24VAC for Dehumidify Heater of
Roll 1 and 2

4-7 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.3 DC Power Supplies
(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 DCP1 DC Power Supply ZWS240PAF- Supplying +24VDC (240W).
24/J

(Seen from the top)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

2 DCP2 DC Power Supply LEA150F-5 Supplying +5VDC (150W) to
sensors, LED Head, DC Controller
and so on.

4-8 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Rear side)

3 4

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

3 DCP3 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF- Supplying +36VDC (150W) to the
36/J Drum Motor (M1).
4 DCP4 DC Power Supply ZWS150PAF- Supplying +36VDC (150W) to Paper
36/J Feed Motor (M2), Cutter Motor (M3)
and Fuser Motor (M5).
5 DCP5 DC Power Supply ZWS10-24/J Supplying +24VDC (10W) to the
PC Controller PCB A.

4-9 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.4 Motors
(Left side)

5
6

1
4

3 2

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 M1 DRMTR DC Motor TL1142 Driving both the Drum and the
(Drum Motor) Developer Unit.
2 M2 PFMTR DC Motor TL0314 Driving the roll feeding mechanism.
(Paper Feed Motor)
3 M3 CUTMTR Stepping Motor KT56LM4 Driving the Cutter Unit.
(Cutter Motor) G-004
4 M4 DPMTR DC Motor DU2422-1 It presses the Developer Unit to
(Developer Positioning the Drum, and also separates
Motor) the Developer from the Drum.
5 M5 FUMTR DC Motor TL0314 Driving the Fuser Roller.
(Fuser Motor)
6 M10 T_MTR DC Motor DME37B6 Driving the cut media feeding
(Bypass Feeding Motor) H30B mechanism.

4-10 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Seen from the top)

8 9

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

7 M6 HOP_MTR2 DC Motor DU2711-3 Driving the Toner Hopper to
Toner Supply Motor 2 supply the toner to the
Developer Unit.
8 M8 DC Motor LA20-282BD Driving the Cleaning Pad to
(LED Cleaning Motor) clean the LED Head.
9 M9 DC Motor LA20-282BD Driving the Cleaning Pad to
(Wire Cleaning Motor) clean the Image Corona Wire.

(Right side)

10

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

10 M7 HOP_MTR1 DC Motor DME34B50 Driving the Toner Cartridge to
(Toner Supply G96B supply the toner to the Toner
Motor 1) Hopper.

4-11 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.5 Blowers & Fans
(Rear side)

3 2 1

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 BL1 SEPBLW Sirocco Fan TA0409 Inhaling the air from the bottom of
(Separation Fan) Internal Transportation Unit to help
paper separation.
4 Ozone Filters are provided.
2 BL17, 18 & EXBLW3 Fan Motor CNDC24B7- Exhausting the inside air..
19 (Exhaust Fan 3) 027 An Ozone Filter is provided to each
of them.
3 FM2 Fan Motor FBA09A24H Cooling down both the DCP3 and
(Cooling Fan 2) the DCP4.

4-12 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Seen from the top)

4 4
(BL2) (BL4) (BL5) (BL6) (BL7) (BL3)

10 9 8 9 10
(BL12) (BL13) (BL14) (BL15) (BL16)

(BL8) (BL9) (BL10) (BL11)

6 7

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

4 BL2 & BL3 EXBLW_L Sirocco Fan FAL-14C4RH Cooling down the top of the
EXBLW_H (Exhaust Blower) Fuser.
5 BL4, BL5, PRESBLW_L Cross Flow Fan FCB34AD24 Blowing the air from the top so
BL6 & BL7 PRESBLW_H (Pressure Blowers) as to help the paper goes into
the Fuser Area easily.
6 BL8 & BL9 COOL_FAN1 Cross Flow Fan FCB34AD24 Cooling down the LED Head.
(LED Cooling Fans 1)
7 BL10 & BL11 COOL_FAN2 Cross Flow Fan FCB34AD24 Cooling down the LED Head.
(LED Cooling Fans 2)
8 BL14 SEPBLW2 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ Helping paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist -13 Drum.
Blower 2) It works always during print
regardless of the paper size.
9 BL13 & BL15 SEPBLW3 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ Helping paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist -13 Drum.
Blower 3) They work if the paper is 364mm
(17") or wider.
10 BL12 & BL16 SEPBLW4 Sirocco Fan E0515H24B7AZ Helping paper’s separation from the
(Separation Assist -13 Drum.
Blower 4) They work if the paper is 841mm
(30") or wider.

4-13 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Right side)

11

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

11 FM1 Fan Motor FBA09A24H Cooling down the DCP1.
(Cooling Fan 1)

(Left side)

13

12

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

12 FM3 Fan Motor FBA06T24H Cooling down the Cutter Motor
(Cooling Fan 3) Controller PCB (PW7756).
13 FM4 Fan Motor FBA06T24H Cooling down the Cutter Motor (M3)
(Cooling Fan 4)

4-14 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.6 Clutches & Brakes
(Left side)

9 10

1
5&6
3

7&8

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 MC1 RP_CL Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Roll Paper Feed
Clutch 1)
2 MC2 RP_CL2 Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Roll Paper Feed
Clutch 2)
3 MC3 RP_CL3 Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Roll Paper Feed
Clutch 3)
4 MC4 RP_CL4 Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Roll Paper Feed
Clutch 4)
5 MC5 P_GATE Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-160
(Paper Gate Clutch)
6 MC10 PG_BK Electromagnetic Brake BB-3.2-E01
(Paper Gate Brake)
7 MC6 RP_FEED Electromagnetic Clutch BO-5--E01
(Paper Feed Clutch) (Or AMC20)
8 MC9 PF_BK Electromagnetic Brake BB-3.2-E01
(Paper Feed Brake)
9 MC7 MF_CL Electromagnetic Clutch 2 BJ-3.5-E06
(Bypass Feed Clutch)
10 MC8 RP_CL1 Electromagnetic Clutch BJ-3.5-166
(Roll Deck 1 Feed
Clutch)

4-15 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (Right side)

11

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

11 MC11 HOPPER Electromagnetic Clutch 1 BJ-3.5-E07
(Toner Supply Clutch)

4-16 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.7 Solenoids
(Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 SL1 FU_SL Solenoid G1247 G1247 Moving the Fuser Entrance Guide
(Fuser Solenoid) Plate up and down.
This solenoid is locked and does
not function presently.
2 SL2 CT0_SL Solenoid G1253-K7 Moving the oil pad to lubricate the
(Cutter Oil Supply Cutter Blade.
Solenoid)

4 3

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

3 SL3 T_SL1 Solenoid Moving the Bypass Feeding Roller
(Bypass Feeding Roller up and down.
Down Solenoid)
4 SL4 T_SL2 Solenoid G-1053-K12 Moving the Bypass Reversal Roller
(Bypass Reversal Roller up and down.
Down Solenoid)

4-17 K77sm4e1 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.8 Heaters & SSR
(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 H1 F_LAMP1 IR Lamp QIR220- Heating the center of the Fuser
1750KIC Roller.
(EUR & USA)
2 H2 F_LAMP2 IR Lamp QIR220- Heating both sides of the Fuser
1350KIAG Roller.
(EUR & USA)
3 SSR1 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turning on and off the IR Lamp
(H1).
4 SSR2 Solid State Relay S5N-225HV Turning on and off the IR Lamp
(H2).

4-18 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 (Inside)
10

5 7 6 8

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

5 H3 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 3 (Left side)
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
6 H4 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 3 (Right side)
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
7 H5 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 4 (Left side)
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
8 H6 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 4 (Right side)
15W (3.5 kilo ohm)
9 H7 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 2
15W (38 ohm)
10 H8 Heater Dehumidifying the roll media in the
(Dehumidify Heater) Roll 1
15W (38 ohm)

4-19 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.9 Terminal Block, Switches, Breaker & Counters
(Left side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 TB1 Terminal Block UF1005-30A-
2P
2 CB1 Circuit Protector IEG-6-11-62-
20A-M

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

3 S1 Power Supply Switch AJ8R2004ZZC Turning on the printer.
(Main Switch) 01
4 S2 Power Supply Switch SDDJE1 Turning on the Dehumidify Heaters.
(Dehumidify Heater
Switch)

4-20 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 (Right side)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

5 CNT B CPY_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 2 E760PD10DC Counting the number of prints.
(Counter B) 24-008 (Counting unit is changeable in the
Service Mode.)
It has 3 pins connector.
6 CNT A LNG_CNT Electromagnetic Counter 1 E760PD10DC Counting the length of total print.
(Counter A) 24-008 (Counting unit is changeable in the
Service Mode.)
It has 2 pins connector.

4-21 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.10 Relays
(Rear side)

4 1 2 3

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 RY1 Relay G7L-2A-BUB Power is supplied to DCP1, DCP2
(Relay 1) AC200-240 and the Filter PCB (PW2215) of H2.
It is not shut off even if the Interlock
is open.
2 RY2 Relay G7L-2A-BUB DC24 Power is supplied to the Filter PCB
(Relay 2) (PW2215) of H1.
It is shut off if the Interlock is open.
3 RY3 Relay G7L-2A-BUB DC24 Power is supplied from the Filter
(Relay 3) PCB (PW2215) to H2.
It is shut off if the Interlock is open.
4 RY6 Relay G7L-2A-BUB DC24 Power is supplied to DCP3 and
(Relay 6) DCP4.
It is shut off if the Interlock or any
Roll Deck is open.

4-22 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 (Right side)

6 5

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

5 RY4 Relay JC2aF-TM-DC24V DC power is supplied to the
(Relay 4) following parts.
It is shut off if the Interlock or any
Roll Deck is open.

(1) HVP1, 3, 4 & 6

(2) BIAS
(3) M10
(4) BL4, 5, 6 & 7
(5) FM3 & FM4
(6) Pre-transfer LED
6 RY5 Relay JC2aF-TM-DC24V DC Power is supplied to the
(Relay 5) following parts.
It is shut off if the Interlock is open.

(1) HVP5
(2) M6 & 7
(3) MC1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 & 10
(4) BL1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, 17, 18 & 19
(5) SL1, 2, 3 & 4
(6) CNT1 & 2
(7) Surface Potential Sensor PCB
(8) Eraser PCB C & I
(Separation Lamp)

4-23 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.11 Micro Switches

2
3
4

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 DS1 DECK_SW1 Door Switch FA3L-BJAB When this is open, RY4 and RY6
(Roll Deck Switch 1) are opened.
2 DS2 DECK_SW2 Door Switch FA3L-BJAB When this is open, RY4 and RY6
(Roll Deck Switch 2) are opened.
3 DS3 DECK_SW3 Door Switch FA3L-BJAB When this is open, RY4 and RY6
(Roll Deck Switch 3) are opened.
4 DS7 RIGHT_SW1 Door Switch FB3L-BA12 When this is open, RY2, RY3, RY4,
(Right Side Door RY5 and RY6 are opened.
Switch)
5 DS8 RIGHT_SW2 Door Switch FB3L-BA12 When this is open, powers for
(Toner Cover Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7),
Switch) Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6),
Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) and
Transmission PCB (PW7750) are
shut off.

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

6 DS5 EXIT_SW Door Switch FA3L-BJAB When this is open, RY2, RY3, RY4,
(Exit Cover Switch) RY5 and RY6 are opened.
7 DS6 UPPER_SW Door Switch FA3L-BJAB When this is open, RY2, RY3, RY4,
(Top Rear Cover RY5 and RY6 are opened.
Switch)

4-24 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.12 Paper Sensors, Thermistor, Thermostat,
Toner Sensors & SPS

PAPER
WIRE-CL DECK
EAN
EXP-CL 1 MF
EAN 2 3
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT

6
D2

D3 PF

D4 COPY
DENSITY

MENU
←
→
*
ENTER
RESET

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 SPS1 Surface Potential Detecting the potential of the Drum
Sensor
2 PH22 CUTHP_O Cutter Home Position PW2285 Detecting the Home Position of the
Sensor Cutter Blade
3 PH25 DEVE_HP Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting the position of the
(Developer Unit Position Developer Unit
Sensor) (Pressed or released)
4 TH3 M_TEMP Thermistor EC2F103A2- Detecting the temperature of
30185 machine inside
(Developer Bias is controlled
variably depending on the
temperature detected by this
sensor.)
5 TLS1 DEV_TNR1 Toner Sensor TS15D20-37 Detecting the existence of the toner
(Hopper Toner Sensor) in the Hopper
6 TLS2 DEV_TNR2 Toner Sensor TS15D20-37 Detecting the existence of the toner
(Developer Toner in the Developer Unit
Sensor)

4-25 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 7 8

PAPER
WIRE-CL DECK
EAN
EXP-CL MF
EAN 1 23
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2
D3 PF
COPY
D4 DENSITY
MENU
←
→
*
ENTER
RESET

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

7 PH12 PA_ENT Photo Interrupter GP2A25 When this sensor detects the
(Leading Edge Sensor) leading edge, the machine stops
transporting the media once.
Then, it starts transporting again so
that the leading edge and the head
of print image should meet with each
other.
8 PH18 P_SEPR Actuator 2 Assy Detecting the Separation Jam.
(Separation Sensor)
9 PH24 PFUNIT_ST Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting whether the Internal
(Internal Transportation Transportation Unit is closed or not.
Unit Set Sensor)

4-26 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 10 11 12

13

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

10 TH1 Thermistor ES2U1.3B6-20031 Controlling the temperature of the
Fuser Roller
11 TH2 Thermistor ES2U1.3B6-20075 When this Thermistor detects over
temperature of fuser, RY2 and RY3
will be shut off before the
Thermostat opens.
12 TS1 INT1 Thermostat Assy Protecting the Fuser from over
heating
13 LS2 P_EXIT Lead Switch RS-801EA Detecting the Exit Jam.
(Exit Sensor)

4-27 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.13 Sensors in Roll Decks
(Roll Deck 1)

1 5 7 8

→
*
ENTER
RESET

9
2 6 4 3

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 PH1 RP_SET1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the existence of roll
(Roll Set Sensor 1) media.
Detecting 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll
media also
2 PH5A SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 880mm, 890mm & 900mm
(Paper Size Sensor 0) roll media
3 PH6A SZDATA1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 420mm, 18” and 17” roll
(Paper Size Sensor 1) media
4 PH7A SZDATA2 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 515mm & 22” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 2)
5 PH8A SZDATA3 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 594mm & 24” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 3)
6 PH9A SZDATA4 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 728mm & 30” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 4)
7 PH10A SZDATA5 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 841mm & 34” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 5)
8 PH11A SZDATA6 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 36” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 6)
9 PH13 RF_CLK1 Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting the clock pulse generated
(Paper Feed Clock by Roll 1
Sensor 1) (No pulse : Roll end)

4-28 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 (Roll Decks 2, 3 & 4)
2 3 1

→
*
ENTER
RESE T

B
D
C

11
6 4
12

13
5 7 8 9 10

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 PH2 RP_SET2 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the existence of roll
(Roll Set Sensor 1) media.
Detecting 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll
media also
2 PH3 RP_SET3 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the existence of roll
(Roll Set Sensor 1) media.
Detecting 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll
media also
3 PH4 RP_SET4 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the existence of roll
(Roll Set Sensor 1) media.
Detecting 210mm, 9” & 8.5” roll
media also
4 PH5B, C & D SZDATA0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 297mm, 12” & 11” roll
(Paper Size Sensor 0) media

PH5B : Roll Deck 2

PH5C : Roll Deck 3
PH5D : Roll Deck 4
5 PH6B, C & D SZDATA1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 420mm, 18” & 17” roll
(Paper Size Sensor 1) media

PH6B : Roll Deck 2

PH6C : Roll Deck 3
PH6D : Roll Deck 4
6 PH7B, C & D SZDATA2 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 515mm & 22” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 2)
PH7B : Roll Deck 2
PH7C : Roll Deck 3
PH7D : Roll Deck 4
7 PH8B, C & D SZDATA3 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 594mm & 24” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 3)
PH8B : Roll Deck 2
PH8C : Roll Deck 3
PH8D : Roll Deck 4
8 PH9B, C & D SZDATA4 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 728mm & 30” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 4)
PH9B : Roll Deck 2
PH9C : Roll Deck 3
PH9D : Roll Deck 4

4-29 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function
9 PH10B, C & D SZDATA5 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 841mm & 34” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 5)
PH10B : Roll Deck 2
PH10C : Roll Deck 3
PH10D : Roll Deck 4
10 PH11B, C & D SZDATA6 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting 36” roll media
(Paper Size Sensor 6)
PH11B : Roll Deck 2
PH11C : Roll Deck 3
PH11D : Roll Deck 4
11 PH14 RF_CLK2 Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting the clock pulse generated
(Paper Feed Clock by Roll 2
Sensor 2) (No pulse : Roll end)
12 PH15 RF_CLK3 Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting the clock pulse generated
(Paper Feed Clock by Roll 3
Sensor 3) (No pulse : Roll end)
13 PH16 RF_CLK4 Photo Interrupter GP3A23 Detecting the clock pulse generated
(Paper Feed Clock by Roll 4
Sensor 4) (No pulse : Roll end)

4-30 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.14 Sensors in Bypass Feeder

2 1

3 4

Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 PH20 MP_SRT Photo Interrupter GP2A11 When you set a large cut sheet
(Bypass Start media on the Bypass Feeder, it is
Sensor) carried until this sensor detects its
leading edge, and then stayed.
(Large means 841mm, 30”, 34” and
36”.)
2 PH31 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the existence of cut sheet
(Cut Sheet Set (GP2A28) media on the Bypass Feeder
Sensor) It also detects 8.5”.
3 PH32, 33 & T_SIZE0 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the size of the cut sheet
34 (Cut Sheet Size (GP2A28) media
Sensor 0)
PH32 : 297mm & 9”
PH33 : 420mm & 17”
PH34 : 18”
4 PH35, 36 & T_SIZE1 Photo Interrupter GP2A25 Detecting the size of the cut sheet
37 (Cut Sheet Size (GP2A28) media
Sensor 1)
PH35 : 22”
PH36 : 594mm & 24”
PH37 : 841mm, 30”, 34” & 36”

4-31 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.2.15 Fuses
(Left side)

1 2

F101 and F102 are on the AC Circuit Board B (PW4210).

Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement

1 F101 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 If you replace the fuse (F101), make sure to
use the following specified one.

Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC.

Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)

CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE / NEUTRAL

FUSING
2 F102 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 If you replace the fuse (F102), make sure to
use the following specified one.

Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC.

Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)

CAUTION : DOUBLE POLE / NEUTRAL

FUSING

4-32 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

 (Rear side)

Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement

3 F1 Fuse 250V / 2A 218002 If you replace the fuse (F1), make sure to use
the following specified one.

Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC.

Type : 218002 (250V / 2A)

(Seen from the top)

F551 and F552 are on the DC Driver PCB (PW7755).

Item Symbol Name Rate Type Caution for replacement

4 F2 Fuse 250V / 5A 215005 If you replace the fuse (F1), make sure to use
the following specified one.

Manufacturer : LITTEL FUSE INC.

Type : 215005 (250V / 5A)
5 F551 Fuse 250V / 0.5A 215.500
6 F552 Fuse 250V / 0.25A 215.250

4-33 K77sm4e2 (Ver. H.0)

4.3 Checking & Adjustment of Analog
Output from HVP & BIAS

4.3.1 Situations necessary to check the analog output

It is necessary to check the analog output from HVP & BIAS after replacing the following parts.

1. DC Controller PCB
2. DC Power Supply 1 (DCP1)
3. DC Power Supply 2 (DCP2)
4. Concerning HVP or BIAS itself

Please check the analog output of the following part, and please adjust if the output is out of the
specified range.
Each “Reference page” in the list shows how to check and adjust each item.

Check Item Reference page

HVP1 (For Image Corona) 4-35
HVP3 (For Transfer Corona) 4-37
HVP4 (For Separation Corona) 4-40
HVP5 (For Cleaning Roller) 4-43
HVP6 (For Grid Plate) 4-46
BIAS (For Developer Unit) 4-50

4-34 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
(For Image Corona)
The standard value of current supplied from the HVP1 is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA.

Check and adjust the HVP1 in the following way.

1) Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety.

You may damage the Drum if you do not remove!

2) You need to connect the multi-meter to “OUTPUT MONITOR” pins on the HVP1.
Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “+” pin, and connect the “-” one to the “COM.” pin.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

VR1

VR2 VR3

COM. +
OUTPUT
MONITOR

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

3) Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the
Signal Code “A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-35 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the HVP1 output the high voltage.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
If the multimeter shows “2.0V”, it means “-2.0mA”.
(Replace “+” with “-“, and replace “V” with “mA”.)
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of current is -2.0mA +/-0.05mA.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

5) If necessary, adjust the current of HVP1 so that it should be -2.0mA +-/0.05mA.

To adjust the value of HVP1 current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then
select the Item No.1A (Intensity of current on the Corona Wire [Image Corona]).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)] on the page 8-34 as for the way to change the
setting value.

Refer to [(19) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Image Corona)] on the page 8-61 as for the
contents of the setting.

CAUTION
Do not move any VR on the HVP1 positively as they have been adjusted in the factory!

4-36 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3
(For Transfer Corona)
The standard values of current supplied from the HVP3 are as follows.

For plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

For tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
For film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

It is impossible to check the intensity of Transfer Current supplied from the HVP3 with a multi-meter.
If you have a DC Current Meter and connect it directly to the HVP3, however, it is possible to check.

CAUTION
It is very dangerous to check the Transfer Current because you need to connect the DC
Current Meter directly to the HVP3.
For the safety, put a thick insulation pad such as urethane form under the DC Current Meter,
and also use a high voltage lead wire.

Check and adjust the HVP3 in the following way.

1) Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety.

You may damage the Drum if you do not remove!

2) Disconnect the connector between HVP3 and Socket for the Transfer / Separation Corona.
Connect the “+” cable of the DC Current Meter to the cable from the HVP3, and connect “-” one to
the cable from the Socket.
Put a Urethane Pad under the DC Current Meter!

mA
VR1
DC Current Meter

Transfer Corona
VR2 VR3
Socket

3) Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the
Signal Code “A2” (HV_TR : Transfer Corona Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-37 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the HVP3 output the high voltage.
Check the voltage with DC Current Meter.
As the Transfer Current is decided separately for plain paper, tracing paper and film, please check
all. (See the following NOTE.)
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard values of Transfer Current are as follows.

For plain paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

For tracing paper 1.4mA +/-0.02mA
For film 1.4mA +/-0.02mA

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you output the high voltage in the Service Mode 3-A2, the HVP3 will output Transfer Current
corresponding to the type of paper you used at the latest opportunity. (If you used the plain
paper last time, HVP3 outputs Transfer Current which corresponds to the plain paper.)
This correspondence can not be changed even if you change the Material Selector in the Roll
Deck.

Change the correspondence by the following operation.

(1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select any of Item No.1C, 1d
and 1E of which Transfer Current you would like to check next.

1C : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : PPC)

1d : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : Tracing)
1E : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : Film)

(2) Change the setting value and decide it in the selected Item No.
By deciding the setting value, you can change the correspondence of Transfer
Current that is outputted in the Service Mode 3-A1.

(3) Select the Service Mode 3-A2.

Make the HVP3 output, and check the Transfer Current.

4-38 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the Transfer Current of HVP3 so that it should be 1.4mA +/-0.02mA.
To adjust the Transfer Current, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select
the Item No.1C, 1d and 1E.

1C : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : PPC)

1d : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : Tracing)
1E : Intensity of Current (Transfer Corona : Film)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)] on the page 8-34 as for the way to change the
setting value.

Refer to [(21) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Transfer Corona)] on the page 8-62 as for
the contents of the setting.

CAUTION
Do not move any VR on the HVP3 positively as they have been adjusted in the factory!

4-39 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.4 Checking & Adjustment of HVP4
(For Separation Corona)
The standard values of AC Component and DC Component supplied from HVP4 are as follows.

DC Component : Plain paper -250V +/-3V

Tracing paper -300V +/-3V
Film -10V +/-3V

Check and adjust the HVP4 in the following way.

1) Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety.

You may damage the Drum if you do not remove!

2) To check the DC Component, connect the “+” cable of multi-meter to “R42” or “R43” (either one is
available), and connect the “-” one to the ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

VR1
VR3

blue
blue
VR2

white

R42 Connect to either R42 or R43.

R43
CURRENT
CHECK

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

3) Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the
Signal Code “A1” (HV_AC : Separation Corona Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-40 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ENTER] KEY to make the HVP4 output the high voltage.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
As the DC Component is decided separately for plain paper, tracing paper and film, please check
all. (See the following NOTE.)
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of DC Component for each type of paper is as follow.

Plain paper -250V +/-3V

Tracing paper -300V +/-3V
Film -10V +/-3V

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you output the high voltage in the Service Mode 3-A1, the HVP4 will output DC Component
corresponding to the type of paper you used at the latest opportunity. (If you used the plain
paper last time, HVP4 outputs DC Component which corresponds to the plain paper.)
This correspondence can not be changed even if you change the Material Selector in the Roll
Deck.

Change the correspondence by the following operation.

(1) Select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select any of Item No.1F, 20
and 21 of which DC Component you would like to check next.

1F : DC Component (Separation Corona : PPC)

20 : DC Component (Separation Corona : Tracing)
21 : DC Component (Separation Corona : Film)

(2) Change the setting value and decide it in the selected Item No.
By deciding the setting value, you can change the correspondence of DC
Component that is outputted in the Service Mode 3-A1.

(3) Select the Service Mode 3-A1.

Make the HVP4 output, and check the DC Component.

4-41 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the DC Component so that they should satisfy the standard written on the
former page.
To adjust the DC Component, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the
Item No.1F, 20 and 21.

1F : DC Component (Separation Corona : PPC)

20 : DC Component (Separation Corona : Tracing)
21 : DC Component (Separation Corona : Film)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)] on the page 8-34 as for the way to change the
setting value.

Refer to [(22) DC component (Separation Corona)] on the page 8-62 as for the contents of the
setting.

4-42 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.5 Checking & Adjustment of HVP5
(For Cleaning Roller)
The standard value of positive Cleaning Roller Bias and negative one supplied from the HVP5 are as
follows.

Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V

Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V

Check and adjust the HVP5 in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” pin on the HVP5, and connect the “-” one to
the ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
CN502

OUTPUT
1

VR1
CN501

VR2
1

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-43 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

2) Output both the positive Cleaning Roller Bias (applied during Print Cycle) and the negative
one (applied during Toner Collection Process).
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
(Refer to the following NOTE for the way to output both Bias.)

The standard value of positive Cleaning Roller Bias and negative one are as follows.

Positive Cleaning Roller Bias +800V +/-3V

Negative Cleaning Roller Bias -500V +/-3V

NOTE
The polarity of Cleaning Roller Bias is “positive” normally.

1. To output the positive Cleaning Roller Bias alone, enter

the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode
(Sub Mode No.3), and then select the Signal Code MENU ENTER ONLINE

“74” (HV5 : Cleaning Roller Bias Control Signal).

Output the positive Bias pressing the [ENTER] Key.

2. You can not output the negative Cleaning Roller Bias alone in the Service Mode because
there is no way to switch the polarity on purpose.
Therefore, please check the voltage taking a Test Print.
Negative Bias will be outputted when the printer is going to stop after Test Print.

3) If necessary, adjust the negative Cleaning Roller Bias so that it should be -500V +/-3V.
Rotate the VR1 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver to adjust the negative Cleaning Roller Bias.
CN502

OUTPUT
1

VR1
CN501

VR2
1

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-44 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) If necessary, adjust the positive Cleaning Roller Bias so that it should be +800V +/-3V.
Rotate the VR2 on the HVP5 with a screwdriver to change the positive Cleaning Roller Bias.

CN502

OUTPUT
1

VR1
CN501

VR2
1

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-45 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6
(For Grid Plate of Image Corona)
The standard value of voltage supplied from the HVP6 is -780V +/-20V (About 12.2V on the Test
Pin).
Check and adjust the HVP6 in the following way.

1) Remove the Drum from the machine for the safety.

You may damage the Drum if you do not remove!

2) There is a connector “CN501” on the HVP6.

Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the white cable (Test Pin) which is 2nd cable from the
top of CN501.
Connect the “-” cable to the ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

VR1

White cable
(Test Pin)
CN501
OUT
VR2 PUT

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

3) Enter the Service Mode, select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the
Signal Code “A6” (HV6 : Grid Bias Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-46 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the HVP6 output the high voltage.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value on the Test Pin is about 12.2V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

5) If necessary, adjust the voltage on the Test Pin so that it should be about 12.2V.
To adjust the voltage on the Test Pin, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then
select the Item No.1b (Intensity of current on the Grid Plate [Image Corona]).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)] on the page 8-34 as for the way to change the
setting value.

Refer to [(20) Intensity of current on the Grid Plate (Image Corona)] on the page 8-61 as for
the contents of the setting.

CAUTION
Do not move any VR on the HVP6 positively as they have been adjusted in the factory!

4-47 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

6) Confirm the actual voltage supplied from the “OUTPUT” Pin on the HVP6 after the adjustment.
To confirm it, connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “OUTPUT” and connect the “-“ one to the
ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

VR1

CN501
OUT
VR2 PUT

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

7) Select the Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode No.3), and then select the Signal Code
“A0” (HV1 : Image Corona Control Signal).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
Do not select the Signal Code “A6” (Intensity of current on the Grid Plate [Image Corona]) this
time because it can output only the analog voltage but the high voltage is not supplied from
“OUTPUT” to the Grid Plate.
If you select “A0” and output the high voltage to the Image Corona Wire, the high voltage is
supplied to the Grid Plate also.

8) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the HVP1 output the high voltage.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of output voltage on “OUTPUT” is -780V +/-20V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-48 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

9) If the output voltage does not satisfy -780V +/-20V, re-adjust it in the Service Mode 4-1b.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-49 K77sm4e3 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.7 Checking & Adjustment of BIAS
(For Developer Unit)
Each roller in the Developer Unit is supplied with a voltage independently during the Print Cycle.
These voltages supplied during the Print Cycle are called “Negative Developer Bias”.
The following list shows each value of “Negative Developer Bias”.

Supplied to ; Voltage Voltage Output Pin on the Adjustment VR

(Against the ground) (Against the voltage of BIAS on the BIAS
Development Roller)
Development Roller -250V +/-3V - Output 2 -
(Service Mode)
Toner Supply Roller - -500 +/-3V Output 1 VR8
Regulation Roller (Center) - -100V +/-3V Output 3 VR6
Regulation Roller (Both sides) - +365V +/-3V Output 4 VR4

Also, each roller is supplied with a voltage independently during the Toner Collection Process, which is
different from the voltage supplied during the Print Cycle.
These voltages supplied during the Toner Collection Process are called “Positive Developer Bias”.
The following list shows each value of “Positive Developer Bias”.

Supplied to ; Voltage Voltage Supplied from ; Adjustment VR

(Against the ground) (Against the voltage of (Output Pin on (VR on the BIAS)
Development Roller) the BIAS)
Development Roller +350V +/-3V - Output 2 VR1
Toner Supply Roller - -340V +/-3V Output 1 VR7
Regulation Roller (Center) - 0V +/-3V Output 3 VR5
Regulation Roller (Both sides) - +120V +/-5V Output 4 VR3

Regulation Roller (Both sides) Regulation Roller (Center)

Development Roller Toner Supply Roller

4-50 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.7.1 Negative Developer Bias adjustment (for Print Cycle)

(1) Negative Developer Bias for Development Roller

The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to the Development Roller is -250V +/-3V
against the ground.

Development Roller

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-51 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the
Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias).
The setting value will be “1” (Variable control) in the usual case.
Select the setting value “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
You can not check the correct Negative Developer Bias with the setting value “1” (Variable
control) because the Bias is controlled variably by the difference of the temperature.
Make sure to select “0” as the Bias is always constant regardless of the temperature.

3) Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias
[Negative] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Negative Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Development Roller is -250V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-52 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the Negative Developer Bias to the Development Roller so that it should
be -250V +/-3V.
To adjust it, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the Item No.19
(Developer Bias).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Refer to [8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)] on the page 8-34 as for the way to change the
setting value.

Refer to [(18) Developer Bias (Item No.19)] on the page 8-60 as for the contents of the setting.

CAUTION
Do not move the VR2 on the BIAS positively as it has been adjusted in the factory!

4-53 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Negative Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller

The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to the Toner Supply Roller is -500V +/-3V
against the Negative Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Toner Supply Roller

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 1” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-54 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the
Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias).
The setting value will be “1” (Variable control) in the usual case.
Select the setting value “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
You can not check the correct Negative Developer Bias with the setting value “1” (Variable
control) because the Bias is controlled variably by the difference of the temperature.
Make sure to select “0” as the Bias is always constant regardless of the temperature.

3) Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias
[Negative] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Negative Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the Development Roller is -500V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-55 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the Negative Developer Bias to the Toner Supply Roller so that it should be
-500V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR8 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-56 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center)

The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to the center of Regulation Roller is
-100V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Regulation Roller (Center)

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 3” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-57 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the
Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias).
The setting value will be “1” (Variable control) in the usual case.
Select the setting value “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
You can not check the correct Negative Developer Bias with the setting value “1” (Variable
control) because the Bias is controlled variably by the difference of the temperature.
Make sure to select “0” as the Bias is always constant regardless of the temperature.

3) Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias
[Negative] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Negative Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to the center of Regulation Roller is -100V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-58 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the Negative Developer Bias to the center of Regulation Roller so that it
should be -100V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR6 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-59 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(4) Negative Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Both sides)

The standard value of Negative Developer Bias supplied to both sides of Regulation Roller is
+365V +/-3V against the Negative Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Regulation Roller (Both sides)

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 4” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-60 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4), and then select the
Item No.CA (Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias).
The setting value will be “1” (Variable control) in the usual case.
Select the setting value “0” (Constant control) before starting the adjustment.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
You can not check the correct Negative Developer Bias with the setting value “1” (Variable
control) because the Bias is controlled variably by the difference of the temperature.
Make sure to select “0” as the Bias is always constant regardless of the temperature.

3) Select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the Item No.8 (Developer Bias
[Negative] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Negative Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Negative Developer Bias to both sides of Regulation Roller is +365V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4-61 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

5) If necessary, adjust the Negative Developer Bias to both sides of Regulation Roller so that it
should be +365V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR4 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-62 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

4.3.7.2 Positive Developer Bias adjustment (for Toner Collection Process)

(1) Positive Developer Bias for Development Roller

The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Development Roller is +350V +/-3V
against the ground.

Development Roller

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 2” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
ground.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-63 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the
Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Positive Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Development Roller is +350V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) If necessary, adjust the Positive Developer Bias to the Development Roller so that it should be
+350V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR1 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

GND
Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-64 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Positive Developer Bias for Toner Supply Roller

The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the Toner Supply Roller is -340V +/-3V
against the Positive Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Toner Supply Roller

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 1” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-65 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the
Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Positive Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the Toner Supply Roller is -340V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) If necessary, adjust the Positive Developer Bias to the Toner Supply Roller so that it should be
-340V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR7 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-66 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Center)

The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to the center of Regulation Roller is 0V +/-3V
against the Positive Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Regulation Roller (Center)

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 3” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-67 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the
Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Positive Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to the center of Regulation Roller is 0V +/-3V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) If necessary, adjust the Positive Developer Bias to the center of Regulation Roller so that it should
be -0V +/-3V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR5 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-68 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

(4) Positive Developer Bias for Regulation Roller (Both sides)

The standard value of Positive Developer Bias supplied to both sides of Regulation Roller is
+120V +/-5V against the Positive Developer Bias of the Development Roller.

Regulation Roller (Both sides)

Check and adjust it in the following way.

1) Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “Output 4” on the BIAS, and connect the “-“ one to the
“Output 2”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-69 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

2) Enter the Service Mode, select the Special Mode (Sub Mode No.9), and then select the
Item No.7 (Developer Bias [Positive] Adjustment Mode).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) Press the [ENTER] Key to make the BIAS output the Positive Developer Bias to each roller in the
Developer Unit.
Check the voltage with multi-meter.
Press the [ENTER] Key again to stop outputting if you have checked the value.

Standard value of the Positive Developer Bias to both sides of Regulation Roller is +120V +/-5V.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) If necessary, adjust the Positive Developer Bias to both sides of Regulation Roller so that it should
be +120V +/-5V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR3 on the BIAS with a screwdriver.

CN401 CN402 CN403

1 1 1

VR4 VR3 VR6 VR5 VR1 VR8 VR7

VR2

Output 2

Output 4 Output 1
Output 3

Multi-meter
(DC volt range)

4-70 K77sm4e4 (Ver. H.0)

4.4 Location of Connectors
4.4.1 Process Unit

J303 J302 J311 J312 J313 J314

J301
J92
J93

J57
J61
J56 J46

4-71 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.2 Base of machine

J7 J17 J18

J8 J15 J16

4-72 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.3 Back of machine

J52
J341C

RY2-0 RY3-0
J901A J911
RY1-1 RY2-1 RY3-1

J137 J134 CN2G

J136 J135
CN1G
RY1-0

CN1D CN2D TB151B TB151A RY1-2 RY2-2

J72 RY3-8
RY1-4 RY2-4
J3-1B TB150B TB150A
RY1-6 RY2-6 RY3-6
RY1-8 RY2-8 RY3-4
J3-2B RY3-2
CN1E CN2E J6 J241 J27
J242
J3-2A J127 RY6-6 RY6-8 J155 J244
TB154B TB154A
RY6-0
J3-1A J13 J19 J9
RY6-1

TB153B TB153A TB113 TB110

RY6-4 RY6-2 TB152B TB152A TB112 TB111

4-73 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.4 Top of machine

J29 J125 J30 J126

DS6-1A
J28 DS6-2A

J91

DS6-2B
DS6-1B
J31

J66 CN3F CN2F CN1F CN1A

J58

J60 J97
J59
J551 J552

J94
J87
J84 J85 J86
J63 J571
J902 OUT
J554
J558 J158A CN502A CN501A
J555 J67
TB581 J901
CN2C
CN1J J557 CN1C
CN3C
J556
J581 J138
J710
J912A J911A

J913A

4-74 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.5 Left side of machine

S2-2 S2-1

M10-1 M10-2
J12 CN2I
CN501 CN2
CN1I
CN3
CN1

J24 J154
CN401 CN403
CN402

J56

J2 J3 J51 J53 J26

J1 J21 J62
J160 J44
J45 J35

SSR2-1
CN1B
SSR2-2
J562
SSR2-3 J40 J41
J36 J37
SSR2-4
SSR1-4
SSR1-3 J561
SSR1-1
SSR1-2 J47
J159
J402

CN301 J563

J252
J39 J38
CB1-1b
CB1-2b J253
J102 CN1H CN2H
CB1-2a J103 J251
CB1-1a TB101
J101 J107
TB1-N
J106
J158 J8
TB1-L
J104

J7

4-75 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.6 Right side of machine

DS8-1A DS8-2B
DS8-2A DS8-1B
J700
DS5-1A
J25 DS5-2A
J70 DS5-1B
J96
DS5-2B
J98 J99 J501

J208

J701A J156 J207 J5 J4

J209 J210
J95
J65 J211
J206 J54 DS7-1A
DS7-2A
J205 DS7-1B J32
J55 J216
J157 DS7-2B
J204 J49
J701B
J803

J203
J215 J71
J33
J64 J212
J202 J34
J701C J201 J48
J214 J801 J802

RY5-6
RY5-1
RY5-5 RY5-2
J158
J991 J993 RY5-4 RY5-3
J69
J801A J994 J992 J721 UI-OUT UI-IN
J133 RY4-6
RY4-1

RY4-2
RY4-3

RY4-5 RY4-4

4-76 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.7 Bypass Feeder Unit

J67

J142 J902 J901

J140

J143 J144 J145 J146 J147 J148

4-77 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.8 Top Drawer Unit

J70
J88A J92A J90A J89A J68 J73 J91A J93A J972A J94A
J971A
J43 J42 J11

J74
J751A

4-78 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.9 Middle Drawer Unit

J71
J90B J88B J76 J89B J91B J92B J93B J94B

J972B J971B

J751B
J10

J77

4-79 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

4.4.10 Bottom Drawer Unit

J971D J972D J72

J971C J972C

J75D

J83

J90D J88D J82 J89D J91D J92D J93D J94D

J90C J88C J79 J89C J91C J92C J93C J94C

J80

J751C

4-80 K77sm4e5 (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 5
Mechanical Systems

Page
5.1 Process Unit 5- 1
5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit 5- 1
5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit 5- 4
5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B 5- 9
5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to BL16) 5-10
5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25) 5-11

5.2 Image Corona 5-13

5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Image Corona
(Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate & Wire Cleaning Units) 5-13
5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) 5-18

5.3 Drum Assembly 5-19

5.3.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Drum Assembly
(Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear) 5-19

5.4 Toner Hopper 5-21

5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) 5-21

5.5 Developer Unit 5-22

5.5.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the Developer Unit
(Rollers, Counter Rollers, Blades & Seals) 5-22
5.5.2 Replacing Developer Toner Sensor (TLS2) 5-56

5.6 Cutter Unit 5-57

5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit 5-57
5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2) 5-59
5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly 5-61
5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade 5-63
5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit 5-66

5.7 Fuser 5-68

5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit 5-68
5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller 5-72
5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller 5-80
5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3) 5-85
5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor 5-88
5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat 5-91
5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies 5-94
5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers 5-96
5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2) 5-100
5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7) 5-102

5.8 Roll Decks 5-105

5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck 5-105
5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) &
Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck) 5-106
5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1), Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) &
Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck) 5-107

K77sm5e1 (Ver. H.0)

 5.8.4 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck) 5-110
5.8.5 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 3 (PH3) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck) 5-113
5.8.6 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 4 (PH4) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck) 5-117
5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors (PH13 to PH16) (Common for all decks) 5-122
5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks) 5-125
5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks) 5-127
5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks) 5-129
5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake 5-131

5.9 Bypass Feeder 5-132

5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit 5-132
5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4) 5-133
5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) &
Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37) 5-135
5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3) 5-138

5.10 Internal Transportation Unit 5-142

5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2 5-142
5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18) 5-146
5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit 5-150

5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona 5-161

5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona 5-161
5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies 5-163
5.11.3 Replacing Mylar 5-168
5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Corona Housing 5 5-169

5.12 LED Head 5-175

5.12.1 Removing LED Head 5-175
5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2 5-180
5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8) 5-181

5.13 Main Frame 5-182

5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) & Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 5-182
5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2) 5-191
5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5) 5-193
5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4) 5-197
5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3), Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) &
Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24) 5-198
5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) 5-205
5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) 5-211
5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10) 5-213
5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) & Paper Feed Brake (MC9) 5-216
5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) 5-220
5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2 5-222
5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11) 5-225
5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) 5-227
5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED 5-230
5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum & Transfer Guide Plate 5-233
5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters 5-239
5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1) 5-241

5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part 5-244

5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) & Receiver PCB (PW7751) 5-244
5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) & Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) 5-248

K77sm5e1 (Ver. H.0)

5.1 Process Unit
5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit
1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge
Cover (2).

2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position.
Then, close both Toner Cover (1) and Toner Cartridge Cover (2).

NOTE
There is a Shutter under the opening (4).
Even if you draw out the Process Unit without moving the opening (4) to the top, it will catch
the spilt toner.
But if too much toner is caught, it will spill into the machine in the end.
Please do not forget to move the opening to the top.

5-1 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

3) Open the Right Side Door (5).

4) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (6) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (7)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (8).

5) Remove 4 pieces of black M4x14 screws (9) which are inside of Sponges.

NOTE
Even if you remove black M4x14 screws (9), sponges will hold them so as not to lose.

5-2 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

6) Hold both Handles (10) firmly, and draw out the Process Unit (11) from the machine.

11

10

5-3 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit
1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 1
Unit] on the page 5-1.

2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (3), and then remove the
Image Corona (4) holding both plastic corona heads (5).

2 3

5-4 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

3) Catch the shaft of Cleaning Roller (6), bring it up (bring up driving side first then driven side) to
remove the bearings (7) from the brackets.
As there are notches (8) near the setting position, fit the bearings (7) to put the Cleaning Roller (6)
temporarily.

(Driving side) (Driven side)

8 6 6 8
7
7

NOTE
Please put back the Cleaning Roller to the setting position before you close the Process Unit.
If you close the unit without putting back the roller, roller will touch the plate and its surface will
be broken!

5-5 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

4) Catching both sides, move the Drum Assembly (9) upward along the Drum Guide in the Process
Unit and remove from the machine.
Keep the Drum Assembly in the Package Box if it should be out of the machine for a long time.
Or stand it on the attached Drum Stand (10) temporarily if you put it back within a short time.

10

5) Disconnect the connector (11) of the Hopper Toner Sensor.

11

5-6 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (12), and then bring up and remove the Toner
Hopper (13).

12

13

12

13

NOTE
There are many holes on the bottom of the Toner Hopper and the toner will spill out.
Please lay a large paper under the Process Unit before you remove the Toner Hopper.

7) Disconnect the connector (14) of the Developer

Toner Sensor.

14

5-7 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

8) Remove 2 pieces of Developer Release Brackets (15) removing 1 tooth washer screw (16) for
each one.

16

15

9) Holding black side plates (17) on both sides, bring up and remove the Developer Unit (18).

17 18

18

5-8 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.1.3 Replacing Eraser Lamp A & B
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process
Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper &
Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 3

NOTE
Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it
completely and put it on the paper.

2) Disconnect 2 connectors (4), remove 6 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove both
Eraser Lamps A & B (6).
Replace Eraser Lamps A & B (6) with the new ones.

4 5 5 4 6

5-9 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.1.4 Replacing Separation Assist Blowers
(BL12 to BL16)
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Cleaning Roller (2) and Drum Assembly (3) from the Process
Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper &
Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 3

NOTE
Do not put the Cleaning Roller (2) temporarily on the Process Unit, but please remove it
completely and put it on the paper.

2) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) and remove each
Separation Assist Blower (6).
Replace the Separation Assist Blower (6) with the new one.

5 6

5-10 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.1.5 Replacing Developer Unit Position Sensor (PH25)
1) Remove each Image Corona (1), Drum Assembly (2), Toner Hopper (3) and Developer Unit (4)
from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

2 1

3 4

2) Disconnect the connector (5) in the Process Unit.

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (6) out of the Process Unit to remove the Bracket 102
(7) with the sensor.

7
7 6

5-11 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press and release the Stoppers (8), and then remove the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9).
Replace the Developer Unit Position Sensor (9).

5-12 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.2 Image Corona
5.2.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the
Image Corona (Corona Wire 1 Assembly, Grid Plate
& Wire Cleaning Units)

NOTE
Image Corona has the following Periodical Replacement parts.

Corona Wire 1 Assembly (2 pieces) 100,000m

Grid Plate (1 piece) 100,000m
Wire Cleaning Unit (2 pieces) 100,000m

This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.

1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image
Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 1

5-13 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

2) Pick the lever of each Wire Cleaning Unit (2) to release, move the unit as the arrow mark and
remove from the Image Corona.
Replace the Wire Cleaning Units (2) with the new ones.

NOTE
After installing the new Wire Cleaning Unit, confirm
the Corona Wire is caught between pads of Wire
Cleaning Unit, and also the Corona Wire is straight.
If the Corona Wire is out of pads or if it is bent, it will
exert a bad effect on the image quality as the height
of Corona Wire is not correct.

Pads

5-14 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

3) Loosen 5 pieces of screws (3) to remove each Bracket 220 (4).

3
4

4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screws (5) on the motor side to remove the Electrode Plate (6).

6
6

5) Remove the Grid Spring (7) to remove the Hook (8).

5-15 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove the Grid Plate (9) and replace it with the
new one

NOTE
Grid Plate has flat plate areas at both sides, and one side is wider than the other side.
This wider side must be installed on the spring side of the Image Corona.
(You do not have to care about front / back.)

Wide Narrow

7) Remove the Pan Head Screw (10) to remove the Front Housing Cover (11) on the motor side.

10 11

11

5-16 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

8) Remove the Pan Head Screw (12) to remove the Rear Housing Cover (13).

12 13
13

9) Remove Springs (14), and then remove each Corona Wire 1 Assembly (15).
Replace the Corona Wire 1 Assemblies (20) with the new ones.

14 15 15

NOTE
When you stretch the new Corona Wire 1 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead
(16) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the
grooves (17).

17
17

16

5-17 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.2.2 Replacing Wire Cleaning Motor (M9)
1) Remove the Image Corona (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image
Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 1

2) Expanding the Hooks (2) outward, remove the Motor Cover (3).

3 3

3) Remove the Wire Cleaning Motor (4).

4

NOTE
Please direct the label face outward when you put back the Wire Cleaning Motor.

5-18 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.3 Drum Assembly
5.3.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the
Drum Assembly
(Photo Conductive Drum & 178T Gear)

NOTE
Drum Assembly has the following Periodical Replacement parts.

Photo Conductive Drum (1 piece) 200,000m

178T Gear (1 piece) 500,000m

This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.

1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.
Stand the removed Drum Assembly on the attached Drum Stand (2) with its gear side down.

2) Remove 3 pieces of hexagon head bolt (3) to remove the Flange B (4).

4
3

5-19 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

3) Turn over the Drum Assembly to make the gear side up.

4) Pull out the Stay Assembly (5) from the Photo Conductive Drum (6).
Replace the Photo Conductive Drum (6) with the new one.

6
5

5) Remove 3 pieces of each hexagon head cap screw (7) and spring washer (8) to remove the
178T Gear (9).
Replace the 178T Gear with the new one.

9
7
9
7

5-20 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.4 Toner Hopper
5.4.1 Replacing Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1)
1) Remove the Toner Hopper (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Hopper Toner Sensor (3).
Replace the Hopper Toner Sensor (3) with the new one.

2
3

5-21 K77sm5e2 (Ver. H.0)

5.5 Developer Unit
5.5.1 Replacing each Periodical Replacement Part of the
Developer Unit
(Rollers, Counter Rollers, Blades & Seals)

NOTE
(1) The following Periodical Replacement Parts are included in the Developer Unit.

Toner Supply Roller 1 piece

Development Roller 1
Counter Roller 2
Seal 130 2
Seal 553 1
Seal 558 1
Seal 555 2
Seal 557 2
Seal 550 2
Seal 551 2
Seal 554 1
Seal 559 1
Side Seal 491 2
Bracket 581 1
Bracket 582 1
Double Gear 39-23 1
30T Gear 1

The replacement term of all of the above parts are 200,000m.

This section instructs you to replace all of these parts as one sequent work.

(2) Please remove all the toner from the Developer Unit before replacing the above parts.

1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 1

5-22 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

2) Remove 7 pieces of screw (2) to remove the Cover (3).

2 2

5-23 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Stay 1 (5).

4 4
5 5

NOTE
When putting back the Stay 1 (5) to the Developer Unit, tighten tooth washer screws (4)
pressing the Stay 1 (5) toward the arrow mark to eliminate the gap between Cleaning Blade
and Development Roller.

5-24 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 7 pieces of screw (6) to remove the Bracket 581 (7) and the Holder Spring (8).
Replace the Bracket 581 (7) with the new one.

6 6

Rubber plate
7

NOTE
(1) The rubber plate of the Bracket 581 (7) touches the Regulation Roller and scrapes off the
toner.
Please provide a little toner onto the edge of rubber plate when you install the new
Bracket 581 (7), as it can reduce the friction between rubber plate and Regulation Roller.
If you do not, the rubber plate may be turned over by the friction and may be broken.

(2) Screw holes of the Bracket 581 (7) are oval.

Please tighten the screws (6) at the center of each oval hole.
If not tightened at the center (Bracket 581 is shifted to either side), the rubber plate may be
bent because it touches the Developer Side Plate, which results in a poor cleaning.

(3) Before putting back the Developer Unit to the Process Unit, please confirm that the rubber
plate of Bracket 581 (7) surely scrapes off the toner from the Regulation Roller.
Also, please confirm the rubber plate is not turned over by the friction even if you rotate the
Regulation Roller.

5-25 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

5) Disconnect the connector (9), remove the screw (10) to make the harness free, and then remove
2 pieces of bind head screw (11) to remove the Toner Sensor (12).

10

9
11 8

12

NOTE
Make sure to remove the Toner Sensor (12) at this time!
You will remove all the toner from the Developer Unit with a vacuum cleaner in the next step.
If you clean the unit with the vacuum cleaner without removing the Toner Sensor, it may be
broken by a static electricity.

6) Remove all the toner from the Developer Unit.

(Put the Developer Unit on a large paper, turn over the unit and remove the toner as far as
possible. Then, vacuum the remainder of toner with a vacuum cleaner.)

5-26 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove the Retaining Ring-C (13) on the driving side to remove 56T Gear (14), Parallel Pin (15)
and Counter Roller (16).
Replace the Counter Roller (16) with the new one.

(Driving side)

13

16

15
13
14

5-27 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

8) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E5) (17) to remove the Collar (18).
Remove 2 pieces of screw (19) to remove the Bracket 576 (20).

(Driving side)

17

19

20

18

17 19

5-28 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

9) Remove the Hex. Head Bolt (21) to remove 22T Gear (22) and Thrust Washer (12.1x20x1) (23).

(Driving side)

22

21

23

22
21

5-29 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

10) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E5) (24) to remove the Double Gear 32-22 (25).

(Driving side)

25

24

25

24

5-30 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

11) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E8) (26) to remove Thrust Washers (10.1x16x0.2) (27),
Double Gear 39-23 (28), Parallel Pin (29) and Spacer (30).

(Driving side)

26

28

30
27
29
26

5-31 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

12) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E7) (31) to remove 22T Gear (32) and Parallel Pin (33).
Remove Collar (34), Double Gear-39-23 (35) and Ball Bearings (8x14x4.0) (36).

(Driving side)

34 31

33

32

31

36
35
34

5-32 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

13) Sprit off the Side Seal 491 (37), and then remove Bias Stud (38) and Spring Washer (39) to make
the Bias Terminal Lead (40) free. (As the entrance of guide of the Developer Side Plate is opened,
it becomes possible to remove Development Roller and Regulation Roller.)
Remove the Spring 507 (41)

(Driving side)

37

41

38

37

39
40 41
38

5-33 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
(1) Do not paste the new Side Seal 491 (37) to the Developer Side Plate at this time because
the entrance of guide for Regulation Roller and Developer Roller must be opened.
If you have installed the Regulation Roller and the new Development Roller, you can paste
the new Side Seal 491 (37).

(2) There must be no space between Side Seal 491 (37) and Development Roller.
Be careful of it when you paste the new seal.

No space must exist.

5-34 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

14) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E8) (42) on the driven side to remove the Counter Roller (43).
Replace the Counter Roller (43) with the new one.

(Driven side)

42

43

42

5-35 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

15) Remove 2 pieces of screw (44) to remove Bracket 578 (45), Collar (46), Ball Bearing (8x16x5.0)
(47), Double Gear 34-18 (48) and Ball Bearing (8x12x3.5) (49).

(Driven side)

44

45

49

48
47
46

45

5-36 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

16) Remove the Hex. Head Bolt (50) to remove 29T Gear (51) and Thrust Washers (12.1x20x0.2) (52).

(Driven side)

50

51

52

50
51

5-37 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

17) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E5) (53) to remove 30T Gear (54), Parallel Pin (55) and Thrust
Washer (10.1x16x0.2) (56).

(Driven side)

53

54

56

54

53 55

5-38 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

18) Remove the Spring 107 (57).
Sprit off the Side Seal 491 (58). (As the entrance of guide of the Developer Side Plate is opened,
it becomes possible to remove Development Roller and Regulation Roller.)

(Driven side)

58

57

58

57

5-39 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
(1) Do not paste the new Side Seal 491 (58) to the Developer Side Plate at this time because
the entrance of guide for Regulation Roller and Developer Roller must be opened.
If you have installed the Regulation Roller and the new Development Roller, you can paste
the new Side Seal 491 (58).

(2) There must be no space between Side Seal 491 (58) and Development Roller.
Be careful of it when you paste the new seal.

No space must exist.

5-40 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

19) Remove 3 pieces of screw (59) to remove Bracket 574 (60) and Ball Bearing (12x24x6.0) (61) on
the driving side.
Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E9) (62) to remove the Thrust Washer (10.1x16x0.2) (63).
Remove a bind head screw (64), and then remove Collar (65), Blade Arm A (66) and
Ball Bearing (10x22x6.0) (67).

Sprit off the Seal 555 (68) from the Bracket 574 (60), and then paste the new one.

(Driving side)

64

59

62

66
60

67

63
68
61 65 62

5-41 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

20) Remove Stud (69) and 2 pieces of screw (70) to remove Bracket 577 (71) and Ball Bearing
(12x24x6.0) (72).
Remove bind head screw (73) and Hex. Head Bolt (74) to remove Collar (75), Blade Arm B (76)
and Ball Bearing (10x22x6.0) (77).

Sprit off the Seal 555 (78) from the Bracket 577 (71), and then paste the new one.

(Driven side)

69

73

74

70

69
75
78

76
71

77 72

5-42 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
When you re-assemble, put back the Spring 107 first to press the Regulation Roller to the
Development Roller, and then tighten the Hex. Head Bolt (74).

74

Spring 107

5-43 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

21) Holding the shaft on both sides, remove each Development Roller (79) and Regulation
Roller (80).

80

79

80

79

NOTE
(1) Be careful of the direction of Development Roller when you install.
There are holes for Parallel Pin on one side of shaft, and are screw hole on another side.
Parallel Pin side must be on the driving side.

(2) Be careful of the direction of Regulation Roller when you install.

One shaft is longer than the other one.
This longer shaft must be on the driving side.

5-44 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
If the installation condition of Development Roller or Regulation Roller is not correct, both the
Seal 550 and the Seal 551 on the Developer Side Plate may be transformed.
The toner may spill out from the Developer Unit if they are transformed.
To avoid this problem, once set each roller to the installation position, and then bring up and
down it.

Seal 550

Seal 551

Bring up
and down.

No good (Seals are transformed.) Good

5-45 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

22) Paste the Seals 130 (81) to both side faces of new Development Roller.

81

NOTE
(1) Remove dirt or oil from the side face before pasting the Seals 130 (81).

(2) Paste the Seal 130 (81) at the center of side face.
If it is out of the side face, it may damage the Drum.

Good No good

5-46 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

23) Remove the Retaining Ring-E (E7) (82) on the driving side to remove the Collar (83).

(Driving side)

82

83

82

5-47 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

24) Remove Retaining Ring-E (E8) (84) and Retaining Ring-E (E7) (85) on the driven side.
Also, remove 2 pieces of screw (86) to make the Bracket 580 (87) free.

(Driven side)

86

87

85 84

5-48 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

25) Remove 4 pieces of bind head screw (88) on the driving side, which fix the Developer Side Plate.

(Driving side)

88 88

26) Remove 4 pieces of bind head screw (89) on the driven side, which fix the Developer Side Plate.

(Driven side)

89 89

5-49 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

27) Sliding both Developer Side Plates (90) outward, pull out Ball Bearings (10x22x6.0) (91) and
F8x16x5 Bearing (92) from the shafts.
You will be able to remove Toner Supply Roller (93) and Agitator Assembly (94).
Replace the Toner Supply Roller (93) with the new one.

90

94

93

92 92

91 91

NOTE
(1) Be careful of the direction of Toner Supply Roller (93) when you install it.
One shaft is longer than the other one.
This longer shaft must be on the driving side.

(2) Be careful of the direction of Agitator Assembly (94) when you install it.
One shaft is longer than the other one.
This longer shaft must be on the driving side.

(3) Assemble the Frame and Developer Side Plate on a flat table as far as possible.
Toner may spill out if the unit is distorted.

5-50 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

28) Remove 7 pieces of screw (95) to remove Bracket 582 (96) and Spacer (97).
Replace the Bracket 582 (96) with the new one.

95 95

96

97

NOTE
The screw holes of Bracket 582 (96) and Spacer (97) are oval type.
Make sure to tighten each screw at the center of each screw hole.
If not tightened at the center, (Bracket 582 is shifted to either side), its mylar part may be
folded.

5-51 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

29) Strip off each Seals from the Developer Side Plate of driving side, clean the surface you will paste
the new ones, and then paste the new ones as they were.
Please refer to NOTE on and after the page 5-54 as there are some matters to be cared when you
paste the new seals.

Seal 553 (98) Seal 550 (101)

Seal 558 (99) Seal 551 (102)
Seal 557 (100)

98 99

100

101

102

98 99

100

101

102

5-52 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

30) Strip off each Seals from the Developer Side Plate of driven side, clean the surface you will paste
the new ones, and then paste the new ones as they were.
Please refer to NOTE on and after the page 5-54 as there are some matters to be cared when you
paste the new seals.

Seal 554 (103) Seal 550 (106)

Seal 559 (104) Seal 551 (104)
Seal 557 (105)

104 103

105

106
107

104 103

105

106

107

5-53 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
(1) There is a projection beside the installation place of Regulation Roller.
Align one end of each Seal 550 and Seal 551 with the head of this projection.
You do not have to care about the alignment of another end.

Align here.

Projection

Not necessary to align here.

(2) Set the Seal 550 onto the Seal 551 without stripping off the protection paper, place the
Seal 550 properly, and then strip off the protection paper.
(There is very small space between triangle and Seal 551. If you strip off the protection
paper first then set the Seal 550, it will be very difficult to place the Seal 550 because the
tape on the back of seal sticks to the Seal 551.)

Set the Seal 550 first, then strip off

the protection paper.

Triangle

Seal 550

Seal 551

5-54 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
(3) Paste both the Seal 550 and Seal 551 first, then paste the Seal 557 so that no space
should exit between Seal 550 and Seal 557.

Seal 557
Seal 557

Seal 550

Seal 550
Seal 551
No space exists.
Seal 551

Wait to paste the new Side Seals 491 until you install both the Development Roller and
Regulation Roller at the step 21.

Side Seals 491

5-55 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

5.5.2 Replacing Developer Toner Sensor (TLS2)
1) Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing
Image Corona, Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

1 1

2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove the screw (3) to make the harness free, and then remove
2 pieces of bind head screw (4) to remove the Toner Sensor (5).

4 2

5-56 K77sm5e3 (Ver. H.0)

5.6 Cutter Unit
5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit
1) Open the Right Side Door.

2) Remove the Bolt (2) which fixes the Cutter Unit from the bottom, and also remove Washer (3),
Collar (4) and Spring (5).

5-57 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (6) of the Solenoid.

4) Catching the Cutter Handle (7), bring up the Cutter Unit (8) a little and pull it out from the machine.

5-58 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

5.6.2 Replacing Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (SL2)
1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit]
on the page 5-57.

2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2), release the wire from the Mini Clamp (3), and remove
the Stopper (4).

NOTE
When you put back the Stopper (4), tighten the
screws (2) pressing the Stopper (4) toward the arrow
mark.

5-59 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Solenoid Mount Plate (6).

4) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (7) to remove the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8).
Replace the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (8) with the new one.

NOTE
Fit the boss (9) of the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid to the hole (10) of the Solenoid Mount Plate.

10 9

Fit the boss to the hole.

5-60 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly

NOTE
Lubricate the Stay Assembly every 6 months.
Use the sewing machine oil for lubrication.

1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit]
on the page 5-57.

2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3).

2 3 3 2

5-61 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 1 piece of E Ring (E3) (4) on the handle side.
Remove E Ring (E5) (5) and Oilless Metals (6) at both sides to remove the Supporting Shaft 1 (7).
As you will find the Stay Assembly, lubricate it at this time.
If you will replace the Stay Assembly, go to the next step.

5 5

6
7
6
7 5
5 4

4) Remove E Ring (E5) (8) and Oilless Metals (9) at both sides, remove the Spring (10) on the
handle side, and then remove the Stay Assembly (11).
Replace the Stay Assembly (11) with the new one.

NOTE
Do not remove the Side Plates of Cutter Unit when you remove the Stay Assembly.
If you remove Side Plates, it is necessary to re-adjust the home position of Cutter Blade.

5-62 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

5.6.4 Adjusting Home Position of Cutter Blade

NOTE
If you have “Cutter Jam” frequently, please check whether the home position of Cutter Blade is
properly adjusted or not.
And if necessary, please adjust in the following way.
You need the following exclusive tools to check and adjust.

HP Adjustment Assembly (3508560021)

HP Adjustment tool 2 (3108500020)

1) Remove the Cutter Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.6.1 Removing Cutter Unit]
on the page 5-57.

2) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove

the Lower Paper Guide Plate (3). 2 2
Remove a screw (4) on the pin side to remove the
Paper Exit Guide Plate 2 (5).

5 3

5-63 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove the Stay Assembly (6) making reference to
[5.6.3 Lubrication / Replacement of Stay Assembly] on
the page 5-61.

4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7) which fix the

Joint A (8).
7

5) Fit the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) firmly to 3 Pins of the Cutter Side Plate.
Insert the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10) under the Cutter Blade and place it at the nearest position to
the Cutter Side Plate.

10 9 10

5-64 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

6) Rotate the Cutter Handle until the cutting point (11) of Cutter Blade touches the HP Adjustment
tool 2 (10).
When the cutting point (11) touches the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10), fix the Joint A (8) tightening
Set Screws (7).
The gap between cutting point and base of Cutter Unit becomes 16mm by this operation.
When you have tightened the Set Screws (7), remove only the HP Adjustment tool 2 (10).
(Leave the HP Adjustment Assembly (9) as it is.)

11

16mm

10 9 8 10

7) Loosen 2 pieces of bind head screw (12) which fix the

Cutter Handle. 12
Rotate the Cutter Handle until the green area can be
seen in the notch (13).
When the green area can be seen in the notch (13),
tighten the bind head screws (12).

13

8) Remove the HP Adjustment Assembly (9).

Then, reassemble the Cutter Unit in the reversed order.

5-65 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

5.6.5 Adjusting angle of Cutter Unit

NOTE
If you replace the Cutter Unit with the new one, make sure to check whether or not the paper
can be cut in a right angle.
If not, please adjust in the following way.

1) Print out an A0 paper, and then fold it at the central line.

2) Measure the difference of paper length between left

and right.
It must be 2.5mm or shorter.

Should be 2.5mm
or shorter

5-66 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) It is necessary to adjust the angle of Cutter Unit if the difference is longer than 2.5mm.
If you loosen 2 pieces of screw (1), you can shift the Cutter Unit left or right.

If the right side of print is longer than left side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the right.

If the left side of print is longer than right side, slide the whole Cutter Unit to the left.

5-67 K77sm5e4 (Ver. H.0)

5.7 Fuser
5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-68 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

9 10 10 9

10

5-69 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (12)

11 12 12 11

12

8) Remove tooth washer screws (13) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (14).

13 13

14 14

5-70 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

 9) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (15) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16).

15 15

16

16

10) Remove 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (17) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom.

17 17

11) Remove the Fuser Unit (18) from the machine.

18

18

5-71 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.2 Replacing IR Lamps & Fuser Roller

NOTE
Fuser Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit

Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-72 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

9 10 10 9

10

5-73 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (12)

12 11

11 12

12

8) Remove a tooth washer screw (13) to remove each Lamp GP (14) with Lamp Mounts (15) at both
sides to make the IR Lamps free.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (16) of IR Lamps.

14 14

13 13

16 16

15 14 14

15

5-74 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

9) Pull out the IR Lamps (17) gently.
Replace the IR Lamps (17) with the new ones.

17

17

NOTE
(1) There are 2 kinds of IR Lamp.
One has a black wire and another has a white
one.
Make sure to install the black one to the upper
Black
position.

White

(2) There is a projection on the mid glass part of each IR Lamp.

When the projections of both IR Lamps touch each other, IR Lamps will be broken
because of the vibration.
Make sure to direct these projections to the other directions when you install the IR Lamps.

Projections OK OK NG

5-75 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

10) Remove tooth washer screws (18) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (19).

18 18

19 19

5-76 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

11) Pull the Levers L/R (20) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller.
Then, remove Spring Hooks 3 (21), Spring Hooks 1/2 Assembly (22) and Extension Springs A (23)
at both sides.

20

20

20 21 21 20

22 23 22 23

23

22

21

NOTE
When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin.

Pin Pin

No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)

5-77 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

12) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (24) to remove 50T Spur Gear (25), 3 pieces of Spacer (26),
2 pieces of Wave Washer (27) and 2 pieces of Collar (28).

27
28
26

25
24

26
25
27

13) Remove 2 pieces of Pan Head Screw (29) to remove 50T Spur Gear (30) and Collar 1 (31).

30

29

30

31

14) Remove 4 pieces (2 pieces on each side) of tooth washer screw (32) to remove Collars (33), Ball
Bearings (34) and Isolate Bushings (35) at both sides

32 32

34

33

35

5-78 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

15) Remove the Fuser Roller (36) pulling out to your side.
Remove both the Collar E (37) and Collar 4 (38) from one side (driving side of machine) of the
Fuser Roller.
Replace both the Fuser Roller (36) and the Collar E (37) with the new ones.

33

NOTE
(1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Fuser Roller when you
install the new one.
However, please install the side having Collar E and Collar 4 to the driving side of
machine.

(2) Collar E (37) is not a Periodical Replacement Part, so basically you do not have to replace
if it is not broken.
But the Collar E will be strongly fixed to the Fuser Roller after a long term of usage, so it
will be broken in many cases if you try to remove from the Fuser Roller.
Please replace with the new one if it is broken.

5-79 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.3 Replacing Pressure Roller

NOTE
Pressure Roller is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 200,000m.

1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit

Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-80 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

9 10 10 9

10

5-81 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

7) Slide both the Shaft 4 (11) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (12)

12 11

11 12

12

8) Remove tooth washer screws (13) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (14).

13 13

14 14

5-82 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

9) Pull the Levers L/R (15) at both sides to decompress the Fuser Roller.

15 15

NOTE
When you pressurize the Fuser Roller, confirm the Levers L/R are fitted to the inside of Pin.

Pin Pin

No good (Lever is out of the Pin.) Good (Lever is inside of the Pin.)

5-83 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

10) Remove the Pressure Roller (16) pulling out to your side.
Remove C rings (17), Ball Bearings (18) and Isolate Bushing (19) from both sides of the Pressure
Roller.
Replace the Pressure Roller (16) with the new one.

16

16

17

19

18

NOTE
(1) You do not have to be care about the direction (left or right) of the Pressure Roller when
you install the new one.

(2) You can adjust the fusing pressure by adjusting the gap between Spring Hook 1 (20) and
Spring Hook 2 (21).
It is 2.5mm in usual case.
The width of “Nip” is 8 to 9mm at the center and 10 to 11mm at both sides (10mm from
side edges of A0 or 36” paper).

10mm 10mm
2.5mm

20

21 10 to 11mm 8 to 9mm 10 to 11mm

5-84 K77sm5e5 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.4 Replacing Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & BL3)
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-85 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

9 10 10 9

10

5-86 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

7) Open the Licking Wire Saddle (11) to release the wire, and then remove 3 pieces of tooth washer
screws (12) to remove each Exhaust Blower (13).
Replace the Exhaust Blower (13) with the new one.

12

12

11
13

5-87 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.5 Replacing Thermistor
1) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-68.

2) Loosen 4 tooth washer screws (2), and then remove the Cover 5 (3).

3 3

5-88 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 5 pieces of bind head screws to remove Nylon Clamps (4) which fix the wire of
Thermistor.
Pull out the connector (5) from the installation hole of plate, and then pull out the wire (6) from the
hole (7).

4
7
4 5

4) Remove the tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Fitting Plate 1 (9) with the Thermistor.

5-89 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove the tooth washer screw (10) to remove the Thermistor (11).
Replace the Thermistor (11) with the new one.

5-90 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.6 Replacing Thermostat
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-91 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (8).

6) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (9) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (10).

9 10 10 9

10

5-92 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove the tooth washer screw (11), and then pull out the Fitting Plate 2 (12).

12

11

8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (13) to remove the Thermostat (14).
Replace the Thermostat (14) with the new one.

14

13

5-93 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.7 Replacing Stripper Finger Assemblies
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-94 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Slide both the Shaft 4 (8) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (9)

8 9 9 8

6) Remove the screw (10) to remove each Stripper Finger Assembly (11).
Replace the Stripper Finger Assembly (11) with the new one.

11

10 11

5-95 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.8 Replacing Separation Fingers
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-96 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove each Cover 3 (6) and Cover 4 (7).

7 5 5 6

5) Slide both the Shaft 4 (8) inward to release from the hole, and then remove the Exit Cover
Assembly (9)

8 9 9 8

5-97 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove tooth washer screws (10) at both sides to remove the Frame Assembly (11).

10 10

11 11

5-98 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screws (12) to remove the Frame (13).

12

12

13

9) Remove the Extension Spring (14) to remove each Separation Finger (15).
Replace the Separation Finger (15) with the new one.

14

15

5-99 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.9 Replacing Exit Sensor (LS2)
1) Open both the Rear Upper Cover (1) and Exit
Cover (2). 1

2) Loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3).

3) Close the Rear Upper Cover (1), and then remove the Cover 7 (4).

5-100 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove a tooth washer screw (5) to remove the
Cover 3 (6).
5 6

5) Remove 2 pieces of screw (7), disconnect the connector (8) and remove the Exit Sensor (9).
Replace the Exit Sensor with the new one.

5-101 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.7.10 Replacing Pressure Blowers (BL4 to BL7)
1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1). 1

2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Cover 2 Assembly (3).

3
2

5-102 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 9 pieces of tooth washer screws (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5).

4) Disconnect each connector (6).

5-103 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove 4 pieces of screw (7) to remove each Pressure Blower (8).
Replace the Pressure Blower with the new one.

5-104 K77sm5e6 (Ver. H.0)

5.8 Roll Decks
5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck

NOTE
You can remove all Roll Decks in the same way.

1) Draw out the necessary Roll Deck (1).

2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) which fix the Roll Deck to the Rails.

2 2

3) Remove the Roll Deck (3).

5-105 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.2 Replacing Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) &
Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (MC8) (1st Roll Deck)
1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck (1).

2) Disconnect each connector (2).

3) Expanding the stopper lever (3) outward, pull out each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and
Bypass Feed Clutch (5) from the shaft.
Replace each Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (5) with the new one.

3 5

5 4

5-106 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.3 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1),
Paper Size Sensors (PH5A to PH11A) &
Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) (1st deck)
1) Remove the Top Roll Deck (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck]
on the page 5-105.

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Harness Cover (3).

2 3

3) Remove the bind head screw (4), disconnect the connector (5) and remove the Bypass Start
Sensor (6).
Replace the Bypass Start Sensor (6) with the new one.

4 5 6

5-107 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

4) Loose 2 pieces of tooth washer screws (7) to remove the Cover 370 (8).

7 8

5) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screws (9), and then turn over the Stay 344 (10).

10

10

5-108 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove the bind head screw (11), disconnect the connector (12), and remove each Roll Set
Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13).
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 1 and Paper Size Sensors (13) with the new one.

12

12

11

13

5-109 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.4 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5B to PH11B) (2nd deck)
1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (1).

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Sensor Cover (3).

5-110 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (4).

4 4

4) Turn over the Bracket (5), and you will find the sensors.

5-111 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove the bind head screw (6), disconnect the connector (7), and remove each Roll Set
Sensor 2 and Paper Size Sensors (8).
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 2 and Paper Size Sensors (8) with the new one.

5-112 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.5 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 3 (PH3) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5C to PH11C) (3rd deck)
1) Draw out the Bottom Roll Deck (1).

2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Lower Cover (3).

2 2

5-113 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4).

5-114 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

4) Turn over the Stay 346 (5), and you will find the sensors.

5-115 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove the bind head screw (6), disconnect the connector (7), and remove each Roll Set
Sensor 3 and Paper Size Sensors (8).
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 3 and Paper Size Sensors (8) with the new one.

5-116 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.6 Replacing Roll Set Sensor 4 (PH4) &
Paper Size Sensors (PH5D to PH11D) (4th deck)
1) Remove the Bottom Roll Deck (1) from the machine
making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck]
on the page 5-105.

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Lower Harness Cover (3).

2 3

5-117 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (5).

5-118 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Rear Cover (7).

5-119 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then turn over the Stay 346 (9).

8 9 9 8

5-120 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove the bind head screw (10), disconnect the connector (11), and remove each Roll Set
Sensor 4 and Paper Size Sensors (12).
Replace each Roll Set Sensor 4 and Paper Size Sensors (12) with the new one

10
11

12

5-121 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.7 Replacing Paper Feed Clock Sensors
(PH13 to PH16)
(Common for all decks)

NOTE
You can remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor in each Roll Deck in almost same way.
This section shows you how to remove the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 in the Top Roll Deck
as an example.

1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1).

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).

2 2

5-122 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Cover 1 (5).

6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (6) to remove the Upper Sensor Mount (7).

5-123 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

7) Disconnect the connector (8), and then press the stopper hooks (9) inward to remove the
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) from the Mount.
Replace the Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (10) with the new one.

9
8 10

5-124 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.8 Replacing 501-3M Belt (Common for all decks)

NOTE
You can remove the 501-3M Belt in each Roll Deck in almost same way.
This section shows you how to remove the 501-3M Belt in the Top Roll Deck as an example.

1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1).

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Gear Cover 384 (3).

5-125 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the Pulley (5) with its plate.
Then, remove the 501-3M Belt (6).
Replace the 501-3M Belt (6) with the new one.

6 5

NOTE
Tighten the tooth washer screws (4) pressing down
the Pulley (5) to give a tension to the 501-3M Belt (6).

5-126 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.9 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (1st & 2nd decks)

NOTE
You can remove both the Dehumidify Heaters (H8 : Roll 1 & H7 : Roll 2) in the same way.
This section shows you how to remove the Dehumidify Heater (H8) for the Top Roll Deck as
an example.

1) Draw out the Top Roll Deck 1 (1).

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) to remove the Heater Cover (3).

2 2

5-127 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (4), remove 2 pieces of screw (5), and then remove the
Dehumidify Heater (6).
Replace the Dehumidify Heater (6) with the new one.

5 4

5-128 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.10 Replacing Dehumidify Heaters (3rd & 4th decks)
1) Remove both the Middle Roll Deck and the Bottom Roll
Deck making reference to [5.8.1 Removing each Roll
Deck] on the page 5-105.

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove each Cover 341 (2).

1 2 1

5-129 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (3), remove 2 pieces of screw (4), and then remove each
Dehumidify Heater (5).
Replace the Dehumidify Heater (5) with the new one.

3
4
4

5-130 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.8.11 Replacing Spool Brake
1) Remove the Roll Spool (1) from each Roll Deck.
1

2) Remove E Ring (2), Gear 454 (3), Thrust Washer (4) and Oil-less Bearing (5).

3
2

5
2 4

3) Remove E Ring (6) and Spool Brake (7).

Replace the Spool Brake (7) with the new one.

7
6
6

5-131 K77sm5e7 (Ver. H.0)

5.9 Bypass Feeder
5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit
1) Draw out the Bypass Feeder Unit (1).

2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (2) which fix the Bypass Feeder Unit from the bottom.

2 2

3) Slide the Bypass Feeder (1) along the Rails and remove it.

5-132 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

5.9.2 Replacing Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid
(SL4)
1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing
Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-132.

2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).

5-133 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (4).

4) Remove 2 pieces of screw (5) to remove the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6).
Replace the Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (6) with the new one.

NOTE
Tighten the screws (5) at the center of oval holes.

5-134 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

5.9.3 Replacing Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31) &
Cut Sheet Size Sensors (PH32 to PH37)
1) Remove the Bypass Feeder Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.9.1 Removing
Bypass Feeder Unit] on the page 5-132.

2) Loosen 5 pieces of tooth washer screws (2), and then slide and remove the Cover 2 (3).

5-135 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove the screw (4) to remove the Bracket 239 (5), and also remove 2 pieces of screw (6) to
remove the Bracket 232 (7).

3 4

5-136 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove the screw (8) and disconnect the connector (9) to remove each Cut Sheet Set Sensor
and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10).
Replace each Cut Sheet Set Sensor and Cut Sheet Size Sensors (10) with the new one.

8 10 9

10

10

5-137 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

5.9.4 Replacing Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid
(SL3)
1) Open both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2).
(They are removed in the later procedure.)

2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4)
to remove the Cover (5).

5 3

5-138 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove the Tension Spring (6).
As the Spring (7) easily drops off, remove it for the safety.

5-139 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Disconnect the connector (8), remove 2 pieces of screw (9), and remove the Bracket 557 (10) with
the solenoid.

9 9 8

10

5-140 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove the E Ring (E5) (11) and 2 pieces of screw (12) to remove the Bypass Feeding Roller
Down Solenoid (13) from the Bracket.
Replace the Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (13) with the new one.

11
12

13

5-141 K77sm5e8 (Ver. H.0)

5.10 Internal Transportation Unit
5.10.1 Replacing Belt 2
1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-1.
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.

2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making

reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-68.

3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).

1 1 2

5-142 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4).

3 4
3

5) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (5) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (6)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (7).

6 7

5-143 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) which fix the Belt Unit.

7) Slide the Belt Unit (9) from the driving side to the driven side to pull out both the roller shaft (10)
and Duct (11), and then remove the Belt Unit (9) from the machine.

11

9 10

5-144 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

 8) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E10) (12) and Ball Bearing (13), and then remove 2 pieces of
tooth washer screw (14) to remove the Bracket 1 (15).

13

12
12
14 13 15
14

9) Remove 2 pieces of each E Ring (E7) (16), Washer (17) and Ball Bearing (18), and then remove
4 pieces of tooth washer screw (19) to remove the Bracket 2 (20).

16 17 18

17

18
19 20

10) Slide each Belt 2 (21) outward to remove from the unit.
Replace the Belt 2 (21) with the new one. 21

5-145 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

5.10.2 Replacing Separation Sensor (PH18)
1) Draw out the Process Unit making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-1.
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.

2) Remove the Fuser Unit from the machine making

reference to [5.7.1 Removing Fuser Unit] on the
page 5-68.

3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1), and disconnect the connector (2).

1 1 2

5-146 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Cover 305 Assembly (4).

3 4
3

5) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (5) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (6)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (7).

6 7

5-147 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

6) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove the wire from Wire Saddle (9) and Edge
Saddle (10).

9 8

10

7) Loosen the screw (11), and the remove the Bracket 228 (12) with the sensor.

11

12

5-148 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (13) inward, remove the Separation Sensor (14) from the bracket.
Replace the Separation Sensor (14) with the new one.

14

13

13

5-149 K77sm5e9 (Ver. H.0)

5.10.3 Removing Internal Transportation Unit
1) Remove the Drum Assembly (1) from the Process Unit
making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, 1
Drum Assembly, Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on
the page 5-4.

2) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to
[5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-161.

3) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the Left Side Cover (4).

3 3

5-150 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove the Duct (5) removing 8 pieces of tooth
washer screw.

5) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (6).

6) Open the Right Side Door (7).

5-151 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove
the Cover (9).

8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (10).

11
Remove 3 pieces of tooth screws (11) to remove the Gear
Assembly (12).

11
12
10

9) Open the Top Rear Cover (13), and then loosen 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (14).

14

13

5-152 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

10) Close the Top Rear, and then remove the Fuser 15
Cover (15).

11) Remove a tooth washer screw (16) from each Cover, and then remove Cover 3 (17) and
Cover 4 (18).

17 18
16

16

12) Disconnect 3 connectors (19).

19

19

5-153 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

13) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (20), open the Exit Cover (21), and then remove the
Cooling Fan Unit (22).

20

20

22

21 22

14) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (23) which fix the Fuser Unit from the bottom.

23 23

23

5-154 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

15) Remove Hexagon Head Bolts (24) at both sides which fix the Fuser Unit.
Also, disconnect 4 connectors (25).

24 24

25
25

16) Remove the Fuser Unit (26) from the machine.

26

17) Remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (27) and 7 pieces of tooth washer screw (28) to remove the
Rear Cover (29).
(Fixing Brackets inside the Rear Cover will be removed also.)

28

29 27

5-155 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

18) Loosen 4 pieces of tooth washer screw inserting a screwdriver from the holes (30), and remove
each Base 2 (31) and Base 3 (32).

30 30

32 31

30 30

19) Remove Transmission PCB (33) and Reception PCB (34).

(Put them aside as the following right photo, otherwise you will break them when you remove the
Inner Transport Assembly.)

34 33

20) Disconnect 4 connectors (35) on the Left Side Plate.

Then, pull the harnesses from the windows (36) into the machine.

36 36

35

5-156 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

21) Remove Retaining Ring K and Flat Washers (37) at both sides.

37 37

22) Prepare the Gas Spring Jigs (38).

Gas Spring Jigs : 7708560070

38 38

23) Fit the notch (39) of each Gas Spring Jig to the shaft of Inner Transport Lock Lever.

39

5-157 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

24) Bring down the Inner Transport Assembly to shorten the Gas Spring Hinges (40), and then bring
up the Gas Spring Jigs (38) to cover the Gas Spring Hinges.

40

38

NOTE
Gas Spring Hinges will not extend more than required because the Gas Spring Jigs restrict
their extension, so it will be easy to set the hinges when you reassemble.
If you do not use the jigs, hinges will extend fully and it will be very hard to set them again.

25) Pull out each Gas Spring Hinge from the shaft while bringing up the Inner Transport Assembly a
little.

NOTE
Be careful not to make the Gas Spring Hinge come
out from the stopper plate (41) of Gas Spring Jig.
It will be very dangerous because the Gas Spring
Hinge extends momentarily.

41

5-158 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

26) Remove the Retaining Ring E and Ball Bearing (42) on the Left Side Plate.

42

27) Remove the Retaining Ring E (43).

43

28) Remove Retaining Ring E (44).

44

5-159 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

29) Shift the Shafts (45) inward until they are pulled out from the Side Plates.

45
45

30) Remove the Inner Transport Assembly (46) from the

machine.

46

5-160 K77sm5eA (Ver. H.0)

5.11 Transfer / Separation Corona
5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona
1) Open the Right Side Door (1).

2) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (2) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (3)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (4).

4
3

5-161 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Transfer / Separation
Corona (6) from the machine.

5-162 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

5.11.2 Replacing Corona Wire 2 Assemblies

NOTE
Corona Wire 2 Assembly is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.

1) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to
[5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-161.

2) If you press down the Stopper Hooks (2), you can remove each Corona Guards A/B (3).
Remove all Corona Guards A/B (3) from the housing.

5-163 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) at both sides, and remove the Corona Housing 5 (5) and several
sheets of Spacers 1 (6) from both sides.

4 5 5 4

6 6

NOTE
As the Spacers 1 (6) adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 (5), the number of them used is
different among unit.
Do not lose or add them without any reason as the height will change.
Also, please remember how many sheets were used on each side because the number may
be different between both sides.

4) Remove the Flash Head Screw (7) to remove each Head Cover 3 (8) and Head Cover 4 (9).

9 8

7 7

5-164 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

5) Removing the Extension Springs (10) on each Corona Block, remove each Corona Wire 2
Assembly (11).
Replace the Corona Wire 2 Assembly (11) with the new one.

11 11

10 10

NOTE
When you stretch the new Corona Wire 2 Assembly, make sure to fit its anti-vibration bead
(12) into the necessary space in the Corona Heads, and also make sure to fit the wire into the
grooves (13) of the Height Adjuster.

12

12

13

13

6) Put back both Cover 3 (8) and Cover 4 (9).

9 8

5-165 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

7) Put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5).

6 5 5 6

NOTE
It is necessary to put back both Spacers 1 (6) and Corona Housing 5 (5) before adjusting the
height of Transfer Corona Wire.

5-166 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

8) Measure the height of each Corona Wire 2 Assembly,
and compare with the values written in the
15.0mm
label which is pasted inside the Right Side Door. 14.0mm
(The values in the right figure are simply the standards.) (10.2mm)

9) If the height is not proper, adjust it rotating the screws (14) on the back of the Corona.

14 14

5-167 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

5.11.3 Replacing Mylar
1) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) from the machine making reference to
[5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-161.

2) Strip off the Mylar (2) from the Corona Housing 5.

Replace the new Mylar (2) with the new one

NOTE
Align the edges of Mylar with the front face and side faces of TR Guides B (3).

Align the short edge with this side face. Align the long edge with these front faces.

5-168 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

5.11.4 Adjustment of gap between Drum &
Corona Housing 5

NOTE
In case you have replaced the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit with the new one, make sure
to check the gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 using an exclusive Jig.
And adjust the gap properly if necessary.
The proper gap between Drum and Corona Housing 5 is 0.4mm to 1.0mm.

0.4mm to 1.0mm

To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in

the right photo.

Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona (7708560021)

1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine

making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 1
Unit] on the page 5-1.

5-169 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

2) Remove each Image Corona (2), Drum Assembly (3), Toner Hopper (4) and Developer Unit (5)
from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

3 2

4 5

NOTE
If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may
damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge

3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (6).

6

5-170 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

4) Disconnect the connector (7), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the
Cover 305 Assembly (9).

9 9
8 8

5) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” (10) into the Drum Shaft (11).

10
10

11

5-171 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

6) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (12).

12

12

7) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (13) and lock it at the operation position.

13

NOTE
Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before
measurement.
If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap
correctly.

5-172 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

8) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Corona” forward and backward to check whether or not its
pins touch the Mylar (14) on the Corona Housing 5.

One of 2 pins marked with 0.4mm (15) should not touch the Mylar (14).
Another pin marked with 1.0mm (16) should touch the Mylar (14) slightly.

If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.4mm and 1.0mm.

16

15
14

0.4mm pin

1.0mm pin 0.4mm pin

1.0mm pin

Diameter of Drum Diameter of Drum

Mylar Mylar

1.0mm pin should touch the Mylar slightly. 0.4mm pin should not touch the Mylar.

NOTE
Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.

5-173 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

9) If the gap is out of the correct range, adjust the height of Corona Housing 5 by adding or removing
Spacer 1 (17).
If you add 1 sheet of Spacer 1, the height of Corona Housing 5 gets 0.2mm higher.

Spacer 1 (7705104090)

17 17

5-174 K77sm5eB (Ver. H.0)

5.12 LED Head
5.12.1 Removing LED Head
1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1).
1

2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the
Cover 305 Assembly (4).

4 4
3 3

5-175 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

3) Draw out the Process Unit (5) from the machine
making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 5
Unit] on the page 5-1.
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.

4) Disconnect 4 connectors (6).

5) Remove 2 pieces of M4x10 black screws (7).

7

5-176 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

6) Catch both sides of the LED Head, and then move the driven side of it as the arrow marks in the
photo show in order to make the Pin (8) comes out from the Slit (9) of the Side Plate.

8 9

7) Pull out the Positioning Pins on the driving side from the Positioning Slits (10), and then remove
the LED Head (11) from the machine.

10
11

NOTE
(1) The wire (12) of LED Cleaning Motor may be
broken if it is loaded.
Please put the LED Head on the table as the
right figure shows so as not to give a load to the
wire.

12

Please read the next page as some more notes are mentioned.

5-177 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
Make sure to close the Process Unit without 7
tightening the M4x10 screws (7).

The Positioning Bars of the LED Head are fitted into the slits of the Process Unit.
Slits Positioning Bars

These Positioning Bars are curved upward, and the LED Head is smoothly moved up when
the bars are fitted into the slits. By this, a proper gap can be kept between LED Head and
Drum.

Slit

LED Head
Proper gap

Bar
Drum

Process Unit

If you close the Process Unit when the LED Head is not movable being fixed with the M4x10
screws, the gap between LED Head and Drum is not adjusted properly. Or you may bend the
Positioning Bars in the worst case.

Gap is not
proper

Bar is bent.
Tightened

5-178 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
After installing the LED Head, please check the Ground Plates (13) are not deformed.
Because they easily hook somewhere on the LED Head and are deformed.

13 13

No Good (Ground Plate is bent.) Good

5-179 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

5.12.2 Replacing Pad Assembly 2

NOTE
Pad Assembly 2 is the Periodical Replacement Part, and its life is 100,000m.

1) Remove the LED Head (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head]
on the page 5-175.

2) Loosen the screw (2) and remove the Pad Assembly 2 (3).
Replace the Pad Assembly 2 (3) with the new one.

3
2

5-180 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

5.12.3 Replacing LED Cleaning Motor (M8)
1) Remove the LED Head (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head]
on the page 5-175.

2) Remove the screw (2) and remove the Bracket 222 (3) with the motor.

3 2

3) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the LED Cleaning Motor (5).
Replace the LED Cleaning Motor (5) with the new one.

5-181 K77sm5eC (Ver. H.0)

5.13 Main Frame
5.13.1 Replacing Drum Motor (M1) &
Timing Belt 565-5GT-40
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free.
As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows.

Tape the Bracket 316.

5-182 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 2 pieces of Nuts (5), remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (6), and remove 2 pieces of
Flat Washer (7), Tension Spring (8), Shaft 207 (9) and Bracket 217 (10).

8 7

9
7

6 10

NOTE
You can adjust the tension of Timing Belt
565-5GT-40 by measuring the distance between
both Flat Washers (7).
Keep 100mm between both inside of Flat 100mm
Washers (7). (Inside to
inside)

5-183 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove the tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Contact Plate (12).

11

12

5) Remove the C Ring (13), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (14) to remove both
Ball Bearing (30x55x13) (15) and Holder (16).
Remove the E Ring (E9) (17) to remove the Ball Bearing (12x28x8) (18).

14 17

13

14

13 17

15

18

16

5-184 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

6) Open 2 pieces of Locking Wire Saddle (19) to make the harness free, and then remove 7 pieces
of tooth washer screw (20) to remove the Bracket (21).

20 19 20

20 21

5-185 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove the E Ring (E8) (22), and remove the Idler Assembly (23).

22

23

5-186 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

8) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (24), and then remove both 72T Pulley (25) and
Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26).
Replace the Timing Belt 565-5GT-40 (26) with the new one.

25

24 26

26

24

5-187 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

9) Remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Cap Screw (27), and then remove the 24T Pulley (28).
Disconnect the connector (29).

27 28 29

27

NOTE
There may be the case that some abnormal sound
is generated during operation if the Drum Shaft or
Shaft 204 is short of grease.
If you feel they are not greased enough when you
re-assembly, please grease them.

Drum Shaft

Shaft 204

5-188 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

10) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (30) to remove the Motor Bracket (31) with motor.

30

30 30

30

31

5-189 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

11) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (32) and 1 piece of Flush Head Screw (33) to remove
the Motor Assembly.

33

32

12) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (34), and then pull out the 50T Gear (35) from the shaft of
Drum Motor (36).
Replace the Drum Motor (36) with the new one.

34
35
34

36
35

5-190 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

5.13.2 Replacing Paper Feed Motor (M2)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Disconnect the connector (3), and open the Wire Saddles (4) to make the wires free.

4 3

5-191 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Motor Base (6) with motor.

5 5

4) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (7), and then pull out the 40T Gear (8).

5) Remove 3 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the Paper Feed Motor (10).
Replace the paper Feed Motor (10) with the new one.

10
9

5-192 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

5.13.3 Replacing Fuser Motor (M5)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to make the Bracket 316 (4) with PCB free.
As the Bracket 316 (4) is preventative for the later works, tape it as the photo shows.

Tape the Bracket 316.

5-193 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

3) Open 3 pieces of Wire Saddle (5) to make the wires free.

4) Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (7) to remove the
Side Plate Assembly (8) with motor.

7
8

5-194 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove the E Ring (E7) (9) to remove the Ball Bearing (10).
Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (11) to divide the Side Plate Assembly into Side
Plate 1 (13) and Side Plate 2 (14).

11

11

10

13

12

5-195 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

6) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (14), and remove the 26T Spur Gear (15).
Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (16) to remove the Fuser Motor (17).
Replace the Fuser Motor (17) with the new one.

16

16

14

17 15

5-196 K77sm5eD (Ver. H.0)

5.13.4 Replacing Developer Positioning Motor (M4)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Disconnect the connector (3), and then remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (4) to remove the
Developer Positioning Motor (5).
Replace the Developer Positioning Motor (5) with the new one.

5
3

5-197 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

5.13.5 Replacing Cutter Motor (M3),
Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22) &
Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (PH24)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Disconnect the connector (3), and then remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (4) to remove the
Cooling Fan 4 (5) with its bracket.

4
5

5-198 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

3) Loosen 2 pieces of screw (6), and put the Bracket (7) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later
works.

6 7

4) Remove the Spring 211 (8), and then remove 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (9) to remove the
15T Sprocket Assembly (10).

10

5-199 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
When reassembly, put back the 15T Sprocket
Assembly (10) with the Hexagon Head Bolts (9) 9
loosed, hook the Spring 211 (8) as it was, then
tighten the Hexagon Head Bolts (9).
You do not have to give any tension to the Roller
Chain especially but only the tension of Spring 211
(8) is enough.

8 10

5) Disconnect 3 connectors (11), and then remove 2 pieces of each tooth washer screw (12) and
Hexagon Head Bolt (13) to remove the 15T Sprocket Assembly (14).

14

11

12 12

13 13

5-200 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove 5 pieces of tooth washer screw (15) and 2 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (16) to remove
the Motor Bracket (17) with motor.

16

15

15

17

5-201 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove the tooth washer screw (18), disconnect the connector (19), and remove the
Bracket 14 (20) with sensor.

18 19

20

20

8) Pressing the Stopper Hooks (21) inward, remove the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor
(22) from the bracket.
Replace the Internal Transportation Unit Set Sensor (22) with the new one.

21

22

5-202 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

 9) Remove the tooth washer screw (23) to remove the Mount (24).

23

24

10) Disconnect the connector (25), and then remove 2 pieces of bind head screw (26) to remove the
Cutter Home Position Sensor (27).
Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensor (27) with the new one.

24 25

26

11) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (27) to remove the Joint B (28).

27

28

NOTE
Lock the Set Screws (27) with the locking paint when you reassemble.

5-203 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

12) Remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Head Bolt (29) to remove the Cutter Motor (30).
Replace the Cutter Motor (30) with the new one.

30

29
29

5-204 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

5.13.6 Replacing Bypass Feeding Motor (M10)
1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to
[5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-105 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit]
on the page 5-132.

1
2

2) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Side Cover L (4).
Remove 6 pieces of tooth washer screw (5) to remove the Cover 324 (6).

5
3 4

5-205 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect 3 connectors (7).

4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Drum Motor Controller PCB (9).

8
8

5-206 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

5) Loosen the tooth washer screw (10) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer
screw (11) to remove the Cover (12).

11

12 10

5-207 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cover 308 (14).

13

14

5-208 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

7) Disconnect 2 connectors (15), remove 4 pieces of screw (16), and then pull out the Bypass
Feeding Motor (17) to the inside of machine.
Replace the Bypass Feeding Motor (17) with the new one.

16
16

15

17

5-209 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
(1) When reinstalling the Bypass Feeding Motor,
tighten the screws while pressing the motor so
that there exists no space between Counter
Rollers of motor side and that of machine side.
Counter Roller
of machine side

Counter Roller
of motor side

(2) A red circular seal is pasted on the Bypass Feeding Motor.

Connect the connector of orange cable to this red seal side.

Red seal

Orange cable

5-210 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

5.13.7 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6)
1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) making reference to
[5.1.1 Drawing out the Process Unit] on the page 5-1. 1
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.

2) Remove the LED Head (2) from the machine making reference to [5.12.1 Removing LED Head]
on the page 5-175.

3) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Bracket 69 (4).

5-211 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (5), disconnect the connector (6), and then take out the
Motor Bracket (7) with motor from the machine.

5
5

6
7
7

5) Remove 3 pieces of Pan Head Screw (8) to remove the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9).
Replace the Toner Supply Motor 2 (9) with the new one.

8
9
8

5-212 K77sm5eE (Ver. H.0)

5.13.8 Replacing Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) &
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (3), and remove the rotary side of Paper Gate Brake (4).

5-213 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of
Paper Gate Brake (7).
Replace the Paper Gate Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.

5 7

6 7

4 7

NOTE
When you install the new Paper Gate Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and
fixed side.

Fixed side

Rotary side

Keep 0.2mm.

5-214 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Clutch
Plate (10).
Pull out both the Thrust Washer (11) and Spacer (12) from the shaft.

8 11 10

9 8

12

11

10

5) Expanding the stopper lever (13) outward, pull out the Paper Gate Clutch (14) from the shaft.
Replace the paper Gate Clutch (14) with the new one.

14

14

13

5-215 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.9 Replacing Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) &
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).
Draw out the Middle Roll Deck (3).

2 3
1

2) Loosen 2 pieces of Set Screw (4), and remove the rotary side of Paper Feed Brake (5).

5-216 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (5), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (6) to remove the fixed side of
Paper Feed Brake (7).
Replace the Paper Feed Brake (both rotary side and fixed side) (4 &7) with the new one.

7
6

7 4

NOTE
When you install the new Paper Feed Brake, keep 0.2mm of space between rotary side and
fixed side.

Fixed side

Rotary side

Keep 0.2mm.

5-217 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 3 pieces of screw (8), disconnect the connector (9), and then remove the Mount 1 (10).

8
8

10
10

5) Pull out the Collar (11), and then pull out the Paper Feed Clutch Assembly (12) from the shaft and
remove the Sliding Key (13).

11 12

12

13

5-218 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove 3 pieces of screw (14) to remove the 50T Spur Gear (15) from the Paper Feed Clutch
(16).
Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (16) with the new one.

14
15

16

NOTE
Please check whether or not the Paper Feed Clutch is properly installed or not in the following
ways.

(1) Draw out the Middle Roll Deck, and then try to move the Paper Feed Roller left and right
by hand whether or not there is a play.
If there is a play, please put the Thrust Washer between Paper Feed Clutch and Paper
Feed Brake. (If you do not remove the play, it will cause improper cut length.)
(2) Rotate the Paper Feed Roller by hand. If you feel it is heavy to rotate, remove the Thrust
Washer.

Use the following kinds of Thrust Washer according to the necessity.

10.1 x 16 x 0.2
10.1 x 16 x 0.5
10.1 x 16 x 1.0 Paper Feed Roller

Thrust Washer

5-219 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.10 Replacing Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4)
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) If you will replace either Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 or Roll paper Feed Clutch 4, loosen 2 pieces of
screw (3), and put the Bracket (4) with PCB aside as it is preventative for later works.

5-220 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (5), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (6), and then remove each
Clutch Mount (7) with clutch.

6 7
7

4) Pull out the connector (8) from the Clutch Mount.

Expanding the stopper lever (9) outward, pull out the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (9) from the shaft.
Replace the Roll Paper Feed Clutch (10) with the new one.

10

5-221 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.11 Replacing SSR1 and SSR2
1) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) to remove the Side Cover L (2).

2
1

2) Remove 8 pieces of tooth washer screw (3) to remove the Duct Assembly (4).

3 3

3 3

5-222 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect 4 connectors (5), remove 2 pieces of screw (6), and then remove each SSR (7).
Replace the SSR with the new one,.

7
6

5-223 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
Each connector of SSR is labelled independently.
Connect them to the correct position making reference to the following photo.

2-1 2-2

2-4 2-3

1-3 1-4

1-2 1-1

5-224 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.12 Replacing LED Cooling Fans (BL8 to BL11)
1) Remove both the Top Roll Deck (1) and the Bypass Feeder Unit (2) making reference to
[5.8.1 Removing each Roll Deck] on the page 5-105 and [5.9.1 Removing Bypass Feeder Unit]
on the page 5-132.

1
2

2) Loosen the tooth washer screw (3) on the bottom, and remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (4)
to remove the Cover (5).

5 3

5-225 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Remove the connector (6), remove 4 pieces of screw (7), and then remove each LED Cooling
Fan (8).
Replace the LED Cooling Fan (8) with the new one.

8 7

7 6 7

5-226 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.13 Replacing Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
1) Open the Rear Upper Cover (1).
1

2) Disconnect the connector (2), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (3), and then remove the
Cover 305 Assembly (4).

4 4
3 3

5-227 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

3) Draw out the Process Unit (5) from the machine
making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 5
Unit] on the page 5-1.
Remove the Drum Assembly and keep it in the box to
avoid the light.

4) Loosen the screw (6) to make the Bracket 207 (7) free.

5-228 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5) Disconnect the connector (8), and remove the bracket with sensor.

6) Remove the screw (9) top remove the Slit Plate (10).
Remove the screw (11) to remove the Leading Edge Sensor (12).
Replace the Leading Edge Sensor (12) with the new one.

10 9

10 12
11

5-229 K77sm5eF (Ver. H.0)

5.13.14 Replacing Pre-transfer LED
1) Open the Right Side Door (1).

2) Unlock the Internal Transportation Unit (2) rotating the Internal Transportation Unit Lever (3)
counter-clockwise, bring down the unit and then lock the shaft of lever with the Hook (4).

5-230 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

3) Rotate the Knob (5) counter-clockwise to unlock, and then pull out the Bracket (6) with
Pre-transfer LED.

4) Remove the Cover 6 (7), and then remove both screw (8) and nut (9) to make the wire (10) free.

7 8
10

7
8

5-231 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

5) Remove both screw (11) and nut (12) to make one more wire (13) free.

13

12
11 11

6) Remove 6 pieces of each bind head screw (14) and Collar (15), and then divide the lamp into 2
pieces of Pre-Transfer LED PCB (16) disconnecting the connector (17).
Replace the Pre-transfer LED PCB (16) with the new one.

14 17 14

16 14
15

5-232 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

5.13.15 Adjustment of gap between Drum &
Transfer Guide Plate

NOTE
In case you have replaced or removed the Transfer Guide Plate for some reason, make sure
to check the gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate using an exclusive Jig.
And adjust the gap properly if necessary.
The proper gap between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate is 0.75mm to 1.25mm.

0.75mm to 1.25mm

To measure the gap, use the exclusive Jig shown in

the right photo.

Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide (7708560011)

1) Draw out the Process Unit (1) from the machine

making reference to [5.1.1 Drawing out the Process 1
Unit] on the page 5-1.

5-233 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

2) Remove each Image Corona (2), Drum Assembly (3), Toner Hopper (4) and Developer Unit (5)
from the Process Unit making reference to [5.1.2 Removing Image Corona, Drum Assembly,
Toner Hopper & Developer Unit] on the page 5-4.

3 2

4 5

NOTE
If you take checking or adjustment of gap without removing the Developer Unit, you may
damage the surface of Development Roller with the tip of Pin of the Drum Gauge

3) Open the Rear Upper Cover (6).

6

5-234 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

4) Disconnect the connector (7), remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8), and then remove the
Cover 305 Assembly (9).

9 9
8 8

5) Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (10) from the machine making reference to
[5.11.1 Removing Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-161.

10

10

5-235 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

6) Fit the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” (11) into the Drum Shaft (12).

11
11

12

7) Close the Process Unit, and then fix it with 4 pieces of screw (13).

13

13

8) Bring up the Internal Transportation Unit (14) and lock it at the operation position.

14

NOTE
Make sure to close and lock both the Process Unit and the Internal Transportation Unit before
measurement.
If these units are not locked at the correct positions, it is impossible to measure the gap
correctly.

5-236 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

9) Swing the “Drum Gauge for Transfer Guide” forward and backward to check whether or not its
pins touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15).

One of 2 pins marked with 0.75mm (16) should not touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15).
Another pin marked with 1.25mm (17) should touch the Transfer Guide Plate (15) slightly.

If the above conditions are satisfied, the gap is between 0.75mm and 1.25mm.

16
15

17

Diameter of Drum Diameter of Drum

0.75mm pin

1.25mm pin 0.75mm pin

1.25mm pin

Transfer Guide Plate Transfer Guide Plate

1.25mm pin should touch the Transfer 0.75mm pin should not touch the Transfer
Guide Plate slightly. Guide Plate.

NOTE
Please check not at one point but entirely along the Drum Shaft.

5-237 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

10) If the gap is out of the correct range, loosen 5 pieces of screw (18) one by one and move the
Transfer Guide Plate up or down.

18

5-238 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

5.13.16 Replacing Ozone Filters

NOTE
Ozone Filters are Periodical Replacement Parts, and their life are 200,000m or 1 year.

1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the
Cover 1 (3).

1
1

1
1

2 3
2

5-239 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

2) Remove 2 pieces of screw (4) to remove the Cover 2 (5).

3) Remove 4 pieces of Ozone Filter (6).

Replace the Ozone Filters (6) with the new ones.

4) Remove 3 pieces of Ozone Filter (7).

Replace the Ozone Filters (7) with the new ones.

7 7

5-240 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

5.13.17 Replacing Separation Fan (BL1)
1) Remove 14 pieces of tooth washer screw (1) and 2 pieces of bind head screw (2) to remove the
Cover 1 (3).

1
1

1
1

2 3
2

5-241 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

2) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (4) and Flat Washer (5) to remove the Cover 1 (6).

4 6

4 5

5-242 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

3) Disconnect the connector (7), and then remove 3 pieces of screw (8) to remove the
Separation Fan (9).
Replace the Separation Fan (9) with the new one.

5-243 K77sm5eG (Ver. H.0)

5.14 Toner Cartridge Driving Part
5.14.1 Replacing Transmission PCB (PW7750) &
Receiver PCB (PW7751)
1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge
Cover (2).

2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position.
Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3).

3) Open the Right Side Door (5).

5-244 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

4) Remove 4 pieces of screw (6) to remove the Cover (7).

7
6

5) Disconnect the connector (8), and then remove 4 pieces of Hexagon Screw (9) to remove the
Transmission PCB (10).
Replace the Transmission PCB (10) with the new one.

9
10

6) Remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (11) to remove the Toner Cover (1).

11

11

5-245 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (12) to remove the Bracket 562 (13).

13

12

12

8) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (14) to make the Switch (15) free.

14 14
15

5-246 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

 9) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screws (16), disconnect the connector (17), and remove the
Bracket (18).

17

16
16

18

18

10) Remove 4 pieces of screw (19) and 2 pieces of self-tapping screw (20) to remove the
Receiver PCB (21).
Replace the Receiver PCB (20) with the new one.

20 19

19 21

5-247 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

5.14.2 Replacing Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) &
Toner Supply Clutch (MC11)
1) Open the Toner Cover (1) and the Toner Cartridge
Cover (2).

2) Rotate the Toner Cartridge (3) half revolution to move the opening (4) to the top position.
Then, remove the Toner Cartridge (3).

3) Open the Right Side Door (5).

5-248 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

4) Disconnect the connector (6), and then remove 3 pieces of tooth washer screw (7) to remove the
Toner Cover (1).

6 7

5) Remove 4 pieces of tooth washer screw (8) to remove the Bracket 562 (9).

8
8

5-249 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

6) Remove the screw (10) to remove the Cover (11).
Disconnect 2 connectors (12).

10 11

12

5-250 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

7) Remove 2 pieces of tooth washer screw (13) to remove the Cartridge Driving Unit (14).

13

14

5-251 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

8) Remove 2 pieces of Set Screw (15).

15

NOTE
When reassemble, keep a 0.5mm of space between plastic part (16) of clutch and Pin (17),
and then tighten the Set Screw (15).

16 15

17

Keep 0.5mm of space.

5-252 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

9) Remove the E Ring (E7) (18) to remove the Oilless Metal (19).
Remove the E Ring (E8) (20).

18

20

19 18

20

5-253 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

10) Remove 2 pieces of each screw (21) and Stud (22), and remove the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23).
Replace the Toner Supply Motor 1 (23) with the new one.

21

22

23

21

5-254 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

11) Remove the Bracket 511 (24) and the Oilless Metal (25).

24
25

24

12) Remove the E Ring (E10) (26).

26

26

13) Pull the Shaft (27) toward the arrow mark to pull out from the Pin (17).

17

27

5-255 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

14) Expanding the stopper lever (28) outward, pull out the shaft from the Toner Supply Clutch (29).
Replace the Toner Supply Clutch (29) with the new one.

28

29

5-256 K77sm5eH (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 6
Maintenance/Checking

Page
6.1 Periodical Replacement Parts 6- 1

6.2 Periodical Maintenance 6- 2

K77sm6e1 (Ver. H.0)

r5 KIP 8000 PM Schedule 1

-Please keep this form with the KIP 8000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled
-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an "X" in the
Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.
Part / Description Qty Part Number Linear Feet X 1000

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete
Code 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800
Photoreceptor 1 SUP8000-101 I R
Drum Gear 1 7704700190 I I
Main Charge Wire 2 SUP8000-104 # C C C R C C C R C C
Grid Screen 1 7705100270 # C C C C C C C R C C
Wire Clean Pad 2 7705120010 R R
Pre Transfer Lamps 1 # C C C C C C C C C C
Transfer Wire 1 SUP9810-105T # C C C R C C C R C C
Separation Wire 2 SUP9810-105S # C C C R C C C R C C
Developer Space Discs # C C
Developer Unit 1 7704690070 I R
Developer Gears all L L L L L L L L L L
LED Head # C C C C C C C C C C
LED Head Pad 1 7706920010 I R I R I
Paper Compartments @ C C C C C C C C C C
Vacuum (clean) Interior @ C C C C C C C C C C
Ozone Filters 3 6601101740 @ C C C R C C C R C C
Ozone Filters B 4 7701101950 @ C C C R C C C R C C
Knife @ C C C C C C C C C C
Knife Clean / Oil Pad 3504020070 L R
Fuser Roller 1 7704400390 I R
Pressure Roller 1 2210440011 I R
Upper Fuser Nail Assy 20 C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A R C/A C/A
Lower Fuser Nails 20 7104403290 # C C C C C C C R C C
Fuser Gears all required L L L R L L L R L L
Fuser Bearings Upper 2 1710441640 I R
Fuser Bearings Lower 2 1710441640 I R
Thermostat 1 2210441790 I C I R
Thermistor LS 1 9000290105 I C I R
Thermistor RS 1 9000290106 I C I R
Exterior Covers # C C C C C C C C C C

# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate
@ = Clean with vacuum, carefully I = Inspect A = Adjust position Part numbers subject to change without notice
r5 KIP 8000 PM Schedule 2

-Please keep this form with the KIP 8000 ; Please perform PMs as scheduled
-As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned, please denote with an "X" in the
Confirmation box. Please note nomenclature below.
Part / Description Qty Part Number Linear Feet X 1000

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete
Code 880 960 1040 1120 1200 1280 1360 1440 1520 1600
Photoreceptor 1 SUP8000-101 R
Drum Gear 1 7704700190 R
Main Charge Wire 2 SUP8000-104 # C R C C C R C C C R
Grid Screen 1 7705100270 # C C C C C C C C C C
Wire Clean Pad 2 7705120010 R R R
Pre Transfer Lamps 1 # C C C C C C C C C C
Transfer Wire 1 SUP9810-105T # C R C C C R C C C R
Separation Wire 2 SUP9810-105S # C R C C C R C C C R
Developer Space Discs # C C C
Developer Unit 1 7704690070 I R
Developer Rebuild Kit 1 7708060040
LED Head # C C C C C C C C C C
LED Head Pad 1 7706920010 R R R
Paper Compartments @ C C C C C C C C C C
Vacuum (clean) Interior @ C C C C C C C C C C
Ozone Filters 3 6601101740 @ C R C C C R C C C R
Ozone Filters B 4 7701101950 @ C R C C C R C C C R
Knife @ C C C C C C C C C C
Knife Clean / Oil Pad 3504020070 L L L
Fuser Roller 1 7704400390 I R
Pressure Roller 1 2210440011 I R
Upper Fuser Nail Assy 20 C/A C/A C/A C/A C/A R C/A C/A C/A C/A
Lower Fuser Nails 20 7104403290 # C C C C C R C C C C
Fuser Gears all required L L L L L R L L L L
Fuser Bearings Upper 2 1710441640 I R I
Fuser Bearings Lower 2 1710441640 I R I
Thermostat 1 2210441790 C I R I C
Thermistor LS 1 9000290105 C I R I C
Thermistor RS 1 9000290106 C I R I C
Exterior Covers # C C C C C C C C C C

# = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry C = Clean R = Replace L = Lubricate Part numbers subject to change without notice
@ = Clean with vacuum, carefully I = Inspect A = Adjust position
 Chapter 7
Troubleshooting

Page
7.1 Error Codes 7- 1
7.1.1 Door Open Errors 7- 1
7.1.2 Operator Call Errors 7- 2
7.1.3 Service Call Errors 7- 4

7.2 Treatments against Errors 7- 5

7.2.1 Treatments against Door Open Errors 7- 5
7.2.1.1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open 7- 5
7.2.1.2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open 7- 5
7.2.1.3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open 7- 5
7.2.1.4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open 7- 6
7.2.1.5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open 7- 6
7.2.1.6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open 7- 6
7.2.1.7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open 7- 6
7.2.1.8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open 7- 7
7.2.1.9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open 7- 7
7.2.2 Treatments against Operator Call Errors 7- 8
7.2.2.1 “J-01” Paper jam of Roll 1 7- 8
7.2.2.2 “J-02” Paper jam of Roll 2 7- 9
7.2.2.3 “J-03” Paper jam of Roll 3 7-10
7.2.2.4 “J-04” Paper jam of Roll 4 7-11
7.2.2.5 “J-05” Paper jam in Bypass Feeder 7-12
7.2.2.6 “J-11” Paper jam between Cutter and Drum 7-13
7.2.2.7 “J-12” Paper jam at Separation Area 7-14
7.2.2.8 “J-13” Paper jam before Fuser Unit 7-15
7.2.2.9 “J-14” Paper jam after Fuser Unit 7-17
7.2.2.10 Toner Empty 7-18
7.2.2.11 Roll Empty 7-19
7.2.3 Treatments against Service Call Errors 7-20
7.2.3.1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error 7-20
7.2.3.2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error 7-22
7.2.3.3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error 7-23
7.2.3.4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error 7-23
7.2.3.5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error 7-24
7.2.3.6 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error 7-25
7.2.3.7 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error 7-25
7.2.3.8 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error 7-26
7.2.3.9 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error 7-26
7.2.3.10 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error 7-27
7.2.3.11 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error 7-28
7.2.3.12 “E-F0” Folder Error 7-29
7.2.3.13 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error 7-29

7.3 Treatments against Image Defects 7-30

7.3.1 Standard settings of each part relating to image quality 7-30
7.3.2 Treatments against each image defect 7-31
7.3.2.1 Too light halftone 7-31
7.3.2.2 Too light halftone and solid black 7-32
7.3.2.3 Every image is too light 7-34

K77sm7e1 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.4 Uneven density between left and right 7-36
7.3.2.5 Foggy background 7-37
7.3.2.6 Foggy thick black lines from leading edge toward trailing edge 7-37
7.3.2.7 Clear thin black line from leading edge toward trailing edge 7-38
7.3.2.8 White lines from leading edge toward trailing edge 7-39
7.3.2.9 Void of image 7-39
7.3.2.10 Dirt on the backside of print 7-40
7.3.2.11 Poor fusing 7-41
7.3.2.12 Leading margin defect (No leading margin) 7-42
7.3.2.13 Jitter 7-42
7.3.2.14 Lack of sharpness 7-43
7.3.2.15 Uneven density between front and rear 7-43
7.3.2.16 Totally white 7-44
7.3.2.17 Totally black 7-44

K77sm7e1 (Ver. H.0)

7.1 Error Codes
7.1.1 Door Open Errors
The followings are Door Open Errors which can be fixed by the user.

Error Codes Name of error Condition that the error occurs

U-01 Top Roll Deck Open Top Roll Deck is open.
U-02 Middle Roll Deck Open Middle Roll Deck is open.
U-03 Bottom Roll Deck Open Bottom Roll Deck is open.
U-04 Internal Transportation Internal Transportation Unit is open, or it is not locked
Unit Open firmly.
U-06 Toner Cover Open Toner Cover is open.
U-11 Bypass Feeder Open Bypass Feeder is open.
U-12 Right Side Door Open Right Side Door is open.
U-13 Top Rear Cover Open Top Rear Cover is open.
U-14 Exit Cover Open Exit Cover is open.

1
7
2
4
3 5

8
1 : Top Roll Deck
2 : Middle Roll Deck
3 : Bottom Roll Deck
4 : Internal Transportation Unit
5 : Toner Cover
6 : Bypass Feeder
7 : Right Side Door
8 : Top Rear Cover
9 : Exit Cover
9

7-1 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.1.2 Operator Call Errors
The followings are Operator Call Errors which can be fixed by the user.

Error Codes Name of error Condition that the error occurs

J-01 Paper jam of Roll 1 1. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the printer has
started to transport the Roll 1 from the wait position.

2. Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal (RP_SET1) does not change

from L to H within a decided time since the printer has
started to rewind the Roll 1 to the wait position.

J-02 Paper jam of Roll 2 1. Roll Set Sensor 2 Signal (RP_SET2) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the printer has
started to transport the Roll 2 from the wait position.

2. Roll Set Sensor 2 Signal (RP_SET2) does not change

from L to H within a decided time since the printer has
started to rewind the Roll 2 to the wait position.

J-03 Paper jam of Roll 3 1. Roll Set Sensor 3 Signal (RP_SET3) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the printer has
started to transport the Roll 3 from the wait position.

2. Roll Set Sensor 3 Signal (RP_SET3) does not change

from L to H within a decided time since the printer has
started to rewind the Roll 3 to the wait position.

J-04 Paper jam of Roll 4 1. Roll Set Sensor 4 Signal (RP_SET4) does not change
from H to L within a decided time since the printer has
started to transport the Roll 4 from the wait position.

2. Roll Set Sensor 4 Signal (RP_SET4) does not change

from L to H within a decided time since the printer has
started to rewind the Roll 4 to the wait position.

J-05 Paper jam in Bypass Bypass Start Sensor Signal (MPSRT) does not change
Feeder from H to L within a decided time since the printer has
started to transport the cut sheet media from the setting
position.

J-11 Paper jam between 1. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not
Cutter and Drum change from H to L within a decided time since the
printer has started to transport the media from any of
wait positions.
(Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4
and PH20).

2. Leading Edge Sensor Signal (PA_ENT) does not

change from L to H within a decided time since the
Cutter has worked.

7-2 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

Error Codes Name of error Condition that the error occurs
J-12 Paper jam at Separation 1. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) is L at the time
Area you turn on the printer.

2. Separation Sensor Signal (P_SEPR) does not

change from H to L within a decided time since the
printer has started to transport the media from any of
wait positions.
(Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4
and PH20).

J-13 Paper jam before Fuser 1. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) is L at the time you turn
Unit on the printer.

2. Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) does not change from H

to L within a decided time since the printer has started
to transport the media from any of wait positions.
(Wait positions mean any of PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4
and PH20).

J-14 Paper jam after Fuser Exit Sensor Signal (P_EXIT) had changed from H to L
Unit during print, but it does not change from H to L within a
decided time although the Leading Edge Sensor Signal
(PA_ENT) has changed from L to H.

Toner empty The quantity of toner is smaller than the requirement.

LED is lighting : No more print is available.

LED is flashing : Some more print is available.

Roll empty 1. Roll media is not installed in the selected Roll Deck.

2. Selected roll media is emptied in the middle of

printing or when the printer is checking the roll size.

7-3 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.1.3 Service Call Errors
The followings are Service Call Errors which have to be fixed by the service personnel.

Error Codes Name of error Condition that the error occurs

E-01 Fuser Temperature 1. Fusing temperature does not rise up to 120oC within a
Rising Error decided time since you have turned on the printer.

2. Fusing temperature falls down to 70oC after the

printer has been ready.
E-02 Fuser Over-heating Fusing temperature rises over 200oC.
Error
E-05 Drum Motor Error Drum Motor Control Signal (DRMTR) and Drum Motor
Synchronous Signal (DRMTR_LD) do not synchronize
each other for a decided time.
E-06 Counter A/B Error 1. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or
IN_CNT_B) continues to be L for 1 second or longer
when the Counter should count up.
2. Counter Control Signal Feed Back (IN_CNT_A or
IN_CNT_B) continues to be H for 1 second or longer
when the Counter is not counting up.
E-07 Cutter Motor Error 1. Cutter is still at the home position although 0.3
seconds has passed since the Cutter Motor had
started to work.

2. Cutter does not come back to the home position

although 1 second has passed since the Cutter Motor
had started to work.

3. Home position can not be detected within 2 seconds

during cutter cleaning.
E-13 Paper Feed Motor Error Paper Feed Motor Control Signal (PFMTR) and Paper
Feed Motor Synchronous Signal (PFMTR_LD) do not
synchronize each other for a decided time.
E-14 Fuser Motor Error Fuser Motor Control Signal (FUMTR) and Fuser Motor
Synchronous Signal (FUMTR_LD) do not synchronize
each other for a decided time.
E-16 Wire Cleaning Error Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds
has passed since the Wire Cleaning Motor had started to
work.
E-21 Fuser Thermostat Error Thermostat is open-circuited.
E-23 LED Head Cleaning Over-current can not be detected although 90 seconds
Error has passed since the LED Cleaning Motor had started to
work.
E-49 Developer Positioning Home position of Developer Unit can not be detected
Motor Error although 60 seconds has passed since the Developer
Positioning Motor had started to work.
E-F0 Folder Error 1. Communication between printer and Folder is
abnormal.
2. Folder has any error other than jam.
E-Fb Flash ROM Error Writing to the Flash ROM is failed.

7-4 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2 Treatments against Errors
7.2.1 Treatments against Door Open Errors

7.2.1.1 “U-01” Top Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of Top 1 Is the Top Roll Deck closed firmly? No Close the Top Roll Deck firmly.
Roll Deck
Roll Deck Switch 1 2 Is the Roll Deck Switch 1 pressed Yes Replace the switch with the new one.
(DS1) firmly by the actuator when you No Remove the switch, and then install it
close the Top Roll Deck? again properly.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.2 “U-02” Middle Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Middle Roll Deck closed No Close the Middle Roll Deck firmly.
Middle Roll Deck firmly?
Roll Deck Switch 2 2 Is the Roll Deck Switch 2 pressed Yes Replace the switch with the new one.
(DS2) firmly by the actuator when you No Remove the switch, and then install it
close the Middle Roll Deck? again properly.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.3 “U-03” Bottom Roll Deck Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Bottom Roll Deck closed No Close the Bottom Roll Deck firmly.
Bottom Roll Deck firmly?
Roll Deck Switch 3 2 Is the Roll Deck Switch 3 pressed Yes Replace the switch with the new one.
(DS3) firmly by the actuator when you No Remove the switch, and then install it
close the Bottom Roll Deck? again properly.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-5 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.1.4 “U-04” Internal Transportation Unit Open
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Internal Transportation Unit No Close the Internal Transportation Unit
Internal Transportation closed firmly? firmly.
Unit (Confirm the Lever is clicked into place.)
Internal Transportation 2 Is the light of Photo Interrupter No Remove the sensor, and then install it
Unit Sensor (PH24) surely interrupted when you close again properly.
the Internal Transportation Unit? Yes 1. Check whether or not the harness of
sensor has some abnormality as
breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
sensor with the new one.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.5 “U-06” Toner Cover Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Toner Cover closed firmly? No Close the Toner Cover firmly.
Toner Cover
Toner Cover Switch 2 Check the voltage at J202-3 on the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(DS8) DC Controller PCB with the multi- between switch and DC Controller
meter. has some abnormality as breakage of
Is it 5VDC when the cover is open, wire or disconnection of connector.
and also is it 0VDC when the cover 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
is closed? switch with the new one.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.6 “U-11” Bypass Feeder Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Bypass Feeder closed firmly? No Close the Bypass Feeder firmly.
Bypass Feeder
DC Controller PCB 2 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.7 “U-12” Right Side Door Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the Right Side Door closed No Close the Right Side Door firmly.
Right Side Door firmly?
Right Side Door Switch 2 Check the voltage at J202-2 on the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(DS7) DC Controller PCB with the multi- between switch and DC Controller
meter. has some abnormality as breakage of
Is it 5VDC when the door is open, wire or disconnection of connector.
and also is it 0VDC when the door 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
is closed? switch with the new one.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-6 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.1.8 “U-13” Top Rear Cover Open
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of Top 1 Is the Top Rear Cover closed No Close the Top Rear Cover firmly.
Rear Cover firmly?
Top Rear Cover Switch 2 Check the voltage at J202-1 on the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(DS6) DC Controller PCB with the multi- between switch and DC Controller
meter. has some abnormality as breakage of
Is it 5VDC when the cover is open, wire or disconnection of connector.
and also is it 0VDC when the cover 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
is closed? switch with the new one.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.1.9 “U-14” Exit Cover Open

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of Exit 1 Is the Exit Cover closed firmly? No Close the Exit Cover firmly.
Cover
Exit Cover Switch 2 Check the voltage at J204-16 on the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(DS5) DC Controller PCB with the multi- between switch and DC Controller
meter. has some abnormality as breakage of
Is it 5VDC when the cover is open, wire or disconnection of connector.
and also is it 0VDC when the cover 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
is closed? switch with the new one.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-7 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2 Treatments against Operator Call Errors

7.2.2.1 “J-01” Paper jam of Roll 1

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Roll Set Sensor 1 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH1) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “04”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Roll connector.
Set Sensor 1. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Roll Paper Feed 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Clutch 1 (MC1) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch has some abnormality as
Roll Deck 1 Feed Try to operate each of following breakage of wire or disconnection of
Clutch (MC8) clutches. (Parenthesized are Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 (92)
Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch (9C)

Does each of the above clutches

operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Driver PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-8 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.2 “J-02” Paper jam of Roll 2
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Roll Set Sensor 2 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH2) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “05”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Roll connector.
Set Sensor 2. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Roll Paper Feed 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Clutch 2 (MC2) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch has some abnormality as
Try to operate the Roll Paper Feed breakage of wire or disconnection of
Clutch 2. (Parenthesized is Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 (93)

Does the clutch operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Driver PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-9 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.3 “J-03” Paper jam of Roll 3
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Roll Set Sensor 3 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH3) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “06”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Roll connector.
Set Sensor 3. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Roll Paper Feed 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Clutch 3 (MC3) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch has some abnormality as
Try to operate the Roll Paper Feed breakage of wire or disconnection of
Clutch 3. (Parenthesized is Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 (94)

Does the clutch operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Driver PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-10 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.4 “J-04” Paper jam of Roll 4
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Roll Set Sensor 4 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH4) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “07”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Roll connector.
Set Sensor 4. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Roll Paper Feed 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Clutch 4 (MC4) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch has some abnormality as
Try to operate the Roll Paper Feed breakage of wire or disconnection of
Clutch 4. (Parenthesized is Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 (95)

Does the clutch operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Driver PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-11 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.5 “J-05” Paper jam in Bypass Feeder
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Bypass Feed Clutch 1 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(MC7) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch has some abnormality as
Try to operate the Bypass Feed breakage of wire or disconnection of
Clutch. (Parenthesized is Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Bypass Feed Clutch (95)

Does the clutch operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Bypass Feeding Motor 2 Try to operate the Bypass Feeding No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(M10) Motor in the Function Checking of motor has some abnormality as
Mode. breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
Bypass Feeding Motor (3C) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
motor with the new one.
Does the motor operate properly?
Bypass Feeding Roller 3 Try to operate the Bypass Feeding No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Down Solenoid Roller Down Solenoid in the of solenoid has some abnormality as
(SL3) Function Checking Mode. breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
Bypass Feeding Roller Down 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Solenoid (3A) solenoid with the new one.

Does the solenoid operate

properly?
Bypass Start Sensor 4 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH20) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “03”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the connector.
Bypass Start Sensor. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
DC Driver PCB 5 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 6 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-12 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.6 “J-11” Paper jam between Cutter and Drum
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Leading Edge Sensor 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH12) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “EE”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the connector.
Leading Edge Sensor. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Paper Feed Clutch 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(MC6) the Function Checking Mode. of clutch or brake has some
Paper Feed Brake Try to operate the following clutch abnormality as breakage of wire or
(MC9) or brake. (Parenthesized are Signal disconnection of connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch or brake with the new one.
Paper Feed Clutch (91)
Paper Feed Brake (9E)

Does the above clutch or brake

operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Paper Gate Clutch 3 Try to operate the following clutch No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(MC5) or brake in the Function Checking of clutch or brake has some
Paper Gate Brake Mode. abnormality as breakage of wire or
(MC10) disconnection of connector.
Paper Gate Clutch (90) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Paper Gate Brake (9D) clutch or brake with the new one.

Does the above clutch or brake

operate properly?
DC Driver PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 5 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-13 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.7 “J-12” Paper jam at Separation Area
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Separation Sensor 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(PH18) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “2E”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the connector.
Separation Sensor. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Separation Corona 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Clean both Corona Housing and
the Function Checking Mode. Corona Wires, and check the height
Try to operate the Separation of wires.
Corona. (Parenthesized is Signal 2. Replace the Corona Wires with the
Code.) new ones.
3. Replace the High Voltage Power
Separation Corona (A1) Supply PCB (HVP4) with the new
one.
Does the Separation Corona
operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Separation Lamp 3 Try to operate the Separation Lamp No 1. Check whether or not the harness
in the Function Checking Mode. of Separation Lamp has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Separation Lamp (7B) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Separation Lamp operate Separation Lamp with the new one.
properly?
Pre-transfer LED 4 Try to operate the Pre-transfer LED No 1. Check whether or not the harness
in the Function Checking Mode. of Pre-transfer LED has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Pre-transfer LED (A3) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Pre-transfer LED operate Pre-transfer LED with the new one.
properly?
Separation Fan 5 Try to operate the Separation Fan in No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(BL1) the Function Checking Mode. of Separation Fan has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Separation Fan (7D) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Separation Fan operate Separation Fan with the new one.
properly?
Separation Assist 6 Try to operate the Separation Assist No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Blowers Blowers in the Function Checking of each blower has some abnormality
(BL12, BL13, BL14, Mode. as breakage of wire or disconnection
BL15 & BL16) of connector.
Separation Assist Blower 2. If the harness is OK, replace each
(3E : BL12 & BL16) blower with the new one.
(3F : BL13 & BL15)
(99 : BL14)

Do Separation Assist Blowers

operate properly?
DC Driver PCB 7 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 8 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-14 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.8 “J-13” Paper jam before Fuser Unit
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Exit Sensor 1 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(LS2) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “2F”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Exit connector.
Sensor. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Separation Corona 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Clean both Corona Housing and
the Function Checking Mode. Corona Wires, and check the height
Try to operate the Separation of wires.
Corona. (Parenthesized is Signal 2. Replace the Corona Wires with the
Code.) new ones.
3. Replace the High Voltage Power
Separation Corona (A1) Supply PCB (HVP4) with the new
one.
Does the Separation Corona
operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Separation Lamp 3 Try to operate the Separation Lamp No 1. Check whether or not the harness
in the Function Checking Mode. of Separation Lamp has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Separation Lamp (7B) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Separation Lamp operate Separation Lamp with the new one.
properly?
Pre-transfer LED 4 Try to operate the Pre-transfer LED No 1. Check whether or not the harness
in the Function Checking Mode. of Pre-transfer LED has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Pre-transfer LED (A3) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Pre-transfer LED operate Pre-transfer LED with the new one.
properly?
Separation Fan 5 Try to operate the Separation Fan in No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(BL1) the Function Checking Mode. of Separation Fan has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Separation Fan (7D) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Does the Separation Fan operate Separation Fan with the new one.
properly?
Separation Assist 6 Try to operate the Separation Assist No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Blowers Blowers in the Function Checking of each blower has some abnormality
(BL12, BL13, BL14, Mode. as breakage of wire or disconnection
BL15 & BL16) of connector.
Separation Assist Blower 2. If the harness is OK, replace each
(3E : BL12 & BL16) blower with the new one.
(3F : BL13 & BL15)
(99 : BL14)

Do Separation Assist Blowers

operate properly?
Pressure Blowers 7 Try to operate the Pressure Blowers No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(BL4, BL5, BL6 & BL7) in the Function Checking Mode. of the Pressure Blower has some
abnormality as breakage of wire or
Pressure Blowers (6D or 6F) disconnection of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Do Pressure Blowers operate Pressure Blower with the new one.
properly?

7-15 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
DC Driver PCB 8 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 9 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-16 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.9 “J-14” Paper jam after Fuser Unit
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Stripper Finger Ass’y 1 Is the tip of each Stripper Finger Yes Clean the tip of them.
Or Separation Finger Ass’y or Separation Finger dirty?
Exit Sensor 2 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(LS2) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “2F”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
Check the input signal from the Exit connector.
Sensor. 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Is it “L” when the media is on the sensor with the new one.
sensor, and also is it “H” when the
media is not on the sensor?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-17 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.10 Toner Empty
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting condition of 1 Is the opening of Toner Cartridge No Direct it downward.
Toner Cartridge directed downward?
Toner Supply Motor 1 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(M7) the Function Checking Mode. of motor has some abnormality as
Try to operate the Toner Supply breakage of wire or disconnection of
Motor 1. (Parenthesized is Signal connector.
Code.) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
motor with the new one.
Toner Supply Motor 1 (A7)

Does the Toner Supply Motor 1

operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Toner Supply Motor 2 3 Try to operate the Toner Supply No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(M6) Motor 2 in the Function Checking of motor has some abnormality as
Mode. breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
Toner Supply Motor 2 (98) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
motor with the new one.
Does the Toner Supply Motor 2
operate properly?
Toner Supply Clutch 4 Try to operate the Toner Supply No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(MC11) Clutch in the Function Checking of clutch has some abnormality as
Mode. breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
Toner Supply Clutch (79) 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
clutch with the new one.
Does the Toner Supply Clutch
operate properly?
Hopper Toner Sensor 5 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
(TLS1) Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
select the Signal Code “1d”. breakage of wire or disconnection of
connector.
Confirm that the Hopper Toner 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Sensor is under the toner, and then sensor with the new one.
check the input signal from the
Hopper Toner Sensor.
Is “H” (toner exists) indicated?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Developer Toner 6 Select the Signal Code “1C” in the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Sensor Input/Output Checking Mode. of sensor has some abnormality as
(TLS2) breakage of wire or disconnection of
Confirm that the Developer Toner connector.
Sensor is under the toner, and then 2. If the harness is OK, replace the
check the input signal from the sensor with the new one.
Hopper Toner Sensor.
Is “H” (toner exists) indicated?
DC Driver PCB 7 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 8 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-18 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.2.11 Roll Empty
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Rubber belt in the Roll 1 Is the rubber belt on the right of No Install the Roll Spool correctly.
Deck each Roll Deck surely touches the
roller of Roll Spool?
(If it touches surely, it is driven
obeying the rotation of Roll Spool.)
Paper Feed Clock 2 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Check whether or not the harness
Sensors Input/Output Checking Mode, and of sensor has some abnormality as
(PH13, PH14, PH15 & select each of the following Signal breakage of wire or disconnection of
PH16) Code. connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 (08) sensor with the new one.
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 (09)
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 (0A)
Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 (0b)

Then check the input signal from

each sensor.
Is “H” and “L” alternately indicated
when the paper is transported?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-19 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3 Treatments against Service Call Errors

7.2.3.1 “E-01” Fuser Temperature Rising Error

If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-01” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-01” is “00”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR
(SSR1 & SSR2) and Thermistor
(TH1)?
IR Lamps (H1 & H2) 2 Plug out the printer, and then check No Replace the IR Lamps with the new
the resistance of each IR Lamp. ones.
Is there any resistance?
Thermistor 1 (TH1) 3 Enter the Service Mode, select the No 1. Remove the Thermistor 1, clean the
Data Monitoring Mode, and select surface well, and then re-install it
the Data Number “00”. correctly.
2. If the problem can not be fixed by the
Fuser Temperature (00) above 1., replace the Thermistor with
the new one.
Is the indicated temperature almost
same with the setting value of the
following Setting Items in the
Adjustment Mode 0?

4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC)

4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing)
4-12: Fusing temperature (Film)

Please refer to [8.1.3 Data

Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)]
on the page 8-16 as for the detail
of operation.
Interlock 4 Check the voltage between No Check whether or not the interlock
Terminals 0 and 1 on each Relay 2 correctly open and close.
and Relay 3.
Is it 24V?
Temperature Detect 5 Check the voltage at the Terminal 1 No 1. Try to replace the Temperature
PCB (PW7740) on each Relay 2 and Relay 3. Detect PCB.
Is it 0V? 2. If the problem can not be fixed even if
Or Thermistor 2 (TH2) you replace the Temperature Detect
PCB, try to replace the Thermistor 2.
DC Driver PCB 6 Check the voltage of each gray lead No Replace the DC Driver PCB.
(PW7755) wire and orange one on the coil side
of Relay 2.
Is the voltage as follows?

Gray line : 24V

Orange line : 0V
Relay 2 (RY2) 7 Check the voltage between No Replace the Relay 2.
Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp
side of Relay 2.
Is it 230VAC?
Phase Control PCB C 8 Check the voltage at both J253-1 No Replace the Phase Control PCB C.
(PW6125C) and J253-3 on the Phase Control Yes Replace the SSR1
PCB C.
Or SSR (SSR1) Is the voltage of J253-3 0V when
that of J253-1 is 0V?

7-20 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Relay 3 (RY3) 9 Check the voltage between No Replace the Relay 3.
Terminals 4 and 8 on the IR Lamp
side of Relay 3.
Is it 230VAC?
Phase Control PCB C 10 Check the voltage at both J253-2 No Replace the Phase Control PCB C.
(PW6125C) and J253-4 on the Phase Control Yes Replace the SSR2
PCB C.
Or SSR (SSR2) Is the voltage of J253-4 0V when
that of J253-2 is 0V?
DC Controller PCB 11 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-21 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.2 “E-02” Fuser Over-heating Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-02” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-02” is “01”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each IR Lamps (H1 & H2), SSR
(SSR1 & SSR2) and Thermistor
(TH1)?
SSR1 2 Enter the Service Mode, select the Yes Replace the SSR1.
Data Monitoring Mode, and select
the Data Number “00” to check the
fuser temperature.

Fuser Temperature (00)

At the same time, check the voltage

at J253-3 on the Phase Control
PCB C (PW6125C).

Does the temperature gradually rise

up when the J253-3 is 24V?

Please refer to [8.1.3 Data

Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)]
on the page 8-16 as for the detail
of operation.
SSR2 3 Check the fuser temperature in the Yes Replace the SSR2
Data Monitoring Mode.

Fuser Temperature (00)

At the same time, check the voltage

at J253-4 on the Phase Control
PCB C (PW6125C).

Does the temperature gradually rise

up when the J253-4 is 24V?
Thermistor 1 (TH1) 4 Check the fuser temperature in the No Replace the Thermistor 1 with the new
Data Monitoring Mode. one.

Fuser Temperature (00)

Is the indicated temperature almost

same with the setting value of the
following Setting Items in the
Adjustment Mode 0?

4-10: Fusing temperature (PPC)

4-11: Fusing temperature (Tracing)
4-12: Fusing temperature (Film)
Phase Control PCB C 5 1. Check the voltage at both J253-2 No Replace the Phase Control PCB C.
(PW6125C) and J253-4 on the Phase Control
PCB C.
Is the voltage of J253-4 24V
when that of J253-2 is 5V?
2. Check the voltage at both J253-1
and J253-3 on the Phase Control
PCB C.
Is the voltage of J253-3 24V
when that of J253-1 is 5V?
DC Controller PCB 6 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-22 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.3 “E-05” Drum Motor Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-05” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-05” is “04”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each Drum Motor, Drum Motor
Controller PCB and DC Driver
PCB?
Drum Motor (M1) 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace either Drum Motor or Drum
the Function Checking Mode. Motor Controller PCB.
Or Drum Motor Try to operate the Drum Motor.
Controller PCB (Parenthesized is Signal Code.)
(TP1142)
Drum Motor (85)

Does the Drum Motor operate

properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.3.4 “E-06” Counter A/B Error

If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-06” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-06” is “08 (Counter A)” or “09 (Counter B)”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Are the harnesses correctly No Connect the harnesses correctly.
connected among Counter A,
Counter B and DC Controller PCB?
Counter A 2 Check the voltage at J209-4 on the Yes Replace the Counter A.
DC Controller PCB while printing.
Does it momently change from 24V
to 0V every about 1m print out?
Counter B 3 Check the voltage at J209-3 on the Yes Replace the Counter B.
DC Controller PCB while printing.
Does it momently change from 24V
to 0V every about 1m print out?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-23 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.5 “E-07” Cutter Motor Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-07” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-07” is “07”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each Cutter Motor, Cutter Motor
Controller PCB, Cutter Home
Position Sensor and DC Driver
PCB?
Cutter Home Position 2 Enter the Service Mode, select the No Replace the Cutter Home Position
Sensor Input/Output Checking Mode, and Sensor.
(PH22) select the Signal Code “43”.

Check the input signal from the

Cutter Home Position Sensor while
taking Test Print or Initial Cut.

Does the status momently change

From “L” to “H” when the Cutter
operates?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
Cutter Motor (M3) 3 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace either Cutter Motor or Cutter
the Function Checking Mode. Motor Controller PCB.
Or Cutter Motor Try to operate the Cutter Motor.
Controller PCB (Parenthesized is Signal Code.)
(PW7756)
Cutter Motor (69)

Does the Cutter Motor operate

properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Cutter Oil Supply 4 Try to operate the Cutter Oil Supply No Replace the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid.
Solenoid (SL2) Solenoid in the Function Checking
Mode.

Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid (9F)

Does the Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid

operate properly?
Oil Pad 5 Is the Oil Pad of Cutter Unit No Supply the Oil Pad with oil.
impregnated with enough oil?

DC Controller PCB 6 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK

(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-24 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.6 “E-13” Paper Feed Motor Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-13” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-13” is “03”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each Paper Feed Motor, Paper
Feed Motor Controller PCB and DC
Driver PCB?
Paper Feed Motor (M2) 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace either Paper Feed Motor or
the Function Checking Mode. Paper Feed Motor Controller PCB.
Or Paper Feed Motor Try to operate the Paper Feed
Controller PCB Motor. (Parenthesized is Signal
(TP0362) Code.)

Paper Feed Motor (84)

Does the Paper Feed Motor operate

properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.3.7 “E-14” Fuser Motor Error

If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-14” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-14” is “05”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each Fuser Motor, Fuser Motor
Controller PCB and DC Driver
PCB?
Fuser Motor (M5) 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace either Fuser Motor or Fuser
the Function Checking Mode. Motor Controller PCB.
Or Fuser Motor Try to operate the Fuser Motor.
Controller PCB (Parenthesized is Signal Code.)
(TP0362)
Fuser Motor (87)

Does the Fuser Motor operate

properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Controller PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-25 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.8 “E-16” Wire Cleaning Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-16” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-16” is “0A”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
between Wire Cleaning Motor, and
DC Driver PCB?
Wire Cleaning Motor 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace the Wire Cleaning Motor.
(M9) the Function Checking Mode.
Try to operate the Wire Cleaning
Motor. (Parenthesized is Signal
Code.)

Wire Cleaning Motor (6C)

Does the Wire Cleaning Motor

operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Screw Shaft of Image 3 Is the Screw Shaft of Image Corona Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.
Corona dirty or transformed?
(In these cases an over load is
detected.)
DC Driver PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 5 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7.2.3.9 “E-21” Fuser Thermostat Error

If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-21” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-21” is “02”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to each Thermostat, AC Circuit
Board B and DC Controller PCB?
Thermostat 2 Is the Thermostat open circuited? Yes Replace the Thermostat.
AC Circuit Board B 3 Is the voltage at J107-1 on the AC No Replace the AC Circuit Board B.
(PW4210) Circuit Board B 24V?
And is the voltage at J106-7 on the
AC Circuit Board 0V?
DC Controller PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-26 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.10 “E-23” LED Head Cleaning Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-23” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-23” is “0b”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
between LED Cleaning Motor and
DC Driver PCB?
LED Cleaning Motor 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace the LED Cleaning Motor.
(M8) the Function Checking Mode.
Try to operate the LED Cleaning
Motor. (Parenthesized is Signal
Code.)

LED Cleaning Motor (83)

Does the LED Cleaning Motor

operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
Screw Shaft of LED 3 Is the Screw Shaft of LED Head Yes Clean or replace the Screw Shaft.
Head dirty or transformed?
(In these cases an over load is
detected.)
DC Driver PCB 4 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
DC Controller PCB 5 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-27 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.11 “E-49” Developer Positioning Motor Error
If you would like to make the printer ignore “E-49” because you will operate the printer to find the cause
of error, mask it in the Error Check Masking Mode.
The Mask Code for “E-49” is “06”.
Please refer to [8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)] on the page 8-108 as for the detail
of operation.

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment

Harness 1 Is the harness correctly connected No Connect the harness correctly.
to the Developer Positioning Motor?
Developer Positioning 2 Enter the Service Mode and select No Replace the Developer Positioning
Motor (M4) the Function Checking Mode. Motor.
Try to operate the Developer Yes Remove each Developer Unit Position
Positioning Motor. (Parenthesized is Sensor, Sensor Disc and Cam, and then
Signal Code.) re-install them correctly.

Developer Positioning Motor (68)

Does the Developer Positioning

Motor operate properly?

Please refer to [8.1.4 Function

Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)] on
the page 8-29 as for the detail of
operation.
DC Driver PCB 3 Try to replace the DC Driver PCB. Yes OK
(PW7755) Is the problem fixed?
Developer Unit Position 4 Enter the Service Mode, select the No Replace the Developer Unit Position
Sensor (PH25) Input/Output Checking Mode, and Sensor.
select the Signal Code “2b”.

Is the status “L” when the Developer

Unit is at the Home Position?
And is it “H” when the unit is not at
the Home Position?

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input /

Output Checking Mode (Sub
Mode 1)] on the page 8-6 as for
the detail of operation.
DC Controller PCB 5 Try to replace the DC Controller Yes OK
(PW7720) PCB.
Is the problem fixed?

7-28 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.2.3.12 “E-F0” Folder Error
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Communication error 1 Is any error message indicated on No This is a communication error.
the Operation Panel of Folder? 1. Turn off both printer and folder, and
then turn them on.
2. Check the cables.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Error of Folder 2 Is any error message indicated on Yes This is an error of Folder.
the Operation Panel of Folder? Turn off / on the Folder.
If the error is not fixed, ask the service
for the Folder.

7.2.3.13 “E-Fb” Flash ROM Error

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Defect of Flash ROM 1 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK.
replace the Flash ROM?

7-29 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3 Treatments against Image Defects
7.3.1 Standard settings of each part relating to image
quality
The following list shows standard values of voltage and current supplied to each unit that is related with
image creation.
When an image defect occurs, check whether or not the following standard values are satisfied on each
unit.
As for the way of check or adjustment, please refer to the reference page written in the list.

Item Standard Reference

page
Voltage for Grid -780 +/-20V 4-46
Plate
Current for Image -2.0 +/-0.05mA 4-35
Corona Wire

Current for Transfer 1.4 +/-0.02mA 10.2mm 4-37

Corona

DC Component for -250 +/-3V : Plain paper 4-40

15.0mm
Separation Corona -300 +/-3V : Tracing
-10 +/-3V : Film 14.0mm

Developer Bias Development Roller -250 +/-3V against Ground 4-51

(Negative Bias) Toner Supply Roller -500 +/-3V against 4-54
Development Roller voltage
Regulation Roller (Center) -100 +/-3V against 4-57
Development Roller voltage
Regulation Roller (Both sides) +365 +/-3V against 4-60
Development Roller voltage

7-30 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2 Treatments against each image defect
7.3.2.1 Too light halftone
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Dirt on LED Head 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Clean the LED Head pressing the
[EXP CLEAN] Key.
2. Check the Pad Ass’y 2 of the LED
Head.
Is it clean or is its life ended?
Printing media 2 Can you fix the problem if you use Yes Advise the user to keep the media
the media that is newly unpacked? avoiding the humidity.
Can you fix the problem if you use Yes Explain to the user that the best image
the media that satisfies the quality may not be performed if the
specification of KIP? media is out of KIP specification.
Image Corona 3 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Corona
Housing and Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire
and Grid Plate.
Is the Corona Wire surely fitted into No The height of Corona Wire is not correct.
the V shape groove of Corona Correct it properly.
Heads?
Or is the Corona Wire correctly
caught between cleaning pads?(
Is the current supplied from the No Adjust the current making reference to
HVP1 to the Image Corona satisfies [4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
-2.0 +/-0.05mA? (For Image Corona)] on the page 4-35.
Grid voltage 4 Is the voltage supplied from the No Adjust the voltage making reference to
HVP6 to the Grid Plate satisfies [4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of HVP6
-780 +/-20V? (For Grid Plate of Image Corona)] on the
page 4-46.
Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp lights No 1. Check whether or not the harness
correctly? of Eraser Lamp has some abnormality
as breakage of wire or disconnection
of connector.
2. If the harness is OK, replace the
Eraser Lamp with the new one.
Transfer / Separation 6 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and Corona
Corona dirty? Housing.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire.
Is the current supplied from the No Adjust the current making reference to
HVP3 to the Transfer Corona [4.3.3 Checking & Adjustment of HVP3
satisfies -1.4 +/-0.02mA? (For Transfer Corona)] on the page 4-37.
Contact of Bias Pins 7 Are the Bias Pins on the Side Plate No 1. Correct the installation of Bias Pins so
and Bias Plate surely contacted to the Bias Plate of that they should touch the Bias Plate.
the Developer Unit? 2. Provide both the Bias Pins and Bias
And are Bias Pins and Bias Plate Plate with conductive grease.
provided with enough conductive
grease?
Position of Developer 8 Are the Pushing Cams staying at No Check both the Developer Positioning
Unit against Drum the correct position to press the Motor and pushing mechanism.
Developer Unit to the Drum?
Developer Unit 9 Is the Development Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and find
with the toner evenly? the cause.
Bias Power Supply 10 Are the output voltages from the No Adjust the each output properly making
Bias Power Supply satisfy the reference to the following pages.
following conditions?
Development Roller : Page 4-51
Development Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-54
Toner Supply Roller : -500 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-57
Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-60
Reg. Roller Both sides : +365 +/-3V
DC Controller PCB 11 Was it impossible to change the Yes Replace the DC Controller PCB.
(PW7720) output voltages from Bias Power
Supply at the above 10.?
(Were the output voltages constant
even if you rotated the volumes?)
Drum 12 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the Drum?

7-31 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.2 Too light halftone and solid black
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
1 Turn off the printer in the Yes This light image seems to be
middle of print, draw out the caused by the defect of
Process Unit, and then check transfer.
the toner image on the Drum. Go to the following 2.
Is the toner image normal No This light image seems to be
between Developer Unit and caused by the defect of
Transfer Corona? development.
Go to the following 9.
Transfer Printing media 2 Can you fix the problem if you Yes Advise the user to keep the
Defect use the media that is newly media avoiding the humidity.
unpacked?
3 Can you fix the problem if you Yes Explain to the user that the
use the media that satisfies the best image quality may not be
specification of KIP? performed if the media is out
of KIP specification.
Transfer / 4 Is the Transfer / Separation No Install it properly.
Separation Corona properly installed?
Corona 5 Is the Transfer Corona Yes Clean the whole Transfer
leaking? Corona.
If too dirty, replace the
Corona Wire.
High Voltage 6 Is the resistance of High No Replace the High Voltage
Lead Line Voltage Lead Line between Lead Line as it is broken.
HVP3 and Transfer Corona
about 10 ohms?
HVP3 7 Is the current supplied from the No Adjust the current making
HVP3 to the Transfer Corona reference to [4.3.3 Checking
satisfies -1.4 +/-0.02mA? & Adjustment of HVP3 (For
Transfer Corona)] on the
page 4-37.
DC Controller 8 Was it impossible to change Yes Replace the DC Controller
PCB (PW7720) the output current from HVP3 PCB.
at the above 7.?
(Was the output current
constant even if you rotated
the volumes?)
Development Contact of Bias 9 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Correct the installation of
defect Pins and Bias Plate surely contacted to the Bias Pins so that they
Plate Bias Plate of the Developer should touch the Bias
Unit? Plate.
And are Bias Pins and Bias 2. Provide both the Bias Pins
Plate provided with enough and Bias Plate with
conductive grease? conductive grease.
Developer Unit 10 Is the Development Roller No Disassemble the Developer
covered with the toner evenly? Unit and find the cause.
11 Are the Counter Rollers at both No Install the Developer Unit
sides of Developer Unit correctly.
contacted to the correct
positions at both sides of
Drum?
Position of 12 Are the Pushing Cams staying No Check both the Developer
Developer Unit at the correct position to press Positioning Motor and
against Drum the Developer Unit to the pushing mechanism.
Drum?
Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the No 1. Check whether or not the
Developer Unit? harness of Toner Sensor
has some abnormality as
breakage of wire or
disconnection of
connector.
2. If the harness is OK,
replace the Toner Sensor
with the new one.

7-32 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Development Bias Power 14 Are the output voltages from No Adjust the each output
defect Supply the Bias Power Supply satisfy properly making reference to
the following conditions? the following pages.

Development Roller Development Roller

: -250 +/-3V : Page 4-51
Toner Supply Roller Toner Supply Roller
: -500 +/-3V : Page 4-54
Reg. Roller Center Reg. Roller Center
: -100 +/-3V : Page 4-57
Reg. Roller Both sides Reg. Roller Both sides
: +365 +/-3V : Page 4-60
DC Controller 15 Was it impossible to change Yes Replace the DC Controller
PCB (PW7720) the output voltages from Bias PCB.
Power Supply at the above
14.?
(Were the output voltages
constant even if you rotated
the volumes?)
Drum 16 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the Drum?

7-33 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.3 Every image is too light
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
1 Turn off the printer in the Yes This light image seems to be
middle of print, draw out the caused by the defect of
Process Unit, and then check transfer.
the toner image on the Drum. Go to the following 2.
Is the toner image normal No This light image seems to be
between Developer Unit and caused by the defect of
Transfer Corona? development.
Go to the following 9.
Transfer Printing media 2 Can you fix the problem if you Yes Advise the user to keep the
Defect use the media that is newly media avoiding the humidity.
unpacked?
3 Can you fix the problem if you Yes Explain to the user that the
use the media that satisfies the best image quality may not be
specification of KIP? performed if the media is out
of KIP specification.
Transfer / 4 Is the Transfer / Separation No Install it properly.
Separation Corona properly installed?
Corona 5 Is the Transfer Corona Yes Clean the whole Transfer
leaking? Corona.
If too dirty, replace the
Corona Wire.
High Voltage 6 Is the resistance of High No Replace the High Voltage
Lead Line Voltage Lead Line between Lead Line as it is broken.
HVP3 and Transfer Corona
about 10 ohms?
HVP3 7 Is the current supplied from the No Adjust the current making
HVP3 to the Transfer Corona reference to [4.3.3 Checking
satisfies -1.4 +/-0.02mA? & Adjustment of HVP3 (For
Transfer Corona)] on the
page 4-37.
DC Controller 8 Was it impossible to change Yes Replace the DC Controller
PCB (PW7720) the output current from HVP3 PCB.
at the above 7.?
(Was the output current
constant even if you rotated
the volumes?)
Development Contact of Bias 9 Are the Bias Pins on the Side No 1. Correct the installation of
defect Pins and Bias Plate surely contacted to the Bias Pins so that they
Plate Bias Plate of the Developer should touch the Bias
Unit? Plate.
And are Bias Pins and Bias 2. Provide both the Bias Pins
Plate provided with enough and Bias Plate with
conductive grease? conductive grease.
Developer Unit 10 Is the Development Roller No Disassemble the Developer
covered with the toner evenly? Unit and find the cause.
11 Are the Counter Rollers at both No Install the Developer Unit
sides of Developer Unit correctly.
contacted to the correct
positions at both sides of
Drum?
Position of 12 Are the Pushing Cams staying No Check both the Developer
Developer Unit at the correct position to press Positioning Motor and
against Drum the Developer Unit to the pushing mechanism.
Drum?
Toner Sensor 13 Is there enough toner in the No 1. Check whether or not the
Developer Unit? harness of Toner Sensor
has some abnormality as
breakage of wire or
disconnection of
connector.
2. If the harness is OK,
replace the Toner Sensor
with the new one.

7-34 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Development Bias Power 14 Are the output voltages from No Adjust the each output
defect Supply the Bias Power Supply satisfy properly making reference to
the following conditions? the following pages.

Development Roller Development Roller

: -250 +/-3V : Page 4-51
Toner Supply Roller Toner Supply Roller
: -500 +/-3V : Page 4-54
Reg. Roller Center Reg. Roller Center
: -100 +/-3V : Page 4-57
Reg. Roller Both sides Reg. Roller Both sides
: +365 +/-3V : Page 4-60
DC Controller 15 Was it impossible to change Yes Replace the DC Controller
PCB (PW7720) the output voltages from Bias PCB.
Power Supply at the above
14.?
(Were the output voltages
constant even if you rotated
the volumes?)
Drum 16 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the Drum?

7-35 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.4 Uneven density between left and right
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Corona
Housing and Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire
and Grid Plate.
2 Is the Corona Wire surely fitted into No The height of Corona Wire is not correct.
the V shape groove of Corona Correct it properly.
Heads?
Or is the Corona Wire correctly
caught between cleaning pads?(
Developer Unit 3 Are the Counter Rollers at both No Install the Developer Unit correctly.
sides of Developer Unit contacted to
the correct positions at both sides of
Drum?
4 Is the Development Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and find
with the toner evenly? the cause.
5 Is the toner evenly accumulating in No Check whether or not the printer is
the Developer Unit? installed evenly.
Dirt of LED Head 6 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Clean the LED Head pressing the
[EXP CLEAN] Key.
2. Check the Pad Ass’y 2 of the LED
Head.
Is it clean or is its life ended?
Eraser Lamp 7 Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp No Replace the Eraser Lamp.
light?
DC Controller PCB 8 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
(PW7720) replace the DC Controller PCB?
LED Head 9 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the LED Head?

7-36 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.5 Foggy background
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Developer Unit 1 Is there any foreign substance on Yes Remove the foreign substance.
the shaft of Development Roller, or
on the Bias Pins and Bias Plate?
(If this foreign substance also
touches the ground, Bias will
escape to the ground.)
2 Is there more (or less) toner than Yes Check whether or not the Toner Sensor
required around the Agitator in the has some abnormality.
Developer Unit?
Image Corona 3 Try to print out the Test Pattern 4 Yes 1. Adjust the voltage supplied from
(White print). HVP6 to Grid Plate making reference
Does this print also have the foggy to [4.3.6 Checking & Adjustment of
background? HVP6 (For Grid Plate of Image
Corona)] on the page 4-46.
2. Adjust the current supplied from
HVP1 to Image Corona making
reference to [4.3.2 Checking &
Adjustment of HVP1 (For Image
Corona)] on the page 4-35.
Developer Bias 4 Are the output voltages from the No Adjust the each output properly making
Bias Power Supply satisfy the reference to the following pages.
following conditions?
Development Roller : Page 4-51
Development Roller : -250 +/-3V Toner Supply Roller : Page 4-54
Toner Supply Roller : -500 +/-3V Reg. Roller Center : Page 4-57
Reg. Roller Center : -100 +/-3V Reg. Roller Both sides : Page 4-60
Reg. Roller Both sides : +365 +/-3V
DC Controller PCB 5 Was it impossible to change the Yes Replace the DC Controller PCB.
(PW7720) output from HVP1 or HVP6 at the
above 3 or 4?
(Were the outputs constant even if
you rotated the volumes?)
LED Head 6 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the LED Head?

7.3.2.6 Foggy thick black lines from leading edge toward trailing edge
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Corona
Housing and Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire
and Grid Plate.
2 Is the Cleaning Pad staying at the No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor.
home position? 2. Check the cleaning mechanism.
(Home position is the end on Wire
Cleaning Motor side.)
3 Is the wire cleaning operation No 1. Check the Wire Cleaning Motor.
completed for about 90 seconds? 2. Check the cleaning mechanism.
3. Replace the DC Driver PCB
(PW7755).
Developer Unit 4 Is the Development Roller covered No Disassemble the Developer Unit and find
with the toner evenly? the cause.

7-37 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.7 Clear thin black line from leading edge toward trailing edge
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on Yes Remove it.
the Grid Plate, which touches the
Drum also.
2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Corona
Housing and Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire
and Grid Plate.
Existence of foreign 3 Is there any foreign substance on Yes Remove the foreign substance.
substance any part like Corona or LED Head
that is very close to the Drum?
And does this foreign substance
also touché the Drum?
Drum 4 Can you find any black line or any Yes 1. In case of black line, remove it with
scratch mark on the Drum, which the dry cloth or attached Drum
runs to the rounding direction and Cleaning Blade.
coincides with the line on the print. 2. In case of the scratch mark, replace
the Drum.
But please find the cause of scratch
mark before installing the new Drum.
Please check such part as Stripper
Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide and
so on as some foreign substance may
exist.

NOTE
When you wipe the Drum with the cloth be careful of the direction to move the cloth.

OK OK No good

7-38 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.8 White lines from leading edge toward trailing edge
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on Yes Remove it.
the Grid Plate, which touches the
Drum also.
Dirt of LED Head 2 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Clean the LED Head pressing the
[EXP CLEAN] Key.
2. Check the Pad Ass’y 2 of the LED
Head.
Is it clean or is its life ended?
Transfer / Separation 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and Corona
Corona dirty? Housing.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire.
Entrance of Fuser Unit 4 Is there any foreign substance Yes Remove the foreign substance.
around the entrance of Fuser Unit,
which touches the upper side of
print media?
Drum 5 Can you find any scratch mark on Yes Replace the Drum.
the Drum, which runs to the But please find the cause of scratch
rounding direction and coincides mark before installing the new Drum.
with the line on the print. Please check such part as Stripper
Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide and so
on as some foreign substance may exist.
LED Head 6 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the LED Head?

7.3.2.9 Void of image

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Printing media 1 Can you fix the problem if you use Yes Advise the user to keep the media
the media that is newly unpacked? avoiding the humidity.
Developer Unit 2 Does the void of image appear on Yes The surface of Development Roller may
the print repeatedly from leading get dirt or be damaged.
edge to trailing edge keeping a
constant interval? 1. In case of dirt, wipe it off with the dry
Is the interval 173mm? cloth.
2. In case of damage, replace the
Development Roller.
3 Does the void of image appear on Yes Check the quantity of toner in the
the print not keeping a constant Developer Unit.
interval? If it is too small, check the Toner Sensor.
Drum 4 Does the void of image appear on Yes The surface of Drum may get dirt or be
the print repeatedly from leading damaged.
edge to trailing edge keeping a
constant interval? 1. In case of dirt, wipe it off with the dry
Is the interval 565mm? cloth.
2. In case of the damage, replace the
Drum.
But please find the cause of damage
before installing the new Drum.
Please check such part as Stripper
Finger, Corona, Transfer Guide and
so on as some foreign substance may
exist.

NOTE
When you wipe the Drum with the cloth be careful of the direction to move the cloth.
Please read NOTE on the page 7-37.

7-39 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.10 Dirt on the backside of print
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Toner Receiver of 1 Is the Toner Receiver under the Yes Remove the toner from the Toner
Developer Unit Development Roller fully filled with Receiver.
the toner? As the toner might spill into the machine,
check the inside of machine also.
Transfer Guide Plate 2 Is the Transfer Guide Plate dirty? Yes Clean the Transfer Guide.
Also, check whether or not the gap
between Drum and Transfer Guide Plate
is proper making reference to [5.13.15
Adjustment of gap between Drum &
Transfer Guide Plate] on the page 5-233.
Roll Deck or Bypass 3 Is there any dirt on the Roll Decks Yes Wipe off the dirt.
Feeder or Bypass Feeder, which might Also, find the cause of dirt.
cause the dirt on the backside?
Fuser 4 Is the Guide Plate at the entrance of Yes Wipe off the dirt.
Fuser dirty?
5 Is the melted toner sticking around Yes Remove the melted toner.
the exit part (Fuser Roller, Pressure
Roller, Stripper Fingers and so on)?

7-40 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.11 Poor fusing
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Printing media 1 Are the selected type of media on No Select the correct type of media on the
the Media Selector and the type of Media Selector.
media actually installed same with
each other?
2 Can you fix the problem if you use Yes Advise the user to keep the media
the media that is newly unpacked? avoiding the humidity.
3 Can you fix the problem if you use Yes Explain to the user that the best image
the media that satisfies the quality may not be performed if the
specification of KIP? media is out of KIP specification.
Fuser 4 Turn on the printer, then enter the No Find the cause of problem making
Service Mode, select the Data reference to [7.2.3.1 “E-01” Fuser
Monitoring Mode, and select the Temperature Rising Error] on the page
Data Number “00”. 7-20.

Fuser Temperature (00)

Does the temperature rise up

normally during warm up?

Please refer to [8.1.3 Data

Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)]
on the page 8-16 as for the detail
of operation.
5 Enter the Service Mode, select the Yes Change the setting value properly.
Adjustment Mode 0, and then select
each of the following Item Numbers.

10: Fusing temperature (PPC)

11: Fusing temperature (Tracing)
12: Fusing temperature (Film)

Is the setting value too low?

Please refer to [8.1.5 Adjustment

Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)] on the
page 8-33 as for the detail of
operation.
6 Is the pressure of Pressure Roller No Adjust the pressure properly.
proper?

NOTE
You can adjust the fusing pressure by adjusting the gap between Spring Hook 1 (1) and
Spring Hook 2 (2).
It is 2.5mm in usual case.
The width of “Nip” is 8 to 9mm at the center and 10 to 11mm at both sides (10mm from
side edges of A0 or 36” paper).

10mm 10mm
2.5mm

2 10 to 11mm 8 to 9mm 10 to 11mm

7-41 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.12 Leading margin defect (No leading margin)
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Setting value of leading 1 Enter the Service Mode, select each No Change the setting value properly.
margin Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode
No.4) and Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub
Mode No.5), and then select each
of the following Item Numbers.

4-bb : Image placement (For

2nd and later copies
during multi-print)
5-00 to 0b : Image placement for
cut sheet media
5-0C to 17: Image placement for
Roll 1
5-18 to 23 : Image placement for
Roll 2
5-24 to 2F : Image placement for
Roll 3
5-30 to 3b : Image placement for
Roll 4

Is the proper setting value specified

in each Item Number?

Please refer to [8.1.5 Adjustment

Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)] on the
page 8-33 as for the detail of
operation.
Feeding rollers in the 2 Is the surface of feeding rollers Yes Replace the feeding rollers.
Roll Deck worn away as a result of long term
use?
Paper Gate Clutch 3 Is the Paper Gate Clutch slipping? Yes Replace the Paper Gate Clutch.
(MC5)

7.3.2.13 Jitter
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Drum and Drum Driving 1 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes 1. Check whether or not there exists any
Part repeatedly from leading edge to foreign substance between 178T
trailing edge keeping a constant Gear and 72T Pulley which drive the
interval? Drum.
Is the interval about 565mm? 2. Check whether not there exists any
foreign substance between Counter
Rollers of Developer Unit and side
ends of Drum.
Development Roller 2 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes The surface of Development Roller may
repeatedly from leading edge to get dirt or be damaged.
trailing edge keeping a constant
interval? 1. In case of dirt, wipe it off with the dry
Is the interval about 173mm? cloth.
2. In case of damage, replace the
Development Roller.
Developer Unit 3 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check whether or not the 30T Gear of
repeatedly from leading edge to Developer Unit is damaged.
trailing edge keeping a constant And also check whether or not there
interval? exists any foreign substance on the 30T
Is the interval about 6mm? gear.
Drum Motor (M1) 4 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the Drum Motor?

7-42 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.14 Lack of sharpness
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Dirt of LED Head 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes 1. Clean the LED Head pressing the
[EXP CLEAN] Key.
2. Check the Pad Ass’y 2 of the LED
Head.
Is it clean or is its life ended?
Installation of LED 2 Is the gap between LED Head and No Adjust the gap properly.
Head Drum proper?
(The gap will not be proper if the
Positioning Pins of the LED Head
are bent.)
Transfer / Separation 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and Corona
Corona dirty? Housing.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire.

7.3.2.15 Uneven density between front and rear

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Dirt of Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire, Corona
Housing and Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire
and Grid Plate.
Transfer / Separation 2 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Wire and Corona
Corona dirty? Housing.
If too dirty, replace each Corona Wire.
LED Head 3 Is the LED Head firmly fixed with No Fix the LED Head firmly.
the screws?
4 Does the uneven density appear on Yes Replace the LED Head.
the print repeatedly from leading
edge to trailing edge keeping a
constant interval?
Is the interval about 6mm?

7-43 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

7.3.2.16 Totally white
Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Position of Developer 1 Are the Pushing Cams staying at No Check both the Developer Positioning
Unit against Drum the correct position to press the Motor and pushing mechanism.
Developer Unit to the Drum?
Contact of Bias Pins 2 Are the Bias Pins on the Side Plate No 1. Correct the installation of
and Bias Plate surely contacted to the Bias Plate of Bias Pins so that they
the Developer Unit? should touch the Bias
And are Bias Pins and Bias Plate Plate.
provided with enough conductive 2. Provide both the Bias Pins
grease? and Bias Plate with
conductive grease.
Connector of LED 3 Is any connector of LED Head Yes Connect the connector.
Head disconnected?
Transfer / Separation 4 Is the Corona Wire of Transfer Yes Replace the Corona Wire.
Corona Corona broken?
5 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona No Install the Transfer / Separation Corona
Unit properly installed? Unit properly.
6 Is the Transfer Corona leaking? Yes Clean the whole Transfer Corona.
If too dirty, replace the Corona Wire.
High Voltage Lead Line 7 Is the High Voltage Lead Line No Connect the High Voltage Lead Line
connected between HVP3 and properly.
Transfer Corona properly?
8 Is the resistance of High Voltage No Replace the High Voltage Lead Line as it
Lead Line between HVP3 and is broken.
Transfer Corona
about 10 ohms?
DC Controller PCB 9 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
(PW7720) replace the DC Controller PCB?
LED Head 10 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
replace the LED Head?

7.3.2.17 Totally black

Cause Order Checking matter Result Treatment
Image Corona 1 Is the Corona Wire of Image Corona Yes 1. Replace the Corona Wire.
broken? 2. Check whether or not the Tension
Or is the tension of Corona Wire too Springs in the Corona Block are
weak? transformed.
(If the tension is weak, the Corona
Wire may be extended.)
2 Is the Grid Plate dirty? Yes Clean the Grid Plate.
If too dirty, replace it.
3 Is the Grid Plate installed properly? No Install the Grid Plate properly.
HVP1 4 Is the current supplied from the No Adjust the current making reference to
HVP1 to the Image Corona satisfies [4.3.2 Checking & Adjustment of HVP1
-2.0 +/-0.05mA? (For Image Corona)] on the page 4-35.
DC Controller PCB 5 Can you fix the problem if you Yes OK
(PW7720) replace the DC Controller PCB?

7-44 K77sm7e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 8
Service Mode & User Mode

Page
8.1 Service Mode 8- 1
8.1.1 General Operation 8- 1
8.1.1.1 Entering the Service Mode 8- 1
8.1.1.2 Selecting each Sub Mode in the Service Mode 8- 4
8.1.1.3 Canceling the Service Mode 8- 5

8.1.2 Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1) 8- 6

8.1.2.1 Function 8- 6
8.1.2.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8- 6
8.1.2.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8- 7
8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List 8- 8

8.1.3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2) 8-16

8.1.3.1 Function 8-16
8.1.3.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-16
8.1.3.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-17
8.1.3.4 Meaning of each Data 8-19
(1) Fuser Temperature (00) 8-19
(2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04) 8-20
(3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05) 8-23
(4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09) 8-25
(5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A) 8-25
(6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b) 8-25
(7) Drum Surface Potential (0C) 8-26
(8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d) 8-26
(9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E) 8-26
(10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12) 8-27

8.1.4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3) 8-29

8.1.4.1 Function 8-29
8.1.4.2 Indication on the Operation Panel 8-30
8.1.4.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-31

8.1.5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4) 8-33

8.1.5.1 Function 8-33
8.1.5.2 Indication on the Operation Panel 8-33
8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-34
8.1.5.4 Setting item list 8-37
8.1.5.5 Explanation for each setting item 8-43
(1) Metric or Inch (Item No.00) 8-43
(2) Operation of Interface (Item No.01) 8-43
(3) Maximum cut length (Item No.02) 8-44
(4) Trailing margin for long print (Item No.03) 8-44
(5) Special Paper Size Setting (Item No.04) 8-45
(6) Counting unit of Counter A (Item No.05) 8-46
(7) Counting unit of Counter B (Item No.06) 8-46
(8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (Item No.07) 8-47
(9) Cut length of Test Print (Item No.08) 8-47
(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes
(Items No.09, 0A & 0b) 8-48

(1) K77sm8e1 (Ver. H.0)

 (11) Fusing temperature (Items No.10, 11 & 12) 8-54
(12) LED strobe time for Main Pixel (Item No.13) 8-55
(13) LED strobe time for Supplemental Pixel (Item No.14) 8-55
(14) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (Item No.15) 8-57
(15) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (Item No.16) 8-58
(16) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (Item No.17) 8-58
(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (Item No.18) 8-59
(18) Developer Bias (Item No.19) 8-60
(19) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Image Corona) (Item No.1A) 8-61
(20) Intensity of current on the Grid Plate (Image Corona) (Item No.1b) 8-61
(21) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Transfer Corona)
(Item No.1C, 1d & 1E) 8-62
(22) DC component (Separation Corona) (Item No.1F, 20 & 21) 8-62
(23) Paper Feed Motor Speed (Item No.22, 23, 24, 25 & 26) 8-63
(24) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (Items from No.27 to 32) 8-64
(25) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (Items from No.33 to 54) 8-65
(26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 2) (Items from No.55 to 76) 8-66
(27) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 3) (Items from No.77 to 98) 8-67
(28) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (Items from No.99 to bA) 8-68
(29) Image placement (For 2nd and later copies during multi-print)
(Item No.bb) 8-69
(30) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (Item No.bC) 8-69
(31) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing (Item No.bd) 8-70
(32) Paper Gata Brake (MC10) ON timing (Item No.bE) 8-71
(33) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Items No. bF, C0 & C1) 8-72
(34) Trailing Margin Compensation (Items from No. C2 to C5) 8-73
(35) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (Item No.C6) 8-75
(36) Dot Enhancement Level (Item No.C7) 8-76
(37) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona
OFF timing (Tracing) (Item No.C8) 8-77
(38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film) (Item No.C9) 8-78
(39) Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias (Item No.CA) 8-79
(40) Developer Bias at 10oC or colder
(When Developer Bias is controlled variably) (Item No.Cb) 8-80
(41) Developer Bias at 20oC or hotter
(When Developer Bias is controlled variably) (Item No.CC) 8-80

8.1.6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5) 8-81

8.1.6.1 Function 8-81
8.1.6.2 Indication on the Operation Panel 8-81
8.1.6.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-82
8.1.6.4 Setting item list 8-85
8.1.6.5 Explanation for each setting item 8-92
(1) Image placement for cut sheet media (Items from No.00 to 0b) 8-92
(2) Image placement for Roll 1 (Items from No.0C to 17) 8-93
(3) Image placement for Roll 2 (Items from No.18 to 23) 8-94
(4) Image placement for Roll 3 (Items from No.24 to 2F) 8-95
(5) Image placement for Roll 4 (Items from No.30 to 3b) 8-96
(6) Trailing margin for Roll 1 (Items from No.3C to 47) 8-97
(7) Trailing margin for Roll 2 (Items from No.48 to 53) 8-98
(8) Trailing margin for Roll 3 (Items from No.54 to 5F) 8-99
(9) Trailing margin for Roll 4 (Items from No.60 to 6b) 8-100
(10) Length of image for Roll 1 (Items from No.6C to 77) 8-101
(11) Length of image for Roll 2 (Items from No.78 to 83) 8-102
(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (Items from No.84 to 8F) 8-103
(13) Length of image for Roll 4 (Items from No.90 to 9b) 8-104
(14) Trailing margin for cut sheet media (Large) (Item No.9C) 8-105

(2) K77sm8e1 (Ver. H.0)

 8.1.7 Factory Mode (Sub Mode 6) (Do not use) 8-106
8.1.7.1 Function 8-106
8.1.7.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-106
8.1.7.3 Operation 8-107

8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7) 8-108

8.1.8.1 Function 8-108
8.1.8.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-109
8.1.8.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-110

8.1.9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8) 8-112

8.1.9.1 Function 8-112
8.1.9.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-112
8.1.9.3 Operation (Example of usage) 8-113
8.1.9.4 Explanation for each Setting Mode 8-117
(1) Print Mode (Setting Mode No.0) 8-117
(2) Print Number Setting Mode (Setting Mode No.1) 8-118
(3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.2) 8-119
(4) Media Source Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.3) 8-120
(5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.4) 8-121
(6) Media Type Selection Mode (Bypass Feed only) (Setting Mode No.5) 8-122
(7) Interval Print Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.6) 8-122
(8) Negative Image Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.7) 8-123
(9) Mirror Image Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.8) 8-123

8.1.10 Special Mode (Sub Mode 9) 8-124

8.1.10.1 Function 8-124
8.1.10.2 Indication of the Operation Panel 8-125
8.1.10.3 Operation and explanation for each item 8-126
(1) How to select each item 8-126
(2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.0) 8-127
(3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.1) 8-128
(4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.2) 8-129
(5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.3) 8-130
(6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.4) 8-131
(7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.5) 8-132
(8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.6) 8-133
(9) Developer Bias (Positive) Adjustment Mode
(Toner Collection Process) (Item No.7) 8-134
(10) Developer Bias (Negative) Adjustment Mode
(Print Process) (Item No.8) 8-135
(11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.9) 8-136
(12) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A) 8-137
(13) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from b to E) 8-139
(14) Long print interval applied in the continuous long printing (Item No.F) 8-141
(15) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.G) 8-143
(16) Folder Setting Mode (Item No.H) 8-145

8.2 User Modes 8-147

8.2.1 User Mode 1 (Test Print) 8-148
8.2.2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting) 8-150
8.2.3 User Mode 3 (Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting) 8-156
8.2.4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting) 8-160
8.2.5 User Mode 5 (Automatic paper cut at power ON) 8-164
8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film]) 8-167
8.2.7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF) 8-170
8.2.8 User Mode 8 (Choice of Standard Print Mode/ Special Print Mode [Plain paper]) 8-173
8.2.9 User Mode 9 (Choice of Standard Print Mode /
Special Print Mode [Tracing paper]) 8-177
8.2.10 User Mode A (Choice of Standard Print Mode / Special Print Mode [Film]) 8-181

(3) K77sm8e1 (Ver. H.0)

 8.2.11 User Mode B (Enhancement of isolated dot image) 8-185
8.2.12 User Mode C (Enlargement of trailing image area) 8-189

8.3 Operational Explanation for KIP Diagnostics 8-193

8.3.1 Connection of PC and printer, and communication settings 8-193
8.3.2 Selection of Indication Tab 8-197
8.3.3 Explanation for each Indication Tab 8-198
8.3.3.1 Basic Information Tab 8-198
8.3.3.2 Display Tab 8-199
8.3.3.3 Setting Tab 8-201
(1) How to change the setting value of each Item Number 8-202
(2) Saving all present setting values in the Backup RAM file (Download) 8-205
(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to the printer 8-207
8.3.3.4 History Tab 8-210
(1) Clearing error / jam histories 8-211
8.3.3.5 Upload ROM Data Tab 8-212
(1) How to update the firmware 8-212
8.3.3.6 Test Print Tab 8-215
8.3.4 Explanation for Menu Bar and Tool Bar 8-216
8.3.4.1 File 8-216
8.3.4.2 Setting 8-216
8.3.4.3 Tool 8-217
8.3.4.4 Help 8-217
8.3.4.5 Tool bar 8-217

(4) K77sm8e1 (Ver. H.0)

8.1 Service Mode
8.1.1 General Operation
8.1.1.1 Entering the Service Mode
1) Press and hold the [ * ] key on the Operation Panel, and then press switches in the order of
[ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] to enter the Service Mode.

MENU ENTER ONLINE MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) The [MENU] key lights green and the Status Display

indicates the version of present Firmware when you enter the
Service Mode. MENU ENTER ONLINE

Firmware version

8-1 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [MENU] key once.
All LEDs and segments of the Operation Panel light.

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

And all LEDs and segments of the Media Indicator light also.

plain paper plain paper

1 vellum / tracing
1 vellum / tracing
film film

plain paper plain paper

2 vellum / tracing
2 vellum / tracing
film film

plain paper plain paper

3 vellum / tracing
3 vellum / tracing
film film

plain paper plain paper

4 vellum / tracing
4 vellum / tracing
film film

(Media Indicator)

And all “in use” Indicators light also.

in use

8-2 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [MENU] key once more.
Unnecessary LEDs and segments are put out, and it becomes possible to select each Sub Mode.
(The Input / Output Checking Mode is selected firstly at this time. So its Sub Mode Number “1” is
indicated on the 1st digit from the left.)

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

PAPER DECK MF EXIT

1 2 3 4 D1

D2 PF
WIRE CLEAN EXP- CLEAN SELECT CUT COPY DENSITY MENU ENTER ONLINE

D3 D4

6) Making reference to [8.1.1.2 Selecting each Sub Mode in the Service Mode] on the page 8-4,
select the Sub Mode you require.

8-3 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.1.2 Selecting each Sub Mode in the Service Mode
The Service Mode consists of 9 kinds of Sub Mode, and each of them has its own Sub Mode Number
as follows.
It is possible to access the necessary Sub Mode by indicating its Sub Mode Number on the Status
Display.

Sub Mode Number Name of the Sub Mode

1 Input / Output Checking Mode
2 Data Monitoring Mode
3 Function Checking Mode
4 Adjustment Mode 0
5 Adjustment Mode 1
6 Factory Mode
7 Error Check Masking Mode
8 Test Print Mode
9 Special Mode

There are 6 digits on the Status Display.

The 1st digit from the left indicates the Sub Mode Number presently selected. (From 1 to 9)

Sub Mode Number (Example : Input / Output Checking Mode)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press the [ MENU ] Key to indicate another Sub Mode Number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-4 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.1.3 Canceling the Service Mode
Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the Service Mode.
The LED of the [ MENU ] Key is put out.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-5 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.2 Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1)

8.1.2.1 Function
It is possible to observe the status of each signal inputted to the DC Controller PCB and outputted
from it.
Observation can be done while printing as usual.
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List] on and after the page 8-8 as for Signal Codes, Signal
Names and the contents of each Signal.

8.1.2.2 Indication of the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “1” which is the mode number of “Input / Output Checking Mode”.
2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
The 5th digit from the left indicates the status of selected signal.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Mode number of Input / Output Checking Mode

Signal Code

Status of signal

8-6 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.2.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “1” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Input / Output Checking Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) Both 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
As you can indicate another Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Signal Code of which status you would like to observe.
Please refer to [8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List] on and after the page 8-8.

Example : We will check the input signal from the Exit Sensor.
Its Signal Code is “2F”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Signal Code of Exit Sensor

3) Print some image from the outer device. (Or print out some Test Pattern.)
The 5th digit indicates the status of signal by either “L” or “H”.
The status of input signal sent from the Exit Sensor is “H” normally, but it changes “L” when the
sensor detects the paper.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-7 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List
Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
00 UPPER_SW U202 43 J202-1 Top Rear Cover Signal Top Rear Cover Switch (DS6) I NO
detects door open when “H”.
01 RIGHT_SW1 U202 42 J202-2 Right Side Door Signal Right Side Door Switch (DS7) I NO
detects door open when “H”.
02 RIGHT_SW2 U202 41 J202-3 Toner Cover Signal Toner Cover Switch (DS8) I NO
detects door open when “H”.
03 MP_SRT U202 40 J202-4 Bypass Start Sensor Signal Bypass Start Sensor (PH20) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
04 RP_SET1 U202 39 J202-5 Roll Set Sensor 1 Signal Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
05 RP_SET2 U202 38 J202-6 Roll Set Sensor 2 Signal Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
06 RP_SET3 U202 37 J202-7 Roll Set Sensor 3 Signal Roll Set Sensor 3 (PH3) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
07 RP_SET4 U202 36 J202-8 Roll Set Sensor 4 Signal Roll Set Sensor 4 (PH4) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
08 RF_CLK1 U202 14 J202-9 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 1 I NO
Signal (PH13) generates the clock
pulse when the media is fed.
09 RF_CLK2 U202 15 J202-10 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 2 I NO
Signal (PH14) generates the clock
pulse when the media is fed.
0A RF_CLK3 U202 16 J202-11 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 3 I NO
Signal (PH15) generates the clock
pulse when the media is fed.
0b RF_CLK4 U202 18 J202-12 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 Paper Feed Clock Sensor 4 I NO
Signal (PH16) generates the clock
pulse when the media is fed.
0C PSEL_DT0 U202 19 J202-13 Media Selection Signal 0 “Plain Paper” of Media I NO
(Plain paper) Selector is pressed down
when “H”.
0d PSEL_DT1 U202 20 J202-14 Media Selection Signal 1 “Tracing Paper” of Media I NO
(Tracing paper) Selector is pressed down
when “H”.
0E PSEL_DT2 U202 21 J202-15 Media Selection Signal 2 “Film” of Media Selector is I NO
(Film) pressed down when “H”.
0F PSEL_DT3 U202 22 J202-16 Inch Media Switch Signal “Engineering” when “L”. I NO
(ENG. / ARCH.) “Architecture” when “H”.
10 SZDATA0 U202 10 J202-17 Paper Size Sensor Signal 0 Paper Size Sensor 0 (PH5A, I NO
5B, 5C & 5D) detects the
media when “L”.
11 SZDATA1 U202 11 J202-18 Paper Size Sensor Signal 1 Paper Size Sensor 1 (PH6A, I NO
6B, 6C & 6D) detects the
media when “L”.
12 SZDATA2 U202 12 J202-19 Paper Size Sensor Signal 2 Paper Size Sensor 2 (PH7A, I NO
7B, 7C & 7D) detects the
media when “L”.
13 SZDATA3 U202 13 J202-20 Paper Size Sensor Signal 3 Paper Size Sensor 3 (PH8A, I NO
8B, 8C & 8D) detects the
media when “L”.
14 SZDATA4 U202 9 J202-21 Paper Size Sensor Signal 4 Paper Size Sensor 4 (PH9A, I NO
9B, 9C & 9D) detects the
media when “L”.
15 SZDATA5 U202 8 J202-22 Paper Size Sensor Signal 5 Paper Size Sensor 5 (PH10A, I NO
10B, 10C & 10D) detects the
media when “L”.
16 SZDATA6 U202 7 J202-23 Paper Size Sensor Signal 6 Paper Size Sensor 6 (PH11A, I NO
11B, 11C & 11D) detects the
media when “L”.
17 ------- U202 6 J202-24

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

8-8 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
18 PFMTR_LD U203 43 J204-9 Paper Feed Motor Synchronous Paper Feed Motor (M2) is I NO
Signal rotating when “L”.
19 TNR_BTL U203 42 J204-10 Toner Remaining Level Detection Toner Remaining Level I NO
Signal Sensor detects “No toner”
when “L”. (Receives the light)
1A FUMTR_LD U203 41 J204-11 Fuser Motor Synchronous Signal Fuser Motor (M5) is rotating I NO
when “L”.
1b ------- U203 40 J204-12

1C DEV_TNR2 U203 39 J204-13 Toner Detection Signal 2 Developer Toner Sensor I NO

(Developer Toner Sensor) (TLS2) detects “No toner”
when “L”.
1d DEV_TNR1 U203 38 J204-14 Toner Detection Signal 1 Hopper Toner Sensor (TLS1) I NO
(Hopper Toner Sensor) detects “No toner” when “L”.
1E MP_SW U203 37 J204-15 Bypass Feeder Switch Signal Bypass Feeder is open when I NO
“H”.
1F EXIT_SW U203 36 J204-16 Exit Cover Switch Signal Exit Cover Switch (DS5) I NO
detects door open when “H”.
20 ------- U203 14 J203-1

21 SW_DATA0 U203 15 J203-2 Switch Data Signal 0 I NO

22 SW_DATA1 U203 16 J203-3 Switch Data Signal 1 I NO

23 SIG_IN U203 18 J203-4 Reception PCB input Signal Communicating : Pulse I NO

Not communicating : H
24 ------- U203 19 J203-5

25 DECK_SW1 U203 20 J203-6 Roll Deck Switch Signal 1 Roll Deck Switch 1 (DS1) I NO
detects “Top Roll Deck open”
when “H”.
26 DECK_SW2 U203 21 J203-7 Roll Deck Switch Signal 2 Roll Deck Switch 2 (DS2) I NO
detects “Middle Roll Deck
open” when “H”.
27 DECK_SW3 U203 22 J203-8 Roll Deck Switch Signal 3 Roll Deck Switch 3 (DS3) I NO
detects “Bottom Roll Deck
open” when “H”.
28 ------- U203 10 J203-9

29 ------- U203 11 J203-10

2A T_SIZE0 U203 12 J203-11 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 Signal Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 I NO
(PH31, 33, 35 & 37) detects
the media when “L”.
2b DEVE_HP U203 13 J203-12 Developer Unit Position Sensor Developer Unit Position I NO
Signal Sensor (PH25) detects the
Developer Unit is pressed to
the Drum when “L”.
2C PFUT_ST U203 9 J203-13 Internal Transportation Unit Set Internal Transportation Unit I NO
Sensor Signal Set Sensor (PH24) detects
the Internal Transportation
Unit is set when “H”.
2d T_SIZE1 U203 8 J203-14 Cut Sheet Size Sensor 1 Signal Cut Sheet Size Sensor 0 I NO
(PH32, 34 & 36) detects the
media when “L”.
2E P_SEPR U203 7 J203-15 Separation Sensor Signal Separation Sensor (PH18) I NO
detects the media when “L”.
2F P_EXIT U203 6 J203-16 Exit Sensor Signal Exit Sensor (LS2) detects the I NO
media when “L”.
30 ------- U204 43 J205-1
J205-2
31 ------- U204 42 J205-3
J205-4
32 IN_CNT_B U204 41 Counter A (Upper) Control Signal I NO
Feed Back
33 IN_CNT_A U204 40 Counter B (Lower) Control Signal I NO
Feed Back

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.
8-9 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)
 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
34 ------- U204 39 J205-9

35 ------- U204 38 J205-10

36 ------- U204 37 J205-11

37 ------- U204 36 J205-12

38 SW_R U204 14 J208-A35 Power Switch OFF Control Signal Power Switch (S1) is turned O OK
OFF when “H” is outputted.
39 PF_SPH U204 15 J208-B35 Paper Feed Motor Speed Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
Change Signal rotates fast when “H”.
It rotates slowly when “L”.
3A T_SL1 U204 16 J208-A36 Bypass Feeding Roller Down Bypass Feeding Roller Down O OK
Solenoid Control Signal Solenoid (SL3) operates
when “H”.
3b T_SL2 U204 18 J208-B36 Bypass Reversal Roller Down Bypass Reversal Roller Down O OK
Solenoid Control Signal Solenoid (SL4) operates
when “H”.
3C T_MTR U204 19 J208-A37 Bypass Feeding Motor Control Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) O OK
Signal rotates when “H”.
3d ------- U204 20 J208-B37

3E SEPBLW4 U204 21 J208-A38 Separation Assist Blower 4 Separation Assist Blower 4 O OK

Control Signal (BL12 & 16) rotate when “H”.
3F SEPBLW3 U204 22 J208-B38 Separation Assist Blower 3 Separation Assist Blower 3 O OK
Control Signal (BL13 & 15) rotate when “H”.
40 INT1 U204 10 J204-1 Interlock Signal 1 (Thermostat) Thermostat (TS1) is open I NO
when “H”.
41 INT2 U204 11 J204-2 Interlock Signal 2 Thermostat (TS1) or some I NO
(Door / Thermostat) door is open when “H”.
42 WCMTR_OC U204 12 J204-3 Wire Cleaning Motor Over Over current flows when “L”. I NO
Current Detection Signal
43 CUTHP_O U204 13 J204-4 Cutter Home Position Signal Cutter Home Position Sensor I NO
(PH22) detects the Cutter is
at the Home Position when
“L”.
44 BIAS_ST U204 9 J204-5 Developer Bias Output 2 Bias is normally supplied I NO
Detection Signal when “H”.
45 PWR_ST U204 8 J204-6 Power Switch Detection Signal Power Switch (S1) is ON I NO
when “L”.
46 DRMTR_LD U204 7 J204-7 Drum Motor Synchronous Signal Drum Motor (M1) rotates I NO
when “L”.
47 LEDMTR_OC U204 6 J204-8 LED Head Cleaning Motor Over Over current flows when “L”. I NO
Current Detection Signal
48 DISP_DT24 U238 43 J214-1 Indication Data Signal 24 O NO

49 DISP_DT25 U238 42 J214-2 Indication Data Signal 25 O NO

4A DISP_DT26 U238 41 J214-3 Indication Data Signal 26 O NO

4B DISP_DT27 U238 40 J214-4 Indication Data Signal 27 O NO

4C DISP_DT28 U238 39 J214-5 Indication Data Signal 28 O NO

4D DISP_DT29 U238 38 J214-6 Indication Data Signal 29 O NO

4E DISP_DT30 U238 37 J214-7 Indication Data Signal 30 O NO

4F DISP_DT31 U238 36 J214-8 Indication Data Signal 31 O NO

50 DISP_DT8 U238 14 J214-9 Indication Data Signal 8 O NO

51 DISP_DT9 U238 15 J214-10 Indication Data Signal 9 O NO

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

8-10 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
52 DISP_DT10 U238 16 J214-11 Indication Data Signal 10 O NO

53 DISP_DT11 U238 18 J214-12 Indication Data Signal 11 O NO

54 DISP_DT12 U238 19 J214-13 Indication Data Signal 12 O NO

55 DISP_DT13 U238 20 J214-14 Indication Data Signal 13 O NO

56 DISP_DT14 U238 21 J214-15 Indication Data Signal 14 O NO

57 DISP_DT15 U238 22 J214-16 Indication Data Signal 15 O NO

58 DISP_DT16 U238 10 J214-17 Indication Data Signal 16 O NO

59 DISP_DT17 U238 11 J214-18 Indication Data Signal 17 O NO

5A DISP_DT18 U238 12 J214-19 Indication Data Signal 18 O NO

5B DISP_DT19 U238 13 J214-20 Indication Data Signal 19 O NO

5C DISP_DT20 U238 9 J214-21 Indication Data Signal 20 O NO

5D DISP_DT21 U238 8 J214-22 Indication Data Signal 21 O NO

5E DISP_DT22 U238 7 J214-23 Indication Data Signal 22 O NO

5F DISP_DT23 U238 6 J214-24 Indication Data Signal 23 O NO

60 RY6 U205 43 J208-B28 Rylay6 (RY6) Control Signal 36V is controlled when “H”. O NO

61 U219 CLK U205 42 Shift Lock of M62362P CLK - NO

62 U219 DI U205 41 Serial Data of M62362P DI - NO

63 U219 BS U205 40 BS of M62362P - NO

64 U209 A U205 39 Selector A of 74HC4051 - NO

65 U209 B U205 38 Selector B of 74HC4051 - NO

66 U209 C U205 37 Selector C of 74HC4051 - NO

67 WD U205 36 -

68 DPMTR U205 14 J208-A29 Developer Positioning Motor Developer Positioning Motor O OK

Control Signal (M4) rotates when “H”.
69 CUTMTR U205 15 J208-B29 Cutter Motor Control Signal Cutter Motor (M3) rotates O OK
when “H”.
6A DP_CHG U205 16 J208-A30 Developer Release Power Power for releasing the O OK
Charge Control Signal Developer Unit is charged
when “H”.
6B CMTR_RST U205 18 J208-B30 Cutter Motor Reset Signal Cutter is reset when “H”. O OK

6C WCMTR U205 19 J208-A31 Wire Cleaning Motor Control Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) O OK
Signal rotates when “H”.
6D PRESBLW_H U205 20 J208-B31 Paper Pressure Blower Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 O OK
(High Speed) &7) rotate in a high speed
when “H”.
6E WCMTR_DIR U205 21 J208-A32 Wire Cleaning Motor Reverse Wire Cleaning Motor (M9) O OK
Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
6F PRESBLW_L U205 22 J208-B32 Paper Pressure Blower Pressure Blowers (BL4, 5, 6 O OK
(Low Speed) &7) rotate in a low speed
when “H”.
70 PFMTR_DIR U205 10 J208-A33 Paper Feed Motor Reverse Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
Control Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
71 ------- U205 11 J208-B33

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.
8-11 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)
 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
72 DRMTR_DIR U205 12 J208-A34 Drum Motor Reverse Control Drum Motor (M1) rotates O OK
Signal oppositely when “H”.
73 EXBLW3 U205 13 J208-B34 Exhaust Fan 3 Control Signal Exhaust Fan 3 (BL17, 18 & O OK
19) rotate when “H”.
74 HV5 U205 9 J209-1 Cleaning Roller Bias Control Bias is supplied when “H”. O OK
Signal
75 HV5_SEL U205 8 J209-2 Cleaning Roller Bias Polarity Negative when “H”. O OK
Switch Control Signal Positive when “L”.
76 COUNTER_B U205 7 J209-3 Counter B Control Signal Counter B (CNTB) takes 1 O OK
(Lower : 3 pins) count when “H”.
77 COUNTER_A U205 6 J209-4 Counter A Control Signal Counter A (CNT A) takes 1 O OK
(Upper : 2 pins) count when “H”.
78 E_LAMP U206 43 J208-A14 Eraser Lamp Control Signal Eraser Lamp lights when “H”. O OK

79 HOP_CL U206 42 J208-B14 Toner Supply Clutch Control Toner Supply Clutch (MC11) O OK
Signal is ON when “H”.
7A ------- U206 41 J208-A15

7B S_LAMP U206 40 J208-B15 Separation Lamp Control Signal Separation Lamp lights when O OK
“H”.
7C EXBLW_L U206 39 J208-A16 Exhaust Blower Control Signal Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) O OK
(Low Speed) rotate in a low speed when
“H”.
7D SEPBLW1 U206 38 J208-B16 Separation Fan Control Signal Separation Fan (BL1) rotates O OK
when “H”.
7E D_BIAS U206 37 J208-A17 Developer Bias Control Signal Bias is supplied when “H”. O OK

7F EXBLW_H U206 36 J208-B17 Exhaust Blower Control Signal Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) O OK
(High Speed) rotate in a high speed when
“H”.
80 SIG_OUT U206 14 J208-A24 Transmission PCB Output Signal Communicating : Pulse O OK
Not communicating : H
81 LEDMTR_DIR U206 15 J208-A25 LED Cleaning Motor Reverse LED Cleaning Motor (M8) O OK
Control Signal rotates oppositely when “H”.
82 BIAS_SEL U206 16 J208-B25 Developer Bias Polarity Switch Negative when “H”. O OK
Control Signal Positive when “L”.
83 LEDMTR U206 18 J208-A26 LED Cleaning Motor Control LED Cleaning Motor (M8) O OK
Signal rotates when “H”.
84 PFMTR U206 19 J208-B26 Paper Feed Motor Control Signal Paper Feed Motor (M2) O OK
rotates when “H”.
85 DRMTR U206 20 J208-A27 Drum Motor Control Signal Drum Motor (M1) rotates O OK
when “H”.
86 DRMTR_SP U206 21 J208-B27 Drum Motor Speed Switch 213.5rpm when “H”. O OK
Control Signal 427 rpm when “L”.
87 FUMTR U206 22 J208-A28 Fuser Motor Control Signal Fuser Motor (M5) rotates O OK
when “H”.
88 SLCT_0 U206 10 Print Condition Data Select - NO
Signal 0
89 SLCT_1 U206 11 Print Condition Data Select - NO
Signal 1
8A SLCT_2 U206 12 Print Condition Data Select - NO
Signal 2
8B SLCT_3 U206 13 Print Condition Data Select - NO
Signal 3
8C SLCT_4 U206 9 Print Condition Data Select - NO
Signal 4
8D DEV_CLR U206 8 Device Clear Signal Clear when “L”. O NO

8E SLCT_WE U206 7 Select Write Enable Signal - NO

8F BUS_DIR U206 6 DIR Signal Control of 74HC245 Output when “H”. - NO

Input when “L”.
90 P_GATE U207 43 J208-A2 Paper Gate Clutch Control Signal Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) is O OK
ON when “H”.

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

8-12 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
91 RP_FEED U207 42 J208-B2 Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) is O OK
ON when “H”.
92 RP_CL U207 41 J208-A3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 Control Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 O OK
Signal (MC1) is ON when “H”.
93 RP_CL2 U207 40 J208-B3 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 Control Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 O OK
Signal (MC2) is ON when “H”.
94 RP_CL3 U207 39 J208-A4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 Control Roll Paper Feed Clutch 3 O OK
Signal (MC3) is ON when “H”.
95 RP_CL4 U207 38 J208-B4 Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 Control Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 O OK
Signal (MC4) is ON when “H”.
96 FU_SL U207 37 J208-A5 Fuser Solenoid Control Signal Fuser Solenoid (SL1) is ON O OK
when “H”.
97 DEHUM U207 36 J208-B5 Dehumidify Heater Control Signal Dehumidify Heaters (H3, 4, 5, O OK
6, 7 & 8) are OFF when “H”.
98 HOP_MTR2 U207 14 J208-A6 Toner Supply Motor 2 Control Toner Supply Motor 2 (M6) O OK
Signal (Hopper to Developer) rotates when “H”.
99 SEPBLW2 U207 15 J208-B6 Separation Assist Blower 2 Separation Assist Blower 2 O OK
Control Signal (BL14) rotates when “H”.
9A SAFE_RY U207 16 J208-A7 Relay Control Signal Fuser is normal when “H”. O OK
Fuser is abnormal when “L”.
9B MF_CL U207 18 J208-B7 Bypass Feed Clutch Control Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) is O OK
Signal ON when “H”.
9C RP_CL1 U207 19 J208-A8 Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch Control Roll Deck 1 Feed Clutch O OK
Signal (MC8) is ON when “H”.
9D PG_BK U207 20 J208-B8 Paper Gate Brake Control Signal Paper Gate Brake (MC10) is O OK
ON when “H”.
9E PF_BK U207 21 J208-A9 Paper Feed Brake Control Signal Paper Feed Brake (MC9) is O OK
ON when “H”.
9F CT0_SL U207 22 J208-B9 Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid Cutter Oil Supply Solenoid O OK
Control Signal (SL2) supplies the oil when
“H”.
A0 HV1 U207 10 J208-A10 Image Corona Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
the Image Corona Wire when
“H”.
A1 HV_AC U207 11 J208-B10 Separation Corona Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
the Separation Corona Wire
when “H”.
A2 HV_TR U207 12 J208-A11 Transfer Corona Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
the Transfer Corona Wire
when “H”.
A3 TR_LAMP U207 13 J208-B11 Pre-Transfer LED Control Signal Pre-Transfer LED lights when O OK
“H”.
A4 COOL_FAN1 U207 9 J208-A12 LED Head Cooling Fan 1 Control LED Cooling Fans (BL8 & 9) O OK
Signal rotate when “H”.
A5 COOL_FAN2 U207 8 J208-B12 LED Head Cooling Fan 2 Control LED Cooling Fans (BL10 & O OK
Signal 11) rotate when “H”.
A6 HV6 U207 7 J208-A13 Grid Bias Control Signal High Voltage is supplied to O OK
the Image Corona Grid Wire
when “H”.
A7 HOP_MTR1 U207 6 J208-B13 Toner Supply Motor 1 Control Toner Supply Motor 1 (M7) O OK
Signal (Cartridge to Hopper) rotates when “H”.
A8 DIGIT0 U208 43 J207-2 Digit Signal 0 O NO
PSEL_DG0 J207-1
A9 DIGIT1 U208 42 J207-4 Digit Signal 1 O NO
PSEL_DG1 J207-3
AA DIGIT2 U208 41 J207-6 Digit Signal 2 O NO
PSEL_DG2 J207-5
AB DIGIT3 U208 40 J207-8 Digit Signal 3 O NO
PSEL_DG3 J207-7
AC DIGIT4 U208 39 J207-10 Digit Signal 4 O NO
J207-9
AD DIGIT5 U208 38 J207-12 Digit Signal 5 O NO
J207-11
AE DIGIT6 U208 37 J207-14 Digit Signal 6 O NO
J207-13
AF DIGIT7 U208 36 J207-16 Digit Signal 7 O NO
J207-15

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.
8-13 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)
 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
B0 DISP_DT0 U208 14 J207-17 Indication Data Signal 0 O NO

B1 DISP_DT1 U208 15 J207-18 Indication Data Signal 1 O NO

B2 DISP_DT2 U208 16 J207-19 Indication Data Signal 2 O NO

B3 DISP_DT3 U208 18 J207-20 Indication Data Signal 3 O NO

B4 DISP_DT4 U208 19 J207-21 Indication Data Signal 4 O NO

B5 DISP_DT5 U208 20 J207-22 Indication Data Signal 5 O NO

B6 DISP_DT6 U208 21 J207-23 Indication Data Signal 6 O NO

B7 DISP_DT7 U208 22 J207-24 Indication Data Signal 7 O NO

B8 SEL_A U208 10 J207-25 Toner Remaining Level Sensor O NO

Selection Signal A
B9 SEL_B U208 11 J207-26 Toner Remaining Level Sensor O NO
Selection Signal B
BA SEL_C U208 12 J207-27 Toner Remaining Level Sensor O NO
Selection Signal C
BB EXIT_OUTA U208 13 J801-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal (Ach) “H” is outputted when P_EXIT O NO
Signal is “L”.
BC BUZZER U208 9 J207-29 Buzzer Control Signal Buzzer sounds when “H”. O OK

BD EXIT_OUTB U208 8 J802-35 Exit Sensor Output Signal (Bch) “H” is outputted when P_EXIT O NO
Signal is “L”.
BE F_LAMP1 U208 7 J208-A1 Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 1 (H1) lights O NO
when “H”.
BF F_LAMP2 U208 6 J208-B1 Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 2 (H2) lights O NO
when “H”.
C0 DISP_DT32 U244 43 J216-22 Indication Data Signal 32 O NO

C1 DISP_DT33 U244 42 J216-21 Indication Data Signal 33 O NO

C2 DISP_DT34 U244 41 J216-20 Indication Data Signal 34 O NO

C3 DISP_DT35 U244 40 J216-19 Indication Data Signal 35 O NO

C4 DISP_DT36 U244 39 J216-18 Indication Data Signal 36 O NO

C5 DISP_DT37 U244 38 J216-17 Indication Data Signal 37 O NO

C6 DISP_DT38 U244 37 J216-16 Indication Data Signal 38 O NO

C7 DISP_DT39 U244 36 J216-15 Indication Data Signal 39 O NO

C8 ------- U244 14 J216-14

C9 ------- U244 15 J216-13

CA ------- U244 16 J216-12

CB ------- U244 18 J216-11

CC ------- U244 19 J216-10

CD ------- U244 20 J216-9

CE FREQ U244 21 Image Size Switch Signal 100% when “H”. O OK

99.8% when “L”.
CF STR / STP U244 22 Start / Stop Signal of HD64610 O NO

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

8-14 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

 Signal Signal name IC Pin Connector Contents of signal Condition I/O F.C.
Code
D0 ------- U244 10 J216-8

D1 ------- U244 11 J216-7

D2 ------- U244 12 J216-6

D3 ------- U244 13 J216-5

D4 ------- U244 9 J216-4

D5 ------- U244 8 J216-3

D6 ------- U244 7 J216-2

D7 ------- U244 6 J216-1

D8 D100 U201 122 Input Data Bus 0 I NO

D9 D101 U201 121 Input Data Bus 1 I NO

DA D102 U201 120 Input Data Bus 2 I NO

DB D103 U201 119 Input Data Bus 3 I NO

DC D104 U201 118 Input Data Bus 4 I NO

DD D105 U201 117 Input Data Bus 5 I NO

DE D106 U201 116 Input Data Bus 6 I NO

DF D107 U201 115 Input Data Bus 7 I NO

E0 IPRDY0 U201 79 Printer Ready Signal Printer is ready when “L”. O NO

E1 IPREQ1 U201 78 Print Request Signal “L” is outputted when the O NO

printer is available to receive
the Print Signal.
E2 LED_TR U201 77 J208-A18 Toner Remaining Level Detection Toner Remaining Level O OK
LED Control Signal Detection LED light when “H”.
E3 ------- U201 76 J208-B18

E4 ------- U201 75 J208-A19

E5 GATE0 U201 74 Gate 0 of PD71054 O NO

E6 GATE1 U201 73 Gate 1 of PD71054 O NO

E7 GATE2 U201 72 Gate 2 of PD71054 O NO

E8 PAGEBL U201 97 Page Enable Signal Print when “L”. O NO

E9 IBUSY1 U201 98 Data Output Busy Signal Busy when “H”. O NO

EA IPRNT0 U201 101 Print Start Signal Print is requested when “L”. I NO

EB TSTPRT U201 102 Test Pattern Print Signal Test Paint is requested when O NO
“L”.
EC IPCUT0 U201 38 Paper Cut Request Signal Paper Cut is requested when I NO
“L”.
ED COMSTB U201 37 Command Reception Signal “L” is outputted when the O NO
printer receives the
command.
EE PA_ENT U201 34 Leading Edge Sensor Signal Leading Edge Sensor (PH12) I NO
detects the media when “L”.

NOTES
1. I / O means input signal or output signal.

2. F.C. means Function Checking (Mode).

If the signal is provided with “OK”, concerning target (motors, blowers and so on) is operatable in the
Function Checking Mode. (Refer to [8.1.4 Function Checking Mode] on and after the page 8-29.)
If the signal is provided with “NO”, it is not operatable.

8-15 K77sm8e2 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)

8.1.3.1 Function
It is possible to monitor several data as the input voltage to the DC Controller PCB or the temperature
of Fuser.

8.1.3.2 Indication of the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “2” which is the Sub Mode number of “Data Monitoring Mode”.
2nd digit from the left indicates the Data Number.
4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode

Data Number

Data

The contents of Data Number are as follows.

Data Number Contents Unit of the Remarks

indicated data
00 Fuser Temperature Centigrade
01 Input from Paper Size Sensors in Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
the Roll Deck 1 1: Paper is not detected.
02 Input from Paper Size Sensors in Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
the Roll Deck 2 1: Paper is not detected.
03 Input from Paper Size Sensors in Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
the Roll Deck 3 1: Paper is not detected.
04 Input from Paper Size Sensors in Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
the Roll Deck 4 1: Paper is not detected.
05 Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal 0: Paper is detected.
1: Paper is not detected.
06 Roll 1 remaining level Every 1/8 is indicated.
07 Roll 2 remaining level
08 Roll 3 remaining level
09 Roll 4 remaining level
0A Humidity of Inside the Machine %
0b Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor V
0C Drum Surface Potential V
0d Input Voltage from SPS V
0E Temperature of inside the machine Centigrade
0F (Reserved)

8-16 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

 Data Number Contents Unit of the Remarks
indicated data
10 Toner remaining level Data 1 X/8 0: Toner is not detected.
(1st checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.
11 Toner remaining level Data 2 X/8 0: Toner is not detected.
(2nd checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.
12 Toner remaining level Data 3 X/8 0: Toner is not detected.
(3rd checking) Hexadecimal 1: Toner is detected.

8.1.3.3 Operation (Example of usage)

1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “2” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Data Monitoring Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Data Number presently selected.
As you can indicate another Data Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Data Number of which data you would like to monitor.
Please refer to the list on the page 8-16 and this page to know the contents of Data Number.

Example : We will monitor “Roll 1 remaining level”.

Its Data Number is “06”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Data Number of “Roll 1 remaining level”

8-17 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the data of the selected Data Number.
To know the meaning of Data in each Data Number, refer to [8.1.3.4 Meaning of each Data]
on and after the page 8-19.

Example : 3/8 of roll media is still remaining.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Data

8-18 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.3.4 Meaning of each Data

(1) Fuser Temperature (00)

Actual temperature of Fuser is indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits from the left.
The unit is “oC”.
Dot of the 6th digit lights when the Fuser Lamp 1 is ON, and that of 5th one lights when the Fuser
Lamp 2 is ON.

Temperature of Fuser (Example : 140oC)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Fuser Lamp 2 ON/OFF

Fuser Lamp 1 ON/OFF

8-19 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Input from Paper Size Sensors (01 to 04)

Input from Paper Size Sensors (for roll media) is shown by the hexadecimal data.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Hexadecimal data

Convert the hexadecimal into binary if you would like to know the input condition.
Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with size sensors as follows.

Example) When “70” is indicated.

70 01110000
PH5 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 0)
PH6 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 1)
PH7 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 2)
PH8 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 3)
PH9 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 4)
PH10 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 5)
PH11 (Paper Size Sensor Signal 6)
Not used (This is always “0”)

“0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”.
Therefore, PH5, 6, 7 and 8 detect the paper (ON) while PH9, 10 and 11 do not detect (OFF).

Reference
It is possible to check whether the size sensor is broken or not in this mode.
Supposing you use the A0 roll (841mm wide) of the 2nd Roll Deck then check the input
condition.
If “50” is indicated, PH9 may be broken because it means “0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0”.
(“40” will be indicated if the PH9 works properly, which means “0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0”)

NOTE
The arrangement of sensors of the Roll Deck 1 is different from that of other decks.
The indicated hexadecimal data of Roll Deck 1 will be different from that of other decks
therefore.
Please refer to the explanation on and after the next page so as not to misunderstand that the
sensor is broken.

8-20 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

 (1) Roll 2, 3 & 4

PH5 is arranged at the most inside to detect B3 paper.

PH11
Center of the paper (36")
PH10
(A0 & 34")

RP_SET2, 3 and 4 PH9

(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")

PH5
(B3)
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2 & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")

Paper Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
841 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
728 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60
594 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70
515 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78
420 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C
364 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 7E
297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
2 1 0 3 2
Weight of 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Paper Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
34” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
30” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 60
24” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 70
22” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 78
18” / 17” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 7C
11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
2 1 0 3 2
Weight of 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Reference : Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system

Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

8-21 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

 (2) Roll 1

PH5 is arranged between PH10 and PH11 to detect 900mm, 891mm and 880mm paper.

PH11
Center of the paper (36")
PH10
(A0 & 34")

RP_SET1 PH9
(A3, 11" & 12") (B1 & 30")

PH5
(900, 891 & 880mm)
PH6
(A2, 17" & 18")
PH7
(B2, & 22")
PH8
(A1 & 24")

Paper Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
900/891 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 40
/880
841 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41
728 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61
594 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71
515 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79
420 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d
364 - - - - - - - -
(No detect)
297 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
Weight of 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Paper Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

width PH11 PH10 PH9 PH8 PH7 PH6 PH5
36” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
34” 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 41
30” 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 61
24” 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 71
22” 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 79
18” / 17” 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7d
11” / 12” 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
2 1 0 3 2
Weight of 2 2 2 2 2 21 20
bits (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Reference : Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system

Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

8-22 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors (05)

Input from Cut Sheet Size Sensors is shown by the hexadecimal data.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Hexadecimal data

Convert the hexadecimal into binary if you would like to know the input condition.
Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with size sensors as follows.

Example) When “F0” is indicated.

F0 11110000
PH31 (Detecting 11”)
PH32 (Detecting A4S & 12”)
PH33 (Detecting A3S & 17”)
PH34 (Detecting 18”)
PH35 (Detecting 22”)
PH36 (Detecting A2S & 24”)
PH37 (Detecting A1S, 30”, 34” & 36”)
Not used (This is always “1”.)

“0” means “Paper is detected”, and “1” means “Paper is not detected”.
Therefore, PH31, 32, 33 and 34 detect the paper (ON) while PH35, 36 and 37 do not
detect (OFF).

Reference
It is possible to check whether the size sensor is broken or not in this mode.
Supposing you set the A1S cut sheet media (841mm wide) on the Bypass Feeder then check
the input condition.
If “90” is indicated, PH35 may be broken because it means “1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0”.
(“80” will be indicated if the PH35 works properly, which means “1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0”)

Refer to the explanation on the next page.

8-23 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

 Center of PH34 PH36
the paper (18") (A2S & 24")
PH31
(11")
PH32
(A4S & 12") PH33 PH35 PH37
(A3S & 17") (22") (A1S, 30", 34 & 36")

Paper width Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal

PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31
36”/841mm (A0 orA1S) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80
594mm (A2) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0
420mm (A3S) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8
297mm (A4S) 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC
Weight of bits 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
(4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Paper width Cut Sheet Size Sensors Hexadecimal

PH37 PH36 PH35 PH34 PH33 PH32 PH31
36”/34”/30” 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80
24” 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C0
22” 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 E0
18” 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 F0
17” 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F8
12” 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 FC
11”” 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 FF
2 1 0 3 2 1
Weight of bits 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
(4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Reference: Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system

Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

8-24 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

(4) Roll remaining level (06 to 09)

The volume of roll media remaining in each Roll Deck is divided into 8 levels.
4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate X/8.
(8/8 means the maximum level, and 1/8 means the minimum.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Remaining level (Example : 1/8)

NOTE
Roll remaining level is not indicated if the Roll Deck is opened or if the printer is checking roll
size right after closing the Roll Deck.
“- -” will be indicated in these cases.

(5) Humidity of inside the machine (0A)

Actual humidity of inside the machine is indicated.

The unit is “%”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Humidity (Example : 40%)

(6) Input Voltage from Humidity Sensor (0b)

Input voltage from Humidity Sensor is indicated.

The unit is “V”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Input voltage (Example : 0.74V)

8-25 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

(7) Drum Surface Potential (0C)

The Potential of Drum surface detected by the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated.
The unit is “V”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Drum Surface Potential (Example : 840V)

(8) Input Voltage from SPS (0d)

The input voltage from the Surface Potential Sensor (SPS) is indicated.
The unit is “V”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Input voltage (Example : 4.10V)

(9) Temperature of inside the machine (0E)

The actual temperature of inside the machine is indicated.

The unit is “oC”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Temperature (Example : 35oC)

8-26 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

(10) Toner remaining level Data (10 to 12)

The volume of toner remaining in the Toner Cartridge is divided into 8 levels.
The 4th digit indicates the remaining level “X/8”. (Only “X” is indicated.)
And the input from Toner Remaining Level Sensors (8 pieces) is shown by the hexadecimal data on
5th and 6th digits.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Hexadecimal

Remaining level (Example : 7/8)

Convert the hexadecimal into binary if you would like to know the input condition.
Each of 8 digits of binary data is related with toner sensors as follows.

Example) When “7F” is indicated.

7F 01111111
S511 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 0 (Level 1/8)
S512 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 1 (Level 2/8)
S513 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 2 (Level 3/8)
S514 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 3 (Level 4/8)
S515 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 4 (Level 5/8)
S516 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 5 (Level 6/8)
S517 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 6 (Level 7/8)
S518 : Toner Volume Detection Signal 7 (Level 8/8)

“0” means “Toner is not detected”, and “1” means “Toner is detected”.
Therefore, the machine judges the remaining level of toner as “7/8”.

Toner Remaining Paper Sensors Hexadecimal

volume (Level) S518 S517 S516 S515 S514 S513 S512 S511
8/8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FF
7/8 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7F
6/8 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 3F
5/8 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1F
4/8 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0F
3/8 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 07
2/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 03
1/8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01
Weight of bits 23 22 21 20 23 22 21 20
(8) (4) (2) (1) (8) (4) (2) (1)
Upper Digit (x10) Lower Digit (x1)

Reference : Relationship between Decimal and Hexadecimal numeric system

Decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Hexa-decimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

8-27 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
The printer will check the remaining level of toner in the following 3 cases.

1. When the printer is turned on.

2. When the Toner Cover is opened then closed.
3. Every 30m print

Checking is done 3 times having some interval. (Toner Cartridge is driven during the interval.)

Motor ON 1st Checking Interval 2nd Checking Interval 3rd Checking

(Motor ON) (Motor ON)

The printer will take the intermediate value of 3 checking as the remaining level of toner.
Example) 1st checking 7/8
2nd checking 2/8 Printer takes 4/8 as the remaining level.
3rd checking 4/8

Data No. “10” memorizes the remaining level detected in the 1st checking.
Data No. “11” memorizes the remaining level detected in the 2nd checking.
Data No. “12” memorizes the remaining level detected in the 3rd checking.

8-28 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.4 Function Checking Mode (Sub Mode 3)

8.1.4.1 Function
Many parts such as motors and clutches are connected to the DC Controller PCB.
It is possible to operate such part alone in the Function Checking Mode.
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List] on and after the page 8-8 as for Signal Codes and
operated objects.

NOTES
(1) Only 1 object is available to operate at one time, except for the Image Corona.
When you select [Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0)] and make it operate,
[Grid Bias Control Signal (A6)] is automatically operated at the same time.
However, when you select [Grid Bias Control Signal] and make it operate, [Image Corona
Control Signal] does not operate.
Do not remain ON for a long time.

(2) Do not operate the following Coronas so long!

Drum is not moved while the Corona is discharging.
It will result in the damage of Drum because only 1 point of Drum surface is charged
strongly.
Image Corona Control Signal (Signal Code : A0)
Grid Bias Control Signal (A6)
Transfer Corona Control Signal (A2)
Separation Corona Control Signal (A1)

(3) Do not operate the following lamps so long!

Cooling fans do not operate while the lamp is lighting.
It will result in the breakage of lamp as it will become so hot.
Eraser Lamp Control Signal (Signal Code : 78)
Separation Lamp Control Signal (7b)
Pre-Transfer LED Control Signal (A3)

(4) Do not operate the Fuser Lamps so long!

Fuser Roller and several parts near it will become so hot and may be broken.
Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal (Signal Code : BE)
Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal (Signal Code : BF)

8-29 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.4.2 Indication on the Operation Panel
The 1st digit from the left indicates “3” which is the Sub Mode number of “Function Checking Mode”.
2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
5th and 6th digits indicate the status of the selected object.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode

Signal Code

Status of the selected object

8-30 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.4.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “3” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Function Checking Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Signal Code presently selected.
As you can indicate another Signal Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Signal Code of which object you would like to operate.
Refer to [8.1.2.4 Input / Output Signal List] on and after the page 8-8 as for Signal Codes
and objects which are operated.

Example : We will make the Separation Lamp light alone.

Its Signal Code is “7b”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Signal Code to operate the Separation Lamp

There are many Signal Codes of which object is not operatable. (Input signal for example)
If you select such kind of signal, 5th and 6th digits indicate nothing.
(If the object of the selected Signal Code is operatable, hyphens are indicated on 5th and
6th digits.)

NOTE
There are many Signal Codes of which object is not operatable. (Input signal for example)
If you select such kind of signal, 5th and 6th digits indicate nothing.
If the object of the selected Signal Code is operatable, hyphens are indicated on 5th and
6th digits.)
Please check the column [F.C.] in the Input / Output Signal List. If the Signal Code is provided
with “OK”, it is possible to operate its object.

8-31 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

3) If you press the [ ENTER ] Key, the selected object starts operating.
Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits flash when the object is operating.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Hyphens flash when the Separation Lamp is lighting.

4) If you press the [ ENTER ] Key again, the selected object stops operating.
Hyphens on 5th and 6th digits stop flashing also.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTES
Once you start operating some object in the Function Checking Mode, it is impossible to
cancel the Service Mode unless you stop operating it.

8-32 K77sm8e3 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)

8.1.5.1 Function
It is possible to adjust several setting items.
Please refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-37 as for the brief information of the
setting items.
And please refer to [8.1.5.5 Explanation for each setting item] on and after the page 8-43 as for the
details for the setting items.

8.1.5.2 Indication on the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “4” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 0”.
2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number.
4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0

Item Number

Setting Value

8-33 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.5.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “4” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected.
As you can indicate another Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Item Number of which setting you would like to change.
Please refer to [8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-37 to know the contents of
setting.

Example : We will adjust the fusing temperature for the plain paper.
Its Item Number is “10”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number to adjust the “Fusing temperature for plain paper”

8-34 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

3) After selecting the necessary Item Number, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits starts flashing and it becomes possible to
change the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

The setting value flashes.

4) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-35 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value.
The setting value stops flashing after the decision.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key when the setting value is flashing (before the decision), new
setting value is not decided and the old setting value is recovered.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

(Old setting value is recovered.)

8-36 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.5.4 Setting item list
Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
00 Metric or inch A0 NO A0 or 36 8-43
01 Operation of Interface 0 NO 0 to 2 8-43
02 Maximum cut length 6 NO 6 or 24 m 8-44
03 Trailing margin for long print OFF NO On or OFF 8-44
04 Special paper size 900 NO 900/891/880 mm 8-45
05 Counting unit of Counter A 0 NO 0 to 3 8-46
06 Counting unit of Counter B 0 NO 0 to 3 8-46
07 Operation of Dehumidify Heater 0 NO 0 or 1 8-47
08 Cut length of Test Print A0 NO A0 to b5 8-47
48 to 8.5
09 Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value 0 NO 0 or 1 8-48
Changing Mode (PPC)
0A Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value 0 NO 0 or 1 8-48
Changing Mode (Tracing paper)
0b Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value 0 NO 0 or 1 8-48
Changing Mode (Film)
0C Reserved NO
0d Reserved NO
0E Reserved NO
0F Reserved NO
10 Fusing temperature (PPC) 170 OK 150 to 190 1oC 8-54
o
11 Fusing temperature (Tracing) 170 OK 150 to 190 1C 8-54
o
12 Fusing temperature (Film) 170 OK 150 to 190 1C 8-54
13 LED strobe time for Main Pixel 34 NO 0 to 42 1 micro- 8-55
sec.
14 LED strobe time for Supplemental Pixel 22 NO 0 to 50 % 8-55
15 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF 1 NO 0 or 1 8-57
timing (PPC)
16 Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF 1 NO 0 or 1 8-58
17 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) 1 NO 0 or 1 8-58
18 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) 1 NO 0 or 1 8-59
19 Developer Bias (4A) NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-60
1A Intensity of current on the Corona Wire 56 NO 000 to 0FF Hex. 8-61
(Image Corona)
1b Intensity of current on the Grid Plate 26b NO 000 to 500 Hex. 8-61
(Image Corona)
1C Intensity of current (Transfer Corona : PPC) 3C2 OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
1d Intensity of current (Transfer Corona : Tracing) 3C2 OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
1E Intensity of current (Transfer Corona : Film) 3C2 OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
1F DC component (Separation Corona : PPC) 392 OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
20 DC component (Separation Corona : Tracing) 35A OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
21 DC component (Separation Corona : Film) 4A0 OK 000 to 500 Hex. 8-62
22 Paper Feed Motor speed (Bypass feed) 0.00 NO -1.0% to 0.05% 8-63
1.0%
23 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 1) 0.00 NO -1.0% to 0.05% 8-63
1.0%
24 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 2) 0.00 NO -1.0% to 0.05% 8-63
1.0%
25 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 3) 0.00 NO -1.0% to 0.05% 8-63
1.0%
26 Paper Feed Motor speed (Roll 4) 0.00 NO -1.0% to 0.05% 8-63
1.0%
27 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / PPC / Large size) 1.0%
28 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / PPC / Medium size) 1.0%
29 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / PPC / Small size) 1.0%
2A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / PPC / Smallest size) 1.0%

8-37 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
2b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Large size) 1.0%
2C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Medium size) 1.0%
2d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Small size) 1.0%
2E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Tracing / Smallest size) 1.0%
2F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Film / Large size) 1.0%
30 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Film / Medium size) 1.0%
31 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Film / Small size) 1.0%
32 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-64
(Bypass feed / Film / Smallest size) 1.0%
33 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m) 1.0%
34 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 2 to 3m) 1.0%
35 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 3 to 4m) 1.0%
36 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 4 to 5m) 1.0%
37 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 5 to 6m) 1.0%
38 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 6 to 7m) 1.0%
39 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 7 to 8m) 1.0%
3A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m) 1.0%
3b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 9 to 10m) 1.0%
3C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 10 to 11m) 1.0%
3d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 11 to 12m) 1.0%
3E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 12 to 13m) 1.0%
3F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 13 to 14m) 1.0%
40 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 14 to 15m) 1.0%
41 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 15 to 16m) 1.0%
42 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 16 to 17m) 1.0%
43 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 17 to 18m) 1.0%
44 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 18 to 19m) 1.0%
45 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 19 to 20m) 1.0%
46 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 20 to 21m) 1.0%
47 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m) 1.0%
48 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 22 to 23m) 1.0%
49 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Large size / 23 to 24m) 1.0%

8-38 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
4A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Medium size) 1.0%
4b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Small size) 1.0%
4C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / PPC / Smallest size) 1.0%
4d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Large size) 1.0%
4E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Medium size) 1.0%
4F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Small size) 1.0%
50 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Tracing / Smallest size) 1.0%
51 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Film / Large size) 1.0%
52 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Film / Medium size) 1.0%
53 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Film / Small size) 1.0%
54 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-65
(Roll 1 / Film / Smallest size) 1.0%
55 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m) 1.0%
56 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 2 to 3m) 1.0%
57 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 3 to 4m) 1.0%
58 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 4 to 5m) 1.0%
59 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 5 to 6m) 1.0%
5A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 6 to 7m) 1.0%
5b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 7 to 8m) 1.0%
5C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m) 1.0%
5d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 9 to 10m) 1.0%
5E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 10 to 11m) 1.0%
5F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 11 to 12m) 1.0%
60 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 12 to 13m) 1.0%
61 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 13 to 14m) 1.0%
62 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 14 to 15m) 1.0%
63 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 15 to 16m) 1.0%
64 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 16 to 17m) 1.0%
65 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 17 to 18m) 1.0%
66 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 18 to 19m) 1.0%
67 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 19 to 20m) 1.0%
68 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 20 to 21m) 1.0%

8-39 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
69 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m) 1.0%
6A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 22 to 23m) 1.0%
6b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Large size / 23 to 24m) 1.0%
6C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Medium size) 1.0%
6d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Small size) 1.0%
6E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / PPC / Smallest size) 1.0%
6F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Tracing / Large size) 1.0%
70 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Tracing / Medium size) 1.0%
71 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Tracing / Small size) 1.0%
72 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Tracing / Smallest size) 1.0%
73 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Film / Large size) 1.0%
74 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Film / Medium size) 1.0%
75 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Film / Small size) 1.0%
76 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-66
(Roll 2 / Film / Smallest size) 1.0%
77 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m) 1.0%
78 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 2 to 3m) 1.0%
79 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 3 to 4m) 1.0%
7A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 4 to 5m) 1.0%
7b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 5 to 6m) 1.0%
7C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 6 to 7m) 1.0%
7d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 7 to 8m) 1.0%
7E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m) 1.0%
7F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 9 to 10m) 1.0%
80 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 10 to 11m) 1.0%
81 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 11 to 12m) 1.0%
82 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 12 to 13m) 1.0%
83 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 13 to 14m) 1.0%
84 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 14 to 15m) 1.0%
85 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 15 to 16m) 1.0%
86 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 16 to 17m) 1.0%
87 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 17 to 18m) 1.0%
88 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 18 to 19m) 1.0%

8-40 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
89 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 19 to 20m) 1.0%
8A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 20 to 21m) 1.0%
8b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m) 1.0%
8C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 22 to 23m) 1.0%
8d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Large size / 23 to 24m) 1.0%
8E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Medium size) 1.0%
8F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Small size) 1.0%
90 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / PPC / Smallest size) 1.0%
91 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Tracing / Large size) 1.0%
92 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Tracing / Medium size) 1.0%
93 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Tracing / Small size) 1.0%
94 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Tracing / Smallest size) 1.0%
95 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Film / Large size) 1.0%
96 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Film / Medium size) 1.0%
97 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Film / Small size) 1.0%
98 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-67
(Roll 3 / Film / Smallest size) 1.0%
99 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 0 to 2m) 1.0%
9A Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 2 to 3m) 1.0%
9b Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 3 to 4m) 1.0%
9C Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 4 to 5m) 1.0%
9d Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 5 to 6m) 1.0%
9E Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 6 to 7m) 1.0%
9F Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 7 to 8m) 1.0%
A0 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 8 to 9m) 1.0%
A1 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 9 to 10m) 1.0%
A2 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 10 to 11m) 1.0%
A3 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 11 to 12m) 1.0%
A4 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 12 to 13m) 1.0%
A5 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 13 to 14m) 1.0%
A6 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 14 to 15m) 1.0%
A7 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 15 to 16m) 1.0%
A8 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 16 to 17m) 1.0%
A9 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 17 to 18m) 1.0%

8-41 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
AA Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 18 to 19m) 1.0%
Ab Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 19 to 20m) 1.0%
AC Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 20 to 21m) 1.0%
Ad Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 21 to 22m) 1.0%
AE Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 22 to 23m) 1.0%
AF Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Large size / 23 to 24m) 1.0%
b0 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Medium size) 1.0%
b1 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Small size) 1.0%
b2 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / PPC / Smallest size) 1.0%
b3 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Tracing / Large size) 1.0%
b4 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Tracing / Medium size) 1.0%
b5 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Tracing / Small size) 1.0%
b6 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Tracing / Smallest size) 1.0%
b7 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Film / Large size) 1.0%
b8 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Film / Medium size) 1.0%
b9 Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Film / Small size) 1.0%
bA Fuser Motor speed 0.00 OK -1.0% to 0.05% 8-68
(Roll 4 / Film / Smallest size) 1.0%
bb Image placement 0 NO 0 to 100 0.1mm 8-69
(For 2nd and later prints during multi-print)
bC Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing 20 NO 1 to 30 1 msec 8-69
bd Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and 1 NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-70
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7) ON timing
bE Paper Gate Brake (MC10) ON timing 15 NO 1 to 20 1 msec 8-71
bF Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (PPC) 0 NO 0 or 1 8-72
C0 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Tracing) 1 NO 0 or 1 8-72
C1 Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Film) 1 NO 0 or 1 8-72
C2 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 1) 0 NO 0 to 3 8-73
C3 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 2) 0 NO 0 to 3 8-73
C4 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 3) 0 NO 0 to 3 8-73
C5 Trailing Margin compensation (Roll 4) 0 NO 0 to 3 8-73
C6 Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) 1 NO 0 or 1 8-75
C7 Dot Enhancement Level 3 NO 0 to 3 8-76
C8 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF 1 NO 0 or 1 8-77
timing (Tracing)
C9 Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF 1 NO 0 or 1 8-78
timing (Film)
CA Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias 1 NO 0 or 1 8-79
Cb Developer Bias at 10oC or colder 056 NO 0 to 0FF Hex. 8-80
(When Developer Bias is controlled variably)
CC Developer Bias at 20oC or hotter 04A NO 0 to 0FF Hex. 8-80
(When Developer Bias is controlled variably)

8-42 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.5.5 Explanation for each setting item

(1) Metric or Inch (Item No.00)

It is possible to select either metric (ISO) or inch (ANSI) as the size format of paper.
Selectable setting values are “A0” and “36”.
Select “A0” (Metric) if you use the metric (ISO) paper, and select “36” if you use the inch (ANSI) one.

Setting value Format of paper

A0 Metric (ISO)
36 Inch (ANSI)

(2) Operation of Interface (Item No.01)

It is possible to specify how the Interface operates.

Selectable setting values are “0”, “1” and “2”.

Setting value Interface Operation Setting

0 Interface communicates with both the scanner and the controller
alternately through both Channels A and B.
1 Interface communicates with the scanner through only the
Channel A. (Channel B is not used.)
2 Interface communicates with the controller through only the
Channel B. (Channel A is not used.)

Image scanner
A Channel

PAPER
WIRE-CLEAN DECK
E XP-CLEAN 1 2 3 MF
4
CUT D1
SELECT EXIT
D2
D3 PF
COPY
D4 DENSITY
MENU ←
→
*
ENTER
RESET

3 4

B Channel

Controller

8-43 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Maximum cut length (Item No.02)

It is possible to specify the maximum cut length.

Selectable setting values are “06” and “24”.

Setting value Maximum cut length

06 6m is the maximum cut length.
24 24m is the maximum cut length.

(4) Trailing margin for long print (Item No.03)

This is the setting to provide a trailing margin of 260mm long if the print is 3m or longer.
Selectable setting values are “On” and “OFF”.

Setting value Contents

On If the print is 3m or longer, it is provided with a margin of 260mm long on the
trailing edge.
OFF Margin of 260mm long is not provided even if the print is 3m or longer.

Setting value is OFF Setting value is On

100

100
50

50
0

Direction of
print

3m or longer
print
C

260mm

8-44 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

(5) Special Paper Size Setting (Item No.04)

This is a mode to make it possible for the printer to recognize such special paper size as 900mm,
891mm and 880mm. (Sensor “SZDATA0” is used to detect these special sizes.)
Selectable setting values are “900”, “891” and “880”.
These special roll papers must be installed in the Roll Deck 1 because only it is corresponded to
such special size.
The contents of setting values are as follows.

Setting value Contents

900 If you set a special width of roll paper on the Roll Deck 1, the printer will
recognize it as 900mm wide roll.
891 If you set a special width of roll paper on the Roll Deck 1, the printer will
recognize it as 891mm wide roll.
880 If you set a special width of roll paper on the Roll Deck 1, the printer will
recognize it as 880mm wide roll.

NOTE
Only the Roll Deck 1 has the sensor (SZDATA0) between SZDATA5 (For A0) and SZDATA6
(For 36”) to detect 900mm, 891mm and 880mm wide roll media, while other roll decks has it
between RP_SET (For A3) and SZDATA1 (For A2) to detect B3 roll media.

Sensor arrangement (Roll Decks 2, 3 and 4)

SZDATA6
Center of the roll deck (36" : 914mm)
SZDATA5
(A0 : 841mm)

RP_SET2, 3 and 4 SZDATA4

(A3 : 297mm) (B1 : 728mm)

SZDATA0
(B3 : 364mm)
SZDATA1
(A2 : 420mm)
SZDATA2
(B2 : 515mm)
SZDATA3
(A1 : 594mm)

Sensor arrangement (Roll Deck 1 only)

SZDATA6
Center of the roll deck (36" : 914mm)
SZDATA5
(A0 : 841mm)

RP_SET1 SZDATA4
(A3 : 297mm) (B1 : 728mm)

SZDATA0
(900, 891 and 880mm)
SZDATA1
(A2 : 420mm)
SZDATA2
(B2 : 515mm)
SZDATA3
(A1 : 594mm)

8-45 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

(6) Counting unit of Counter A (Item No.05)

This is a mode to specify the counting unit of the Counter A (Upper Counter).
Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.
If you selected “metric (ISO)”, selectable setting values in this Item No.5 are “0”, “1”, “2” and “3”
If you selected inch (ANSI), selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.
The contents of setting values are as follows.

In case “meter (ISO)” is selected :

Setting value Counting unit
0 Linear counter: 1m / count
1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count
2 Area counter: 1m2 / count
3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count

In case “inch (ANSI)” is selected :

Setting value Counting unit
0 Linear counter: 1foot / count
1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count

NOTE
Before shipment, we have selected “0 (1 foot2/count)” as the counting unit for the inch model
that is destined for USA.
And we have selected “0 (1m/count)” for the metric model that is destined for all other
countries.

(7) Counting unit of Counter B (Item No.06)

This is a mode to specify the counting unit of the Counter B (Lower Counter).
Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.
If you selected “metric (ISO)” there, selectable setting values are “0”, “1”, “2” and “3”
If you selected inch (ANSI), selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.
The contents of setting values are as follows.

In case “meter (ISO)” is selected :

Setting value Counting unit
0 Linear counter: 1m / count
1 Linear counter: 0.1m / count
2 Area counter: 1m2 / count
3 Area counter: 0.1m2 / count

In case “inch (ANSI)” is selected :

Setting value Counting unit
0 Linear counter: 1foot / count
1 Area counter: 1foot2 / count

NOTE
Before shipment, we have selected “1 (1foot2 / count)” as the counting unit for the inch model
that is destined for USA.
And we have selected “2 (1m2 / count)” for the metric model that is destined for all other
countries.

8-46 K77sm8e4 (Ver. H.0)

(8) Operation of Dehumidify Heater (Item No.07)

It is possible to decide when the Dehumidify Heater should operate.

Selectable setting values are “00” and “01”.
The contents of setting values are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Dehumidify Heater operates only when the Power Switch is OFF.
1 Dehumidify Heater operates always.

(9) Cut length of Test Print (Item No.08)

It is possible to specify the length of Test Print.

Selectable setting values rely on “metric / inch setting (Item No.00)”.

In case “meter (ISO)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length
A0 1189mm
A1 841mm
A2 594mm
A3 420mm
A4 197mm
A5 210mm
b1 1030mm
b2 728mm
b3 515mm
b4 364mm
b5 257mm

In case “inch (ANSI)” is selected :

Setting value Cut length
48 48”
44 44”
36 36”
34 34”
30 30”
24 24”
22 22”
18 18”
17 17”
12 12”
11 11”
8.5 8.5”

NOTE
This cut length is effective only when you make Test Print from the User Mode.
Note that this is not effective when you make Test Print from the Service Mode (Sub Mode
No.8).

8-47 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes
(Items No.09, 0A & 0b)

In the items No.09, 0A and 0b, it is possible to change the setting conditions of both [Standard Print
Mode] and the [Special Print Mode], either of which can be selected in the User Modes 8, 9 and A
according to the necessity.

Each 09, 0A and 0b has its own target of setting as follows based on the type of media.

Item No. Target of setting

09 You can change the setting conditions of [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print
Mode] applied when you print with a plain paper.
0A You can change the setting conditions of [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print
Mode] applied when you print with a tracing paper.
0b You can change the setting conditions of [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print
Mode] applied when you print with a film.

Selectable setting values in each mode are “0” or “1”, and the contents are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 You can change the [Standard Setting Value] of each setting item included in
Adjustment Mode 0 and Adjustment Mode 1.
1 You can change the [Special Setting Value] of each setting item included in
Adjustment Mode 0 and Adjustment Mode 1.

[Detailed explanation]

There are many setting items in both the Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode No.4) and the Adjustment
Mode 1 (Sub Mode No.5 : Refer to page 8-81 and after.).
Normally you are able to specify only 1 setting value in each setting item, which is called [Standard
Setting Value].
However, there are many setting items in which you are able to specify not only [Standard Setting
Value] but also 1 more setting value which is called [Special Setting Value].
The following list shows just some examples of setting item that are able to have both [Standard Setting
Value] and [Special Setting Value]. (All items are related with plain paper in this example.)

Item Contents of setting Standard Setting Special Setting

No. Value (Example) Value (Example)
Adjustment Mode 0 10 Fuser temperature (PPC) 170 190
(Sub Mode No.4) 1C Transfer corona current (PPC) 242 265
1F DC component for Separation Corona (PPC) 319 310
33 Fuser Motor speed (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size /0 to 2m) -10 -07
Adjustment Mode 1 0C Image placement (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size) 11.0 9.5
(Sub Mode No.5) 3C Length of trailing margin (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size) 11.0 10.0
6C Length of image (Roll 1 /PPC /Large size) 0.05 -0.15

[Standard Setting Value] normally means the factory setting value.

It has been specified to each setting item before shipment so as to produce the best print quality if only
the user follows our usage specification.
If you select the [Standard Print Mode] in User Modes 8, 9 and A, all of [Standard Setting Values]
become effective and print operation obeys them.

[Special Setting Value] means the setting value specified to each setting item by the service personnel.
In case the user can not follow our usage specification sometimes or always (paper is too thick or too
thin, temperature or humidity is too high or too low, and etc.), the print quality may be not satisfactory if
you print with the [Standard Print Mode].
8-48 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)
Please specify the [Special Setting Value] to the necessary setting items optionally in this case, so as to
produce a satisfactory print quality even in such special usage condition.
If you select the [Special Print Mode] in User Modes 8, 9 and A, all of [Special Setting Values] become
effective and print operation obeys them.
(Same value is specified as [Standard Setting Value] and [Special Setting Value] at the time of
shipment.)

NOTE
(1) It is possible to change not only the [Special Setting Value] but also the [Standard Setting
Value] optionally in these setting items No.09, 0A and 0b.
But we do not recommend you to change the [Standard Setting Value] as it is the best
factory setting.
If it is necessary to change, please change the [Special Setting Value] as far as possible.

(2) To use these Items No.09, 0A and 0b effectively, you need to know how to specify the
[Standard Setting Value] and the [Special Setting Value] on each setting item, and also
you need to know which setting item is available to specify both setting values.
Please refer to [Operation] on and after the page 8-50 to know how to specify [Standard
Setting Value] and [Special Setting Value].
And to know which setting value is available to have these setting values, refer to the
following ;

[8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-37

[8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-85

Please check the column “Standard / Special setting” in each list.

If “OK” is provided, it is available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and the
[Special Setting Value] to that setting item.
If “NO”, only the [Standard Setting Value] can be specified.

(3) If you select the [Standard Print Mode], print operation obeys all of [Standard Setting
Values].
If you select the [Special Print Mode], print operation obeys all of [Special Setting Values].
You can switch between [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print Mode] in the User
Modes 8, 9, A.
Refer to the following pages.

[8.2.8 User Mode 8] (Page 8-173) When a plain paper is used.

[8.2.9 User Mode 9] (Page 8-177) When a tracing paper is used.
[8.2.10 User Mode A] (Page 8-181) When a film is used.

8-49 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

As an example, we will introduce how to specify the [Special Setting Value] to some setting item that is
related with the “plain paper”.

1) Indicate the Item Number “09”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
Please indicate “0A” or “0b” when you will specify [Standard Setting Value] or [Special Setting
Value] to the setting value related with the “tracing paper” or “film”.

2) Press the [ ENTER ] Key.

The setting value on the 6th digits flashes and it becomes possible to change the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-50 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

3) Indicate the setting value “1” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you will change and specify the [Standard Setting Value], indicate “0” this time.

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value “1”.

The setting value “1” stops flashing.
It becomes possible to specify the [Special Setting Value] to each setting item by this operation.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-51 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

5) Pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key, indicate the Item Number on which you would like to specify the
[Special Setting Value].

Example : We will specify the [Special Setting Value] to “Fuser temperature (PPC)”
Indicate its Item Number “10”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
Refer to the following pages to know which setting value is available to have both [Standard
Setting Value] and [Special Setting Value].

[8.1.5.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-37

[8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-85

Please check the column “Standard / Special setting” in each list.

If “OK” is provided, it is available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and the
[Special Setting Value] to that setting item.
If “NO”, only the [Standard Setting Value] can be specified.

6) Press the [ ENTER ] Key.

The setting value on the 6th digits flashes and it becomes possible to change the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-52 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

 7) Pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key, indicate the setting value which you would like to specify as the
[Special Setting Value].

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to specify the selected setting value as the [Special Setting Value].
The setting value stops flashing when it is decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
You will not lose the [Standard Setting Value] even if you specify the [Special Setting Value].

9) If required, select another Item Number and specify the [Special Setting Value] in the same way.
It is possible to specify the [Special Setting Value] to as many setting items as you need.

10) Cancel the Service Mode.

8-53 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(11) Fusing temperature (Items No.10, 11 & 12)

It is possible to change the fusing temperature.

The setting unit is “degree centigrade”, and the adjustment range is from 150 to 190.
Each Item Number has the target of setting based on the type of media as follows.

Item No. Target of setting

09 Fusing temperature applied when you print with a plain paper.
0A Fusing temperature applied when you print with a tracing paper.
0b Fusing temperature applied when you print with a film.

NOTE
These Item No.10, 11, and 12 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and the
[Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09, 0A
& 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-54 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(12) LED strobe time for Main Pixel (Item No.13)

It is possible to adjust the strobe time of LED Head.

This setting is effective for the Main Pixel of printed image.
The adjustment unit is “1micro second”, and the adjustment range is from 0 to 42micro seconds.
Main Pixels get darker if you increase the setting value.

NOTE
(1) When KIPCON E or KIP2000 Series Scanner is connected to the KIP8000 Printer, the
image density of normal print will not change even if you change the LED strobe time in
this item No.13, because these devices has a priority against the printer to decide the LED
strobe time through a density command. (Only Test Print density is changed in this case.)
Please adjust the LED strobe time in case you wish to change the image density but it is
unable to adjust it from the connected outer device.

(2) Please read [REFERENCE] on the next page as for the Main Pixel.

(13) LED strobe time for Supplemental Pixel (Item No.14)

It is possible to adjust the strobe time of LED Head.

This setting is effective for the Supplemental Pixel of printed image.
The setting unit is “1%”, and the adjustment range is from 0 to 50%.
The meaning of setting value is “X% of strobe time against [LED strobe time for Main Pixel].
The Supplemental Pixel gets darker if you increase the setting value.

Setting value : 10 Setting value : 25 Setting value : 50

(10% of strobe time (25%) (50%)
against Main Pixel)

Print image Print image Print image

NOTE
(1) When KIPCON E or KIP2000 Series Scanner is connected to the KIP8000 Printer, the
density command sent from these devices will become a basis to decide the LED strobe
time for the Supplemental Image.
But if you connect some special outer device and it can not send the density command,
the basis for the decision is [LED strobe time for Main Pixel] decided in the above item
No.13

(2) Please read [REFERENCE] on the next page as for the Supplemental Pixel

(3) The image quality will become worse if you increase the setting value so much.
The best LED strobe time for the Supplemental Pixel is about 20% against Main Pixel.

8-55 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

 Reference

Normally the KIP8000 Printer makes 400 times of image exposure against the vertical
direction as its resolution is 400DPI. Image pixels created by this normal timing is called
[Main Pixel].
When a certain image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed, however, the KIP8000 will make
additional image exposure between Main Pixels only for the vertical direction. This additional
image exposure is completed within a very short time. The image pixel created by this process
is called [Supplemental Pixel].

Normal image pattern In case of a certain

image pattern

Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels
Main Pixels

Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.
When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line, for example, the
diagonal one looks not clear and not smooth although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear
and smooth.
This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical /
horizontal one.
If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel, diagonal line comes to look smoother and
clearer.

No Supplemental Pixel Supplemental Pixels are provided.

Direction of
print

Print image Print image

(Not clear and not smooth) (Clear and smooth)

8-56 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(14) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (PPC) (Item No.15)

It is possible to decide when both the Separation Corona and the Pre-Transfer LED are turned OFF
during the print cycle.
This setting is applied when you print with a plain paper.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF normally.
1 When you use the plain paper, both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED
turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing.
For tracing paper and film, they turn OFF normally.

NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of the print if you use a thick and strongly
curled plain paper.
You may be able to fix this problem if you select the setting value “1”.
(Transfer defect means that the toner remains on the Drum not transferred onto the print
media.)

Separation Corona

Pre-Transfer LED

8-57 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(15) Pre-Transfer LED ON / OFF (Item No.16)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Pre-Transfer LED turns ON during the print cycle.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Pre-Transfer LED does not turn ON during the print cycle.
1 Pre-Transfer LED turns ON during the print cycle.

Pre-Transfer LED

(16) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (PPC) (Item No.17)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.
This setting is effective when you print with a plain paper.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Separation Lamp does not light during the print cycle.
1 Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.

Separation Lamp

8-58 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(17) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Tracing) (Item No.18)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.
This setting is effective when you print with a tracing paper.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Separation Lamp does not light during the print cycle.
1 Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.

Separation Lamp

8-59 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(18) Developer Bias (Item No.19)

It is possible to adjust the Developer Bias supplied to the Developer Roller.

The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF.
The Developer Bias decreases (minus side) if you increase the setting value.

Developer Roller

NOTE
(1) Make sure to adjust the Developer Bias in this item No.19.
Do not adjust the Bias moving the volumes on the Bias Board, as they have been
adjusted and locked in the factory.

(2) There are not only the Developer Roller but also Regulation Roller and Toner Supply
Roller in the Developer Unit, which are also supplied with the individual voltages.
The difference of voltage between the Developer Roller and each of these rollers should
be also same.
Once you change the Developer Bias, therefore, the voltages supplied to these rollers are
automatically changed same degree.

8-60 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(19) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Image Corona) (Item No.1A)

It is possible to adjust the intensity of current that flows on the Corona Wires of Image Corona.
The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF.
Drum will be charged more negative as more current flows on the Image Corona Wires if you increase
the setting value.

Image Corona Wires

(20) Intensity of current on the Grid Plate (Image Corona) (Item No.1b)

It is possible to adjust the intensity of current that flows on the Grid Plate of Image Corona.
The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500.
Drum will be charged more negative as more current flows on the Grid Plate if you increase the setting
value.

Grid Plate

8-61 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(21) Intensity of current on the Corona Wire (Transfer Corona) (Item No.1C, 1d & 1E)

It is possible to adjust the intensity of current that flows on the Corona Wire of Transfer Corona.
The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500.
Toner will tend to be more attracted onto the media as more current flows on the Transfer Corona
Wires if you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target media.

Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media

1C Plain paper
1d Tracing paper
1E Film

Transfer Corona Wire

(22) DC component (Separation Corona) (Item No.1F, 20 & 21)

It is possible to adjust the DC component that is supplied to the Separation Corona.

The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 500.
More amount of negative electric charges will be provided if you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media

1F Plain paper
20 Tracing paper
21 Film

Separation Corona

8-62 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(23) Paper Feed Motor Speed (Item No.22, 23, 24, 25 & 26)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Paper Feed Motor by changing the motor clock.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media source.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media source

22 Bypass feed
23 Roll 1
24 Roll 2
25 Roll 3
26 Roll 4

8-63 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(24) Fuser Motor Speed (Bypass feed) (Items from No.27 to 32)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Fuser Motor by changing the motor clock.
This setting is effective when the print media is fed from the Bypass Feeder.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size

27 Plain paper Large
28 Plain paper Medium
29 Plain paper Small
2A Plain paper Smallest
2b Tracing paper Large
2C Tracing paper Medium
2d Tracing paper Small
2E Tracing paper Smallest
2F Film Large
30 Film Medium
31 Film Small
32 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 27 to 32 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-64 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(25) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 1) (Items from No.33 to 54)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Fuser Motor by changing the motor clock.
This setting is effective when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 1.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
And in case of the large size of plain paper, you can specify the motor speed for each range of media
length.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item Media type Media size Item Media type Media size
No. (Range of media length) No. (Range of media length)
33 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 44 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
34 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 45 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m)
35 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 46 Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
36 Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 47 Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
37 Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 48 Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
38 Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 49 Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
39 Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 4A Plain paper Medium
3A Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 4b Plain paper Small
3b Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 4C Plain paper Smallest
3C Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 4d Tracing paper Large
3d Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 4E Tracing paper Medium
3E Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 4F Tracing paper Small
3F Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 50 Tracing paper Smallest
40 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 51 Film Large
41 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 52 Film Medium
42 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 53 Film Small
43 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 54 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 33 to 54 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-65 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(26) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 2) (Items from No.55 to 76)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Fuser Motor by changing the motor clock.
This setting is effective when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 2.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
And in case of the large size of plain paper, you can specify the motor speed for each range of media
length.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item Media type Media size Item Media type Media size
No. (Range of media length) No. (Range of media length)
55 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 66 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
56 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 67 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m)
57 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 68 Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
58 Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 69 Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
59 Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 6A Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
5A Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 6b Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
5b Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 6C Plain paper Medium
5C Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 6d Plain paper Small
5d Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 6E Plain paper Smallest
5E Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 6F Tracing paper Large
5F Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 70 Tracing paper Medium
60 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 71 Tracing paper Small
61 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 72 Tracing paper Smallest
62 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 73 Film Large
63 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 74 Film Medium
64 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 75 Film Small
65 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 76 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 55 to 76 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-66 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(27) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 3) (Items from No.77 to 98)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Fuser Motor by changing the motor clock.
This setting is effective when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 3.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
And in case of the large size of plain paper, you can specify the motor speed for each range of media
length.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item Media type Media size Item Media type Media size
No. (Range of media length) No. (Range of media length)
77 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) 88 Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
78 Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) 89 Plain paper Large (19 to 20m)
79 Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) 8A Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
7A Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) 8b Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
7b Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) 8C Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
7C Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) 8d Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
7d Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) 8E Plain paper Medium
7E Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) 8F Plain paper Small
7F Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) 90 Plain paper Smallest
80 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) 91 Tracing paper Large
81 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) 92 Tracing paper Medium
82 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) 93 Tracing paper Small
83 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) 94 Tracing paper Smallest
84 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) 95 Film Large
85 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) 96 Film Medium
86 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) 97 Film Small
87 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) 98 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 77 to 98 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-67 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(28) Fuser Motor Speed (Roll 4) (Items from No.99 to bA)

It is possible to adjust the rotational speed of Fuser Motor by changing the motor clock.
This setting is effective when the print media is fed from the Roll Deck 4.
The adjustment unit is “0.05%”, and the adjustment range is from -1.0% to +1.0%.
The Paper Feed Motor rotates faster when you increase the setting value.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
And in case of the large size of plain paper, you can specify the motor speed for each range of media
length.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item Media type Media size Item Media type Media size
No. (Range of media length) No. (Range of media length)
99 Plain paper Large (0 to 2m) AA Plain paper Large (18 to 19m)
9A Plain paper Large (2 to 3m) Ab Plain paper Large (19 to 20m)
9b Plain paper Large (3 to 4m) Ac Plain paper Large (20 to 21m)
9C Plain paper Large (4 to 5m) Ad Plain paper Large (21 to 22m)
9d Plain paper Large (5 to 6m) AE Plain paper Large (22 to 23m)
9E Plain paper Large (6 to 7m) AF Plain paper Large (23 to 24m)
9F Plain paper Large (7 to 8m) b0 Plain paper Medium
A0 Plain paper Large (8 to 9m) b1 Plain paper Small
A1 Plain paper Large (9 to 10m) b2 Plain paper Smallest
A2 Plain paper Large (10 to 11m) b3 Tracing paper Large
A3 Plain paper Large (11 to 12m) b4 Tracing paper Medium
A4 Plain paper Large (12 to 13m) b5 Tracing paper Small
A5 Plain paper Large (13 to 14m) b6 Tracing paper Smallest
A6 Plain paper Large (14 to 15m) b7 Film Large
A7 Plain paper Large (15 to 16m) b8 Film Medium
A8 Plain paper Large (16 to 17m) b9 Film Small
A9 Plain paper Large (17 to 18m) bA Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 99 to bA are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-68 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(29) Image placement (For 2nd and later copies during multi-print) (Item No.bb)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

This setting is effective when you take a multi-print with a roll media, and applied on the 2nd
and later prints.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 100 (0 to 10.0mm).
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the leading edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes narrower.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

(30) Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) ON timing (Item No.bC)

It is possible to adjust when the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) should operate.
The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 30 milliseconds.
The ON timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) can be decided taking the ON timing of Paper Gate
Clutch (MC5) as the standard.
If you select “20 milliseconds” as the setting value in this No.bC, the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) operates
(ON) 20 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) operates (ON).

Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10)

Paper Feed Clutch

(MC6)

8-69 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(31) Roll Paper Feed Clutches (MC1 to MC4) and Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7)
ON timing (Item No.bd)

It is possible to adjust when the Roll Paper Feed Clutches 1, 2, 3 and 4 (MC1 to MC4) and the Bypass
Feed Clutch (MC7) should operate.
The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 20 milliseconds.
The ON timing of these clutches (MC1, MC2, MC3, MC4 and MC7) can be decided taking the ON
timing of Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) as the standard.
If you select “10 milliseconds” as the setting value in this No.bd, these clutches operate (ON)
10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Feed Clutch (MC6) operates (ON).

Bypass Feed Clutch

(MC7)

Roll paper Feed Clutch 1

(MC1)

Roll paper Feed Clutch 2

(MC2)

Roll paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper Feed Clutch

(MC3) (MC6)

Roll Paper Feed Clutch 4 (MC4)

8-70 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(32) Paper Gata Brake (MC10) ON timing (Item No.bE)

It is possible to adjust when the Paper Gate Brake (MC10) should operate.
The setting unit is 1 millisecond, and the setting range is from 1 to 20 milliseconds.
The ON timing of Paper Gate Brake (MC10) can be decided taking the OFF timing of Paper Gate
Clutch (MC5) as the standard.
If you select “10 milliseconds” as the setting value in this No.bE, the Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
operates (ON) 10 milliseconds earlier than the Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) operates (OFF).

Paper Gate Clutch (MC5) & Paper Gate Brake (MC10)

8-71 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(33) Sub Separation Blower ON / OFF (Items No. bF, C0 & C1)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Sub Separation Blower operates during the print cycle.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Sub Separation Blower does not operate during the print cycle.
1 Sub Separation Blower operates during the print cycle.

Each Item No. has its own target for media type.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target media

bF Plain paper
C0 Tracing paper
C1 Film

Sub Separation Blowers

(BL12, BL13, BL14, BL15 & BL16)

NOTE
If the media is not separated well from the Drum and the Separation Area Jam (J-12) occurs
often, you may fix this problem if you make the Separation Blowers operate during the print
cycle.
But it may be required to clean the inside machine occasionally because the toner may fly in
the machine when the Separation Blower operate.

8-72 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(34) Trailing Margin Compensation (Items from No. C2 to C5)

It is possible to compensate the length of trailing margin based on the diameter of roll media.
Selectable setting values are 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Setting Amount of compensation

value 1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 8/8
0 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm
1 0.0mm +0.2mm +0.4mm +0.6mm +0.8mm +1.0mm +1.2mm +1.4mm
2 0.0mm +0.4mm +0.8mm +1.2mm +1.6mm +2.0mm +2.4mm +2.8mm
3 0.0mm +0.6mm +1.2mm +1.8mm +2.4mm +3.0mm +3.6mm +4.2mm

Each Item No. has its own target for Roll Deck.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Target Roll Deck

C2 Roll 1
C3 Roll 2
C4 Roll 3
C5 Roll4

[Detailed explanation]

If you print with a thick (new) roll media and a narrow (near empty) one, the lengths of trailing margin
may be a little different between 2 printouts. This is because the diameters of these roll media are
different. Generally, the trailing margin will be shorter if you print with a narrower roll media.

Thick roll media Narrow roll media

Difference of trailing margin

In the items from C2 to C5 it is possible to make the trailing margin always even regardless of the
diameter of roll media.
You can select the best level of compensation by changing the setting value.
See the next page.

8-73 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

The diameter of roll media is divided into 8 levels as 8/8 to 1/8 (Level is decided according to the clock
sent from the Paper Feed Clock Sensor.). 8/8 is the thickest (like a new roll media) and 1/8 is the
narrowest.
When the compensation is done, bigger compensation is done (namely longer trailing margin is
provided) for narrower level.
And also, bigger compensation is done if you select a larger setting value. (If you select “0”, no
compensation is done.)

Diameter Level Amount of compensation

of roll media Setting value : 0 Setting value : 1 Setting value : 2 Setting value : 3
8/8 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm 0.0mm
7/8 0.0mm +0.2mm +0.4mm +0.6mm
6/8 0.0mm +0.4mm +0.8mm +1.2mm
5/8 0.0mm +0.6mm +1.2mm +1.8mm
4/8 0.0mm +0.8mm +1.6mm +2.4mm
3/8 0.0mm +1.0mm +2.0mm +3.0mm
2/8 0.0mm +1.2mm +2.4mm +3.6mm
1/8 0.0mm +1.4mm +2.8mm +4.2mm

Amount of compensation
Trailing margin is same.

NOTE
The best amount of compensation differs according to the thickness of paper.

8-74 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(35) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (Item No.C6)

It is possible to decide whether or not the Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.
This setting is effective when you print with a film.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Separation Lamp does not light during the print cycle.
1 Separation Lamp lights during the print cycle.

Separation Lamp

NOTE
(1) In the factory, we select the setting value “0” (Lamp does not light) as the default setting
only for the film.
But if you use some specific kind of film, you may be able to gain a better print image if
you make the Separation Lamp light.

(2) Selection of Separation Lamp ON / OFF only for film can be done also in the User
Mode B.
Refer to [8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])] on the page 8-167.
ON or OFF finally you selected in either Service Mode or User Mode is effective as neither
of them has the priority of setting.
(Transfer Support LED is the part name for the user, and it means Separation Lamp.)

8-75 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(36) Dot Enhancement Level (Item No.C7)

If an isolated small dot image (like 1 dot) looks weak, it is possible to make it clearer by the Dot
Enhancement Process.
Select any of 4 kinds of Dot Enhancement Levels.

Setting value Enhancement level Contents

0 Dot Enhancement Level 0 Not enhanced.
1 Dot Enhancement Level 1 Enhanced.
2 Dot Enhancement Level 2 More enhanced.
3 Dot Enhancement Level 3 Most enhanced.

Not enhanced Enhanced

NOTE
Selection of Dot Enhancement Level can be done also in the User Mode B.
Refer to [8.2.11 User Mode B (Enhancement of isolated dot image)] on the page 8-193.
The Dot Enhancement Level finally you selected in either Service Mode or User Mode is
effective as neither of them has the priority of setting.

8-76 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(37) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Tracing) (Item No.C8)

It is possible to decide when both the Separation Corona and the Pre-Transfer LED are turned OFF
during the print cycle.
This setting is applied when you print with a tracing paper.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF normally.
1 When the tracing paper is used, both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED
turn OFF 0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing.
For tracing paper and film, they turn OFF normally.

NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of the print if you use a thick and strongly
curled tracing paper.
You may be able to fix this problem if you select the setting value “1”.
(Transfer defect means that the toner remains on the Drum not transferred onto the print
media.)

Separation Corona

Pre-Transfer LED

8-77 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(38) Pre-Transfer LED / Separation Corona OFF timing (Film) (Item No.C9)

It is possible to decide when both the Separation Corona and the Pre-Transfer LED are turned OFF
during the print cycle.
This setting is applied when you print with a film.
Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”, and the contents of them are as follows.

Setting value Contents

0 Both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF normally.
1 When the film is used, both Separation Corona and Pre-Transfer LED turn OFF
0.12 seconds earlier than the normal timing.
For tracing paper and film, they turn OFF normally.

NOTE
Transfer defect may occur on the trailing edge of the print if you use a thick and strongly
curled film.
You may be able to fix this problem if you select the setting value “1”.
(Transfer defect means that the toner remains on the Drum not transferred onto the print
media.)

Separation Corona

Pre-Transfer LED

8-78 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(39) Constant / Variable control of Developer Bias (Item No.CA)

It is possible to control the Developer Bias constantly or variably.

Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.

Setting value Control of Developer Bias

0 Constant control (Bias is always constant regardless of the temperature.)
1 Variable control (Bias varies according to the temperature of inside machine.)

Constant control
Temperature (oC)

Developer Bias is always constant.

(Decided in the Item No.19)
Developer Bias (V)

Variable control
10 20 Temperature (oC)
Developer Bias (V)

Developer Bias Level for 20oC or hotter

(Decided in the Item No.CC)

Developer Bias varies between 10 to 20oC.

Developer Bias Level for 10oC or colder

(Decided in the Item No.Cb)

Reference

Density of print tends to become lighter if the temperature of inside machine is colder.
So it is better for getting an even image density to make the Developer Bias higher if the
temperature is colder.
You will specify each Developer Bias Level for the cold situation (10oC or colder) in the Item
No.Cb and for the hot situation (20oC or hotter) in the Item No.CC.
Between 10oC and 20oC, the Developer Bias is automatically calculated considering the
Developer Bias Levels specified in these Item No.

NOTE
Default setting value is “1” (Variable control) and you do not have to change in the usual case.
Please select “0” (Constant control) only when you check and adjust the BIAS PCB.

8-79 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

(40) Developer Bias at 10oC or colder
(When Developer Bias is controlled variably) (Item No.Cb)

It is possible to change the Developer Bias Level for the cold situation (10oC or colder), which is applied
when the Developer Bias is controlled variably.
If the temperature of inside machine is 10oC or colder, the Developer Bias is kept constantly according
to the value specified in this Item No.Cb.
And between 10oC and 20oC, the Developer Bias is automatically calculated considering this level.
The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF.
If you increase the value, the density of print tends to get darker.

10 20 Temperature (oC)

Developer Bias (V) Developer Bias Level for the cold situation
(10oC or colder)

(41) Developer Bias at 20oC or hotter

(When Developer Bias is controlled variably) (Item No.CC)

It is possible to change the Developer Bias Level for the hot situation (20oC or hotter), which is applied
when the Developer Bias is controlled variably.
If the temperature of inside machine is 20oC or hotter, the Developer Bias is kept constantly according
to the value specified in this Item No.CC.
And between 10oC and 20oC, the Developer Bias is automatically calculated considering this level.
The setting unit is hexadecimal, and the setting range is from 000 to 0FF.
If you increase the value, the density of print tends to get darker.

10 20 Temperature (oC)

Developer Bias Level for the hot situation

Developer Bias (V) (20oC or colder)

8-80 K77sm8e5 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5)

8.1.6.1 Function
It is possible to adjust several setting items.
Please refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-85 as for the brief information of the
setting items.
And please refer to [8.1.6.5 Explanation for each setting item] on and after the page 8-92 as for the
details for the setting items.

8.1.6.2 Indication on the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “5” which is the Sub Mode Number of “Adjustment Mode 1”.
2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number.
4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Item Number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1

Item Number

Setting Value

8-81 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.6.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “5” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) 2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Item Number presently selected.
As you can indicate another Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Item Number of which setting you would like to change.
Please refer to [8.1.6.4 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-85 to know the contents of
setting.

Example : We will adjust “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size).
Its Item Number is “6C”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number to adjust the “Length of image for Roll (Roll 1 / PPC / Large size)”

8-82 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

3) After selecting the necessary Item Number, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits starts flashing and it becomes possible to
change the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

The setting value flashes.

4) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-83 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the new setting value.
The setting value stops flashing after the decision.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key when the setting value is flashing (before the decision), new
setting value is not decided and the old setting value is recovered.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

(Old setting value is recovered.)

8-84 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.6.4 Setting item list
Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
00 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(PPC / Large size)
01 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(PPC / Medium size)
02 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(PPC / Small size)
03 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(PPC / Smallest size)
04 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Tracing / Large size)
05 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Tracing / Medium size)
06 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Tracing / Small size)
07 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Tracing / Smallest size)
08 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Film / Large size)
09 Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Film / Medium size)
0A Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Film / Small size)
0b Image placement for cut sheet media 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-92
(Film / Smallest size)
0C Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(PPC / Large size)
0d Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(PPC / Medium size)
0E Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(PPC / Small size)
0F Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(PPC / Smallest size)
10 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Tracing / Large size)
11 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Tracing / Medium size)
12 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Tracing / Small size)
13 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Tracing / Smallest size)
14 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Film / Large size)
15 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Film / Medium size)
16 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Film / Small size)
17 Image placement for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-93
(Film / Smallest size)

8-85 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
18 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(PPC / Large size)
19 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(PPC / Medium size)
1A Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(PPC / Small size)
1b Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(PPC / Smallest size)
1C Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Tracing / Large size)
1d Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Tracing / Medium size)
1E Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Tracing / Small size)
1F Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Tracing / Smallest size)
20 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Film / Large size)
21 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Film / Medium size)
22 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Film / Small size)
23 Image placement for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-94
(Film / Smallest size)
24 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(PPC / Large size)
25 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(PPC / Medium size)
26 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(PPC / Small size)
27 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(PPC / Smallest size)
28 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Tracing / Large size)
29 Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Tracing / Medium size)
2A Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Tracing / Small size)
2b Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Tracing / Smallest size)
2C Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Film / Large size)
2d Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Film / Medium size)
2E Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Film / Small size)
2F Image placement for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-95
(Film / Smallest size)

8-86 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
30 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(PPC / Large size)
31 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(PPC / Medium size)
32 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(PPC / Small size)
33 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(PPC / Smallest size)
34 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Tracing / Large size)
35 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Tracing / Medium size)
36 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Tracing / Small size)
37 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Tracing / Smallest size)
38 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Large size)
39 Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Medium size)
3A Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Small size)
3b Image placement for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-96
(Film / Smallest size)
3C Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Large size)
3d Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Medium size)
3E Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Small size)
3F Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(PPC / Smallest size)
40 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Tracing / Large size)
41 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Tracing / Medium size)
42 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Tracing / Small size)
43 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Tracing / Smallest size)
44 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Film / Large size)
45 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Film / Medium size)
46 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Film / Small size)
47 Trailing margin for Roll 1 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-97
(Film / Smallest size)

8-87 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
48 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(PPC / Large size)
49 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(PPC / Medium size)
4A Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(PPC / Small size)
4b Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(PPC / Smallest size)
4C Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Tracing / Large size)
4d Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Tracing / Medium size)
4E Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Tracing / Small size)
4F Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Tracing / Smallest size)
50 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Film / Large size)
51 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Film / Medium size)
52 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Film / Small size)
53 Trailing margin for Roll 2 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-98
(Film / Smallest size)
54 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(PPC / Large size)
55 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(PPC / Medium size)
56 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(PPC / Small size)
57 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(PPC / Smallest size)
58 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Tracing / Large size)
59 Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Tracing / Medium size)
5A Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Tracing / Small size)
5b Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Tracing / Smallest size)
5C Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Film / Large size)
5d Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Film / Medium size)
5E Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Film / Small size)
5F Trailing margin for Roll 3 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-99
(Film / Smallest size)

8-88 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
60 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(PPC / Large size)
61 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(PPC / Medium size)
62 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(PPC / Small size)
63 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(PPC / Smallest size)
64 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Tracing / Large size)
65 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Tracing / Medium size)
66 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Tracing / Small size)
67 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Tracing / Smallest size)
68 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Film / Large size)
69 Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Film / Medium size)
6A Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Film / Small size)
6b Trailing margin for Roll 4 100 OK 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-100
(Film / Smallest size)
6C Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(PPC / Large size)
6d Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(PPC / Medium size)
6E Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(PPC / Small size)
6F Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(PPC / Smallest size)
70 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Tracing / Large size)
71 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Tracing / Medium size)
72 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Tracing / Small size)
73 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Tracing / Smallest size)
74 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Film / Large size)
75 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Film / Medium size)
76 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Film / Small size)
77 Length of image for Roll 1 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-101
(Film / Smallest size)

8-89 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
78 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(PPC / Large size)
79 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(PPC / Medium size)
7A Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(PPC / Small size)
7b Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(PPC / Smallest size)
7C Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Tracing / Large size)
7d Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Tracing / Medium size)
7E Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Tracing / Small size)
7F Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Tracing / Smallest size)
80 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Film / Large size)
81 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Film / Medium size)
82 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Film / Small size)
83 Length of image for Roll 2 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-102
(Film / Smallest size)
84 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(PPC / Large size)
85 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(PPC / Medium size)
86 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(PPC / Small size)
87 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(PPC / Smallest size)
88 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Tracing / Large size)
89 Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Tracing / Medium size)
8A Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Tracing / Small size)
8b Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Tracing / Smallest size)
8C Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Film / Large size)
8d Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Film / Medium size)
8E Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Film / Small size)
8F Length of image for Roll 3 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-103
(Film / Smallest size)

8-90 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

Item Contents of the setting Default Standard / Adjustable Unit of Refer
No. value Special setting Range setting to
value page;
90 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(PPC / Large size)
91 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(PPC / Medium size)
92 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(PPC / Small size)
93 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(PPC / Smallest size)
94 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Tracing / Large size)
95 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Tracing / Medium size)
96 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Tracing / Small size)
97 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Tracing / Smallest size)
98 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Film / Large size)
99 Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Film / Medium size)
9A Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Film / Small size)
9b Length of image for Roll 4 0.00 OK -1.00 to 1.00 0.01% 8-104
(Film / Smallest size)
9C Trailing margin for cut sheet media 100 NO 0 to 200 0.1mm 8-105
(Large size)

8-91 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.6.5 Explanation for each setting item
(1) Image placement for cut sheet media (Items from No.00 to 0b)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

These settings are effective when you print with a cut sheet media.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the trailing edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes wider.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
00 Plain paper Large 06 Tracing paper Small
01 Plain paper Medium 07 Tracing paper Smallest
02 Plain paper Small 08 Film Large
03 Plain paper Smallest 09 Film Medium
04 Tracing paper Large 0A Film Small
05 Tracing paper Medium 0b Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 00 to 0b are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-92 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Image placement for Roll 1 (Items from No.0C to 17)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 1.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the trailing edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes wider.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
0C Plain paper Large 12 Tracing paper Small
0d Plain paper Medium 13 Tracing paper Smallest
0E Plain paper Small 14 Film Large
0F Plain paper Smallest 15 Film Medium
10 Tracing paper Large 16 Film Small
11 Tracing paper Medium 17 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 0C to 17 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-93 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Image placement for Roll 2 (Items from No.18 to 23)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 2.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the trailing edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes wider.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
18 Plain paper Large 1E Tracing paper Small
19 Plain paper Medium 1F Tracing paper Smallest
1A Plain paper Small 20 Film Large
1b Plain paper Smallest 21 Film Medium
1C Tracing paper Large 22 Film Small
1d Tracing paper Medium 23 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 18 to 23 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-94 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(4) Image placement for Roll 3 (Items from No.24 to 2F)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 3.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the trailing edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes wider.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
24 Plain paper Large 2A Tracing paper Small
25 Plain paper Medium 2b Tracing paper Smallest
26 Plain paper Small 2C Film Large
27 Plain paper Smallest 2d Film Medium
28 Tracing paper Large 2E Film Small
29 Tracing paper Medium 2F Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 24 to 2F are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-95 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(5) Image placement for Roll 4 (Items from No.30 to 3b)

It is possible to adjust the vertical position of print image on the media.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 4.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the whole image is shifted to the trailing edge side, namely the
leading margin on the print becomes wider.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
30 Plain paper Large 36 Tracing paper Small
31 Plain paper Medium 37 Tracing paper Smallest
32 Plain paper Small 38 Film Large
33 Plain paper Smallest 39 Film Medium
34 Tracing paper Large 3A Film Small
35 Tracing paper Medium 3b Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 30 to 3b are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-96 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(6) Trailing margin for Roll 1 (Items from No.3C to 47)

It is possible to adjust the length of margin on the trailing edge of print.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 1.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print comes to have a longer margin.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
3C Plain paper Large 42 Tracing paper Small
3d Plain paper Medium 43 Tracing paper Smallest
3E Plain paper Small 44 Film Large
3F Plain paper Smallest 45 Film Medium
40 Tracing paper Large 46 Film Small
41 Tracing paper Medium 47 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 3C to 47 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-97 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(7) Trailing margin for Roll 2 (Items from No.48 to 53)

It is possible to adjust the length of margin on the trailing edge of print.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 2.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print comes to have a longer margin.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
48 Plain paper Large 4E Tracing paper Small
49 Plain paper Medium 4F Tracing paper Smallest
4A Plain paper Small 50 Film Large
4b Plain paper Smallest 51 Film Medium
4C Tracing paper Large 52 Film Small
4d Tracing paper Medium 53 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 48 to 53 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-98 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(8) Trailing margin for Roll 3 (Items from No.54 to 5F)

It is possible to adjust the length of margin on the trailing edge of print.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 3.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print comes to have a longer margin.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
54 Plain paper Large 5A Tracing paper Small
55 Plain paper Medium 5b Tracing paper Smallest
56 Plain paper Small 5C Film Large
57 Plain paper Smallest 5d Film Medium
58 Tracing paper Large 5E Film Small
59 Tracing paper Medium 5F Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 54 to 5F are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-99 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(9) Trailing margin for Roll 4 (Items from No.60 to 6b)

It is possible to adjust the length of margin on the trailing edge of print.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 4.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm) in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print comes to have a longer margin.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
60 Plain paper Large 66 Tracing paper Small
61 Plain paper Medium 67 Tracing paper Smallest
62 Plain paper Small 68 Film Large
63 Plain paper Smallest 69 Film Medium
64 Tracing paper Large 6A Film Small
65 Tracing paper Medium 6b Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 60 to 6b are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-100 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(10) Length of image for Roll 1 (Items from No.6C to 77)

It is possible to adjust the length of print image.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 1.
The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00% in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print image comes to be longer.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
6C Plain paper Large 72 Tracing paper Small
6d Plain paper Medium 73 Tracing paper Smallest
6E Plain paper Small 74 Film Large
6F Plain paper Smallest 75 Film Medium
70 Tracing paper Large 76 Film Small
71 Tracing paper Medium 77 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 6C to 77 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-101 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(11) Length of image for Roll 2 (Items from No.78 to 83)

It is possible to adjust the length of print image.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 2.
The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00% in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print image comes to be longer.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
78 Plain paper Large 7E Tracing paper Small
79 Plain paper Medium 7F Tracing paper Smallest
7A Plain paper Small 80 Film Large
7b Plain paper Smallest 81 Film Medium
7C Tracing paper Large 82 Film Small
7d Tracing paper Medium 83 Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 78 to 83 are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-102 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(12) Length of image for Roll 3 (Items from No.84 to 8F)

It is possible to adjust the length of print image.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 3.
The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00% in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print image comes to be longer.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
84 Plain paper Large 8A Tracing paper Small
85 Plain paper Medium 8b Tracing paper Smallest
86 Plain paper Small 8C Film Large
87 Plain paper Smallest 8d Film Medium
88 Tracing paper Large 8E Film Small
89 Tracing paper Medium 8F Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 84 to 8F are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-103 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(13) Length of image for Roll 4 (Items from No.90 to 9b)

It is possible to adjust the length of print image.

These settings are effective when you print with a roll media fed from the Roll Deck 4.
The setting unit is 0.01%, and the setting range is from -1.00% to +1.00% in all items.
If you increase the setting value, the print image comes to be longer.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

Exch Item No. has its own target for media type and media size.
Please adjust the proper item.

Item No. Media type Media size Item No. Media type Media size
90 Plain paper Large 96 Tracing paper Small
91 Plain paper Medium 97 Tracing paper Smallest
92 Plain paper Small 98 Film Large
93 Plain paper Smallest 99 Film Medium
94 Tracing paper Large 9A Film Small
95 Tracing paper Medium 9b Film Smallest

NOTE
(1) The meanings of media sizes “large”, “medium”, “small” and “smallest” are as follows.

Metric (Width) Inch (Width)

Large A0 and B1 36”, 34” and 30”
Medium A1 and B2 24” and 22”
Small A2 and B3 18” and 17”
Smallest A3 12” and 11”

(2) Item Numbers from 90 to 9b are available to specify both the [Standard Setting Value] and
the [Special Setting Value].
Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items
No.09, 0A & 0b)] on and after the page 8-48.

8-104 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

(14) Trailing margin for cut sheet media (Large) (Item No.9C)

It is possible to adjust the length of margin on the trailing edge of print.

This setting is effective when you print with a large size of cut sheet media.
The setting unit is 0.1mm, and the setting range is from 0 to 200 (0mm to 20.0mm).
If you increase the setting value, the print comes to have a shorter margin.

Setting value is decreased. Setting value is increased.

NOTE
(1) Media sizes “large” are A0, 36”, 34” and 30”.

(2) The length of trailing margin is adjusted by deleting or adding the image on the trailing
edge area.

8-105 K77sm8e6 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.7 Factory Mode (Sub Mode 6) (Do not use)

8.1.7.1 Function
It is possible to make the printer operate as usual even without any print media.
(If the media is set on any Roll Deck or Bypass Feeder and it is selected as the source of media, the
printer will print as usual using that media.)

NOTE
This function is beneficial only in the machine test on manufacturer’s site.
Do not make any operation in this mode in the service field as it is not beneficial for you.

8.1.7.2 Indication of the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “6” which is the mode number of “Factory Mode”.
4th, 5th and 6th digits from the left indicate the operation status.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Mode number of Factory Mode

Operation status

8-106 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.7.3 Operation
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “6” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Factory Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either “nor” or “run” showing the operation status presently selected.
Select either of them according to your requirement pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.
The meanings of “nor” and “run” are as follows.

Indication Meaning
nor Normal mode
(Print is not available if no media is set.)
run Running mode
(Print is available even if no media is set.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
All you can do in this mode is to switch between Normal Mode and Ruuning Mode.
If you will make the operation of printer, print from the Test Print Mode.

8-107 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.8 Error Check Masking Mode (Sub Mode 7)

8.1.8.1 Function
You can make it possible for the printer to ignore several errors by masking them in this mode.
The following list shows each Mask Code and its target to mask (Name of error and Error Code).

Mask Code Name of error Error Code

00 Fuser Temperature Rising Error E-01
01 Fuser Over Temperature Error E-02
02 Fuser Thermostat Error E-21
03 Paper Feed Motor Error E-13
04 Drum Motor Error E-05
05 Fuser Motor Error E-14
06 Developer Positioning Motor Error E-49
07 Cutter Motor Error E-07
08 Counter A Error E-06
09 Counter B Error E-06
0A Wire Cleaning Error E-16
0b LED Head Cleaning Error E-23
0C Unused
0d Unused
0E Unused
0F Unused
10 Unused
11 Unused
12 Unused
13 Unused
14 Unused
15 Unused
16 Unused
17 Unused
18 Unused
19 Unused
1A Unused
1b Unused
1C Unused
1d Unused
1E Unused
1F Unused

8-108 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.8.2 Indication of the Operation Panel
The 1st digit from the left indicates “7” which is the Sub Mode number of “Error Check Masking Mode”.
2nd and 3rd digits from the left indicate the Mask Code presently selected.
5th and 6th digits indicate the status (either “-L” or “-H”) showing whether or not the selected item is
masked.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Error Check Masking Mode

Mask Code

Status

8-109 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.8.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “7” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Error Check Masking Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) 2nd and 3ed digits from the left indicate the Mask Code presently selected.
As you can indicate another Mask Code pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement),
indicate the Mask Code of which target item you would like to mask.
Please refer to the list on the page 8-108 to know each Mask Code and its target item.

Example : We will mask the “Cutter Motor Error”.

Its Mask Code is “07”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Mask Code of “Cutter Motor Error”

8-110 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) “-L” is indicated on the 5th and the 6th digits showing that the target item of the selected Mask
Code is not masked presently.
Press the [ ENTER ] Key to mask the target item.
“-H” is indicated when masked.
Even if this error is detected during the later printing, it will be ignored and the printer will
continue to print.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
It is possible to mask not only one item but also some items at once.

4) You have 3 ways to cancel error check masking.

1. Indicate “-L” again pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.

2. Cancel the Service Mode.
3. Turn off the machine.

8-111 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.9 Test Print Mode (Sub Mode 8)

8.1.9.1 Function
Even if no output device is connected to the printer, it is possible to print out the test pattern that is
memorized in the circuit.
You can change several settings as number of print, print size, media source and test pattern according
to the necessity.

8.1.9.2 Indication of the Operation Panel

The 1st digit from the left indicates “8” which is the Sub Mode number of “Test Print Mode”.
The 2nd digit indicates any Setting Mode Number (from 0 to 8) presently selected.
4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate the setting value of the selected Setting Mode.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode

Setting Mode Number

Setting value

8-112 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.9.3 Operation (Example of usage)
1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “8” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Test Print Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Setting Mode Number presently selected.
As you can indicate another Setting Mode Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Setting Mode Number of which setting value you would like to change.

Please refer to the following list to know the contents of each Setting Mode Number.
And please refer to the reference page shown in the list to know the detail of each Setting
Mode.

Example : We will change the number of print so we select “Print Number Setting Mode”.
Its Setting Mode Number is “1”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting Mode Number of “Print Number Setting Mode”

Setting Mode No. Contents of setting Reference page

0 Print Mode 8-117
1 Print Number Setting Mode 8-118
2 Test Pattern Selection Mode 8-119
3 Media Source Selection Mode 8-120
4 Cut Length Selection Mode 8-121
5 Media Type Selection Mode (Bypass Feed only) 8-122
6 Interval Print Setting Mode 8-122
7 Negative Image Setting Mode 8-123
8 Mirror Image Setting Mode 8-123

8-113 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value on 4th, 5th and 6th digits start flashing.
You can change the setting value when it is slashing.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Example : We will print 25 sheets.

So we select “25”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-114 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ENTER] Key to decide the setting value.
The setting value on 4th, 5th and 6th digits stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
(1) It is impossible to select other Sub Mode Numbers or other Setting Mode Numbers before
you decide the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode No. Setting Mode No.

(2) If you press the [ ONLINE ] Key before you decide the setting value, the setting value you
changed is cleared and the setting value stops flashing returning to the former value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-115 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

6) If you would like to change other settings, change them repeating the former procedures
from 2) to 5).
When you have finished changing all necessary settings, select the Print Mode indicating the
Setting Mode Number “0” on the 2nd digit pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting Mode Number of “Print Mode”

7) Confirm that “rdy” is indicated, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start printing.
Test Print will be performed obeying your settings.
“Prt” will be indicated during the Test Print.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
If you would like to stop printing in the middle, press the [ ENTER ] Key again.

8-116 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.9.4 Explanation for each Setting Mode

(1) Print Mode (Setting Mode No.0)

This is a mode to start and to stop the Test Print.

To start printing, press the [ ENTER ] Key when “rdy” is indicated on the Status Display.
To stop (cancel) printing in the middle, press the [ ENTER ] Key also.

It is also possible in the Print Mode to know the status of printer.

Status Codes are indicated on 4th, 5th and 6th digits.
The meaning of each Status Code is as follows.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Status

Status Code Meaning

rdy Printer is ready to print.

Er An error occurs.

JA A Jam occurs.

OP Any door is open.

noP No media is set on the selected media source.

-- Waiting

Prt During print.

8-117 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Print Number Setting Mode (Setting Mode No.1)

It is possible to decide how many sheets of print should be printed.

The setting range is from 1 to 99.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Number of print (Example : 99 sheets)

NOTE
You can also select “SP” as the setting value, but it is not for service use but for
manufacturer’s use.
(If you select “SP”, 30,000 sheets of print will be printed out.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-118 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Test Pattern Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.2)

It is possible to select your necessary test pattern.

The following 8 kinds of test pattern are selectable.
Since each test pattern has its own pattern number, please indicate the necessary number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Pattern No. (Example : Pattern No.3)

Pattern No.1 Pattern No.4 Pattern No.7

Pattern No.2 Pattern No.5 Pattern No.8

Pattern No.3 Pattern No.6

8-119 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(4) Media Source Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.3)

It is possible which media source should supply the media for the test print.
Each media source has its own media source number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Media source No. (Example : Roll Deck 2)

Media source No. Media source

0 Bypass Feeder
1 Roll Deck 1
2 Roll Deck 2
3 Roll Deck 3
4 Roll Deck 4

8-120 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(5) Cut Length Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.4)

It is possible to decide how long the print media should be cut.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Cut length (Example : A0)

Selectable setting values are as follows.

Metric format Inch format

Setting value Cut length Setting value Cut length
A0 1189mm 48 48”
A1 841mm 44 44”
A2 594mm 36 36”
A3 420mm 34 34”
A4 297mm 30 30”
A5 210mm 24 24”
b1 1030mm 22 22”
b2 728mm 18 18”
b3 515mm 17 17”
b4 364mm 12 12”
b5 257mm 11 11”
SC As required 8.5 8.5”
SC As required

NOTE
If you select “SC”, you can send the cutting signal in order to cut the media in a required
length.
Start printing, then press the [ ENTER ] Key at the time you would like to cut the media.
If you do not press the [ ENTER ] Key, the media will be cut in 6m long or 24m long.

8-121 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(6) Media Type Selection Mode (Bypass Feed only) (Setting Mode No.5)

If the cut sheet media is used for test printing, it is necessary to change several print settings
according to the type of media.
Please select the proper media type number.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Media type No. (Example : Plain paper)

Media type No. Media type

0 Plain paper
1 Tracing paper
2 Film

(7) Interval Print Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.6)

It is possible to make interval print.

Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (Example : Interval print is selected.)

Setting value Media source

0 Normal print
1 Interval print

Reference

If you make a multiple number of prints in the normal print condition, printer will continuously
supply the media, create the print image and eject prints from the exit unit, and it will last
without any stop until the last sheet of print is ejected.
But in the interval print, printer will stop every printing action completely after ejecting each
sheet of print and goes into the ready condition, then start printing the next sheet

8-122 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(8) Negative Image Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.7)

It is possible to make a negative image print.

Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (Example : Negative image is selected.)

Setting value Media source

0 Normal image
1 Negative image

(9) Mirror Image Selection Mode (Setting Mode No.8)

It is possible to make a mirror image print.

Selectable setting values are “0” or “1”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (Example : Mirror image is selected.)

Setting value Media source

0 Normal image
1 Mirror image

8-123 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.10 Special Mode (Sub Mode 9)

8.1.10.1 Function
This is a mode to make the following matters mainly.

1. Cleaning some parts

2. Adjusting some parts related with image creation
3. Clearing Backup Data
4. Software counter setting

The followings are setting items included in the Special Mode.

Please refer to [8.1.10.3 Operation and explanation for each item] on and after the page 8-126 to
know the detail of each setting item.

Item Contents Permission for Refer to

No. the operation page ;
0 Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode 8-127
1 Cutter Cleaning Mode 8-128
2 LED Head Cleaning Mode 8-129
3 Image Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate. 8-130
4 Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode Do not operate. 8-131
5 Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate. 8-132
6 Separation Corona Adjustment Mode Do not operate. 8-133
7 Developer Bias (Positive) Adjustment Mode Do not operate. 8-134
(Toner Collection Process)
8 Developer Bias (Negative) Adjustment Mode (Print Process) Do not operate. 8-135
9 Toner Supplying Mode 8-136
A Backup Data Clearing Mode Do not operate. 8-137
b Software Counter A Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-139
C Software Counter A Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-139
d Software Counter B Setting Mode (Lower 4 digits) 8-139
E Software Counter B Setting Mode (Upper 3 digits) 8-139
F Long print interval applied in the continuous long printing 8-141
G Key Card Setting Mode 8-143
H Folder Setting Mode 8-145

CAUTION
Do not clear Backup Data because all data will be initialized!
It means you will lose all fundamental setting values individually specified for each machine.

Do not make any operation in the Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A) please!

NOTE
Adjustment modes (Item No. from 2 to 9) are not for service use but for manufacturer’s use to
make machine inspection before shipment.
We recommend you not to make any operation in these modes because it will not be
beneficial.

8-124 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.10.2 Indication of the Operation Panel
The 1st digit from the left indicates “9” which is the Sub Mode number of “Special Mode”.
The 2nd digit indicates any Item Number presently selected.
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits indicate either status or setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Sub Mode Number of Special Mode

Item Number

Status or setting value

8-125 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.1.10.3 Operation and explanation for each item
(1) How to select each item

1) Enter the Service Mode, and then indicate the Sub Mode Number “9” on the 1st digit from the left
of the Status Display pressing the [ MENU ] Key.

Sub Mode Number of Special Mode

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The 2nd digit from the left indicates the Item Number presently selected.
As you can indicate another Item Number pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key
(decrement), indicate the Item Number.

Example : We will clean the LED Head so we select “LED Head Cleaning Mode”.
Its Item Number is “2”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Item Number of “LED Head Cleaning Mode”

8-126 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(2) Image Corona Wire Cleaning Mode (Item No.0)

It is possible to clean the Corona Wire of Image Corona.

1) Indicate the Item Number “0” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning
the Image Corona Wire.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during cleaning.

NOTE
It is impossible to clean the Image Corona Wire even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when
“- -” on 5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the printer finishes cleaning, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-127 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(3) Cutter Cleaning Mode (Item No.1)

It is possible to clean the Cutter.

1) Indicate the Item Number “1” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning
the Cutter.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during cleaning.

NOTE
It is impossible to clean the Cutter even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when “- -” on 5th and
6th digits is flashing.

2) When the printer finishes cleaning, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-128 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(4) LED Head Cleaning Mode (Item No.2)

It is possible to clean the LED Head.

1) Indicate the Item Number “2” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start cleaning
the LED Head.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during cleaning.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during cleaning.

NOTE
It is impossible to clean the LED Head even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when “- -” on 5th
and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the printer finishes cleaning, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-129 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(5) Image Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.3)

It is possible to make the Image Corona discharge.

The Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc during discharge.

1) Indicate the Item Number “3” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start
discharging.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during discharge.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during discharge.

NOTE
It is impossible to make the Image Corona discharge even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key
when “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the Image Corona finishes discharging, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-130 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(6) Pre-Transfer LED Adjustment Mode (Item No.4)

It is possible to make the Pre-Transfer LED light.

The Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc when the Pre-Transfer LED is lighting.

1) Indicate the Item Number “4” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to make the
Pre-Transfer LED light.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing when the LED is lighting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during discharge.

NOTE
It is impossible to make the Pre-Transfer LED light even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when
“- -” on 5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the LED stops lighting, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-131 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(7) Transfer Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.5)

It is possible to make the Transfer Corona discharge.

The Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc during discharge.

1) Indicate the Item Number “5” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start
discharging.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during discharge.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during discharge.

NOTE
It is impossible to make the Transfer Corona discharge even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key
when “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the Transfer Corona finishes discharging, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-132 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(8) Separation Corona Adjustment Mode (Item No.6)

It is possible to make the Separation Corona discharge.

The Drum rotates in a 330 degrees arc during discharge.

1) Indicate the Item Number “6” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start
discharging.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during discharge.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during discharge.

NOTE
It is impossible to make the Separation Corona discharge even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key
when “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) When the Separation Corona finishes discharging, “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-133 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(9) Developer Bias (Positive) Adjustment Mode (Toner Collection Process) (Item No.7)

It is possible to output the Positive Developer Bias that is supplied to the Developer Roller in the Toner
Collection Process.

1) Indicate the Item Number “7” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting
the positive Bias.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during output.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during output.

NOTE
It is impossible to output the positive Bias even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when “- -” on
5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting.

“- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again when the output is stopped.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop
automatically.

8-134 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(10) Developer Bias (Negative) Adjustment Mode (Print Process) (Item No.8)

It is possible to output the Negative Developer Bias that is supplied to the Developer Roller in the Print
Process.

1) Indicate the Item Number “8” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start outputting
the negative Bias.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during output.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during output.

NOTE
It is impossible to output the negative Bias even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when “- -” on
5th and 6th digits is flashing.

2) Press the [ ENTER ] Key again to stop outputting.

“- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits again when the output is stopped.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

NOTE
Make sure to stop outputting manually pressing the [ ENTER ] key as it does not stop
automatically.

8-135 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(11) Toner Supplying Mode (Item No.9)

It is possible to supply the toner from the Hopper to the Developer Unit.
You will use this mode at the time of machine installation.

1) Indicate the Item Number “9” on the 2nd digit.

Confirm that “- -” on 5th and 6th digits is lighting, then press the [ ENTER ] Key to start supplying
the toner.
5th and 6th digits indicate “8 8” in flashing during toner supply.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“8 8” keeps on flashing during toner supply.

NOTE
It is impossible to supply the toner even if you press the [ ENTER ] Key when “- -” on 5th and
6th digits is flashing.

2) When the printer detects “toner full”, it stops automatically and “- -” will light on 5th and 6th digits
again.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-136 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(12) Backup Data Clearing Mode (Item No.A)

It is possible to clear all Backup Data values.

After the clearance, all values will become factory default.

CAUTION
Do not clear Backup Data because all data will be initialized!
It means you will lose all fundamental setting values individually specified for each machine.

Do not make any operation in this Backup Data Clearing Mode please!

1) After indicating the Item Number “10” on the 2nd digit, press and hold both [ ENTER ] Key and
[ MENU ] Key, and then press and hold the [ ONLINE ] Key.
“CL” will flash on 5th and 6th digits.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“CL” flashes.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-137 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

2) Press the [ ENTER ] key when “CL” is flashing.
All backup Data are initialized and the printer is turned off automatically.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-138 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(13) Software Counter Setting Modes (Item No. from b to E)

The printer has 2 software counters (A and B) which work similar with the hardware counters (A and B).
It is possible to change the counted value in these modes.

The counted value of each counter consists of 7 digits, and it is divided into 2 groups as upper 3 digits
and lower 4 digits.

Item No. Contents of setting

b Lower 4 digits of Software Counter A
C Upper 3 digits of Software Counter A
d Lower 4 digits of Software Counter B
E Upper 3 digits of Software Counter B

Example) The Software Counter A counts 0001234 presently but we will correct it to 0001250.
Since the value you will correct is included in the lower 4 digits, we select the Item No.b.

1) After indicating the Item Number “b” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value on 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th digits flashes and it becomes possible to change the
value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-139 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

2) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

3) Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.

The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-140 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(14) Long print interval applied in the continuous long printing (Item No.F)

When you make some sheets of long print (longer than 2m) continuously, it is possible to have a longer
interval between prints.
The interval between prints will become about 10 seconds longer than usual if you select the setting
value “1”.

Setting value Contents

0 Normal interval is kept between prints in the continuous long printing.
1 Longer interval (10 seconds longer than usual) is kept between prints in the
continuous long printing.

1) After indicating the Item Number “F” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and it becomes possible to change the value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

2) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-141 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-142 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(15) Key Card Setting Mode (Item No.G)

It is possible to make the printer recognize whether the Key Card is connected or not.
When it is connected, it is also possible to specify the counting unit.

Setting value Contents

0 Key Card is not connected.
1 Key Card is connected.
It counts the print length for each paper width separately. (It counts up by
every 1m.)
2 Key Card is connected.
It counts the print length for each paper width separately. (It counts up by
every 0.1m.)
3 Key Card is connected.
It counts the number of prints for each standard size separately.

1) After indicating the Item Number “G” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and it becomes possible to change the value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

2) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-143 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-144 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

(16) Folder Setting Mode (Item No.H)

It is possible to make the printer recognize what kind of Folder is connected.

Setting value Contents

0 Folder is not connected.
1 Bay folder is connected.
2 ESTE folder is connected.
3 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”)
4 Reserved (Same with “Folder is not connected.”)

1) After indicating the Item Number “H” on the 2nd digit, press the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value on the 6th digit flashes and it becomes possible to change the value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

2) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-145 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

3) Decide the setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-146 K77sm8e7 (Ver. H.0)

8.2 User Modes
KIP8000 has 11 kinds of User Mode.
It is possible to make the following operations in these modes.

Name of Setting matter User Mode

User Mode Code
User Mode 1 Test print U1.
User Mode 2 Calendar setting U2.
User Mode 3 Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting U3.
User Mode 4 Cold Sleep Mode ON / OFF & timer setting U4.
User Mode 5 Automatic paper cut at power on U5.
User Mode 6 Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film] U6.
User Mode 7 Alarm ON / OFF U7.
User Mode 8 Choice of Standard Print Mode / Special Print Mode [Plain paper] U8.
User Mode 9 Choice of Standard Print Mode / Special Print Mode [Tracing paper] U9.
User Mode A Choice of Standard Print Mode / Special Print Mode [Film] UA.
User Mode B Enhancement of isolated dot image Ub.
User Mode C Enlargement of trailing image area UC.

8-147 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.1 User Mode 1 (Test Print)
[Function]

A test print image memorized in the KIP8000 can be printed out.

Used print media is selected automatically, and the cutting length can be changed in the Service Mode.
(Refer to [(9) Cut length of Test Print (Item No.08)] on the page 8-47.)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key once when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U1.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 1 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] once.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The 4th, 5th and 6th digits of the Status Display inform you of the status of KIP8000.

- - - (flashing) : Test print is not available.

ooo (staying) : Test print is available.
ooo (flashing) : On test printing

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Status of KIP8000

8-148 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

3) Press the [ ENTER ] Key when “ooo” on the Status Display is staying.
The KIP8000 starts test printing and “ooo” on the Status Display flashes.
Print media is selected automatically and its cutting length is also decided automatically.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) When the KIP8000 finishes test printing, “ooo” on the Status Display stops flashing.
Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 1.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-149 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.2 User Mode 2 (Calendar setting)
[Function]

It is possible to correct the calendar memorized in the circuit.

NOTE
Even if the calendar is not adjusted properly, the KIP8000 will operate without any problem.
But if some error or mis-feed occurs, its history is recorded in the circuit with date and time
information based on this calendar setting.
This record may be effective for the service personnel to find the cause of problem and fix it as
soon as possible.
Therefore please correct the calendar occasionally to get the most precise information.

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key twice when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U2.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 2 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] twice.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-150 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

2) You can indicate the following 8 kinds of Sub Mode orderly if you press [ ] Key or [ ] Key.
(2 kinds of Confirmation Mode and 6 kinds of Correction Mode are included.)
When you press the [ ] Key several times, Sub Modes are selected in the following order.

Order of selection Name of Sub Mode Example of indication

1 Date Confirmation Mode 020531
2 Time Confirmation Mode 1 2.0 0.3 0
3 Year Correction Mode C1 02
4 Month Correction Mode C2 05
5 Day Correction Mode C3 31
6 Hour Correction Mode C4 12
7 Minute Correction Mode C5 00
8 Second Correction Mode C6 30

3) Select the Date Confirmation Mode at first pressing the [ ] Key.

The Status Display indicates “Year”, “Month” and “Day” presently decided.
Please check whether or not they are right.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Example : 2002 May 31st

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Year
Month
Day

8-151 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Select the Time Confirmation Mode next pressing the [ ] Key once again.
The Status Display indicates “Hour”, “Minute” and “Second” presently decided.
Please check whether or not they are right.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Example : 12 : 00 : 30

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Hour
Minute
Second

8-152 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

5) Select the necessary Correction Mode pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key if you would like to
correct some item.
There are 6 kinds of Correction Modes which are shown by the Correction Mode No. as C1, C2,
C3, C4, C5 and C6.
These Correction Mode No. are indicated on 1st and 2nd digits.
Refer to the following list for the target you will correct in each Sub Mode.

Correction Name of Correction Mode

Mode No.
C1 Year Correction Mode
C2 Month Correction Mode
C3 Day Correction Mode
C4 Hour Correction Mode
C5 Minute Correction Mode
C6 Second Correction Mode

Example : We will correct “minute”.

So we indicate “C5”.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Correction Mode No. of the Minute Correction Mode

8-153 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

6) Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value on 5th and 6th digits flashes and it becomes possible to change the setting value.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

The setting value flashes.

7) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Example : We will correct “minute” from 00 to 05.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-154 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

 8) Decide the new setting value pressing the [ ENTER ] Key.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

The setting value stops flashing.

9) If you would like to correct other setting items, make the same operation repeating from 5) to 8).

10) When you have finished changing and deciding all the necessary setting items, press the
[ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 2.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-155 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.3 User Mode 3 (Warm Sleep Mode ON / OFF
& timer setting)
[Function]

It is possible to select whether or not the Warm Sleep Mode should work.
If you make it work, it is also possible to set the timer.
If the KIP8000 does not receive any print job or copy job for the time decided in this mode, it will
go into the Warm Sleep Mode to save the power consumption.

Reference

The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the
temperature of Fuser some degrees.
The temperature of the Fuser Unit is about 180 degrees centigrade when the KIP8000 is
ready. But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is better for saving the power to
fall down the temperature of Fuser. (Temperature is kept about 145 degrees centigrade.)

The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy
job from the outer device.
However, please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 180 degrees.
(Print does not start until the KIP8000 gets ready.)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 3 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U3.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 3 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 3 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-156 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

2) The Status Display indicates either “OFF” or “On”
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
“On” or “OFF” flashes and it becomes possible to change the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“On” (or “OFF”) flashes.

3) You can switch “OFF” and “On” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.
Select “On” to make the Warm Sleep Mode work, and select “OFF” to cancel it.

Setting value Meaning

0 Warm Sleep Mode works when a decided time has passed.
(You will set the timer in the later step if you select this setting.)
1 Warm Sleep Mode does not work.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-157 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting you selected.

If you decide “On“, the setting value for timer setting will flash automatically. Go to the following
step 5).

If you decide “OFF”, it stops flashing simply. Skip the steps 5) and 6) and go to 7).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (timer) flashes.

5) Change the timer pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable setting values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90, 120,
180 and 240.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-158 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

6) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer setting you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (timer) stops flashing.

7) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 3.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-159 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.4 User Mode 4 (Cold Sleep Mode ON / OFF
& timer setting)
[Function]

It is possible to select whether or not the Cold Sleep Mode should work.
If you make it work, it is also possible to set the timer.
If the KIP8000 does not receive any print job or copy job for the time decided in this mode, it will
go into the Cold Sleep Mode to save the power consumption.

Reference

The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by shutting off to supply
the power to the Fuser Unit.
It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode.
The temperature of the Fuser Unit is about 180 degrees centigrade when the KIP8000 is
ready. But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time, it is best for saving the power to
stop supplying the power to the Fuser Unit completely.

The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job
from the outer device.
However, please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode
because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 180 degrees.
(Print does not start until the KIP8000 gets ready.)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 4 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U4.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 4 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 4 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-160 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

2) The Status Display indicates either “OFF” or “On”
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
“OFF” or “On” flashes and it becomes possible to change the setting.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

“OFF” (or “On”) flashes.

3) You can switch “OFF” and “On” pressing [ ] Key and [ ] Key.
Select “On” to make the Cold Sleep Mode work, and select “OFF” to cancel it.

Setting value Meaning

0 Cold Sleep Mode works when a decided time has passed.
(You will set the timer in the later step if you select this setting.)
1 Cold Sleep Mode does not work.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-161 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting you selected.

If you decide “On“, the setting value for timer setting will flash automatically. Go to the following
step 5).

If you decide “OFF”, it stops flashing simply. Skip the steps 5) and 6) and go to 7).

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (timer) flashes.

5) Change the timer pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).

Setting unit is “minute”, and the selectable setting values are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90, 120,
180 and 240.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-162 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

6) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the timer setting you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value (timer) stops flashing.

7) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 3.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-163 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.5 User Mode 5 (Automatic paper cut at power ON)
[Function]

It is possible to cut all roll media in 240mm long at the time you turn on the KIP8000.
(In another word, the KIP8000 makes Initial Cut automatically for all roll media whenever you turn
it on. Refer to [2.7 Initial Cut] for the detail.)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 5 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U5.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 5 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 5 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-164 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 KIP8000 will not make Initial Cut at turning ON.
1 KIP8000 will make Initial Cut automatically for all roll media at turning ON.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-165 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 5.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-166 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.6 User Mode 6 (Transfer Support LED ON/OFF [Film])
[Function]

To make the print image clearer, it is possible to let the Transfer Support LED work when you print
with a film media.
(Transfer Support LED is what we call “Separation Lamp” which exists below Separation Corona.)

Reference

(1) The Printed image may not be so clear if you use some kinds of film, because it is difficult
to transfer the toner image onto such film.
The Transfer Support LED helps to transfer the toner image.
Please try to let it work as you may be able to make the image clearer.

(2) Selection of Separation Lamp ON / OFF only for film can be done also in the Service
Mode.
Refer to [(35) Separation Lamp ON / OFF (Film) (Item No.C6)] on the page 8-75.
ON or OFF finally you selected in either Service Mode or User Mode is effective as neither
of them has the priority of setting.

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 6 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U6.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 6 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 6 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-167 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 Transfer Support LED does not work even if you use a film media.
1 Transfer Support LED works if you use a film media.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-168 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 6.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-169 K77sm8e8 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.7 User Mode 7 (Alarm ON / OFF)
[Function]

It is available to sound the alarm.

Pips will sound to let you know the following errors when the alarm is ON.

(1) Toner empty

(2) Toner near empty (Toner Cartridge is empty but a little more print is still available.)
(3) Roll empty

Reference

The alarm will continue to sound if nothing is done.

You can stop it in the following 2 ways.

1. Clear the cause of the error.

(Replace the Toner Cartridge or load a new roll media.)

2. Or press the [ ] Key if you wish to stop the alarm without clearing the error.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 7 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U7.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 7 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 7 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-170 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 Alarm does not sound.
1 Alarm sounds if “toner empty”, “toner near empty” or “roll empty” occurs.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-171 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 7.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-172 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.8 User Mode 8 (Choice of Standard Print Mode /
Special Print Mode [Plain paper])
[Function]

It is possible to select either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the necessity.
This setting is effective when you print with a plain paper.
Print operation of KIP8000 obeys either of print modes presently selected.

Reference

If you select the [Standard Print Mode], all of [Standard Setting Values] become effective,
which you have specified in the Item Number “09” (corresponded to PPC) of the Adjustment
Mode 0 of the Service Mode. Print operation obeys these [Standard Setting Values].

If you select the [Special Print Mode], all of [Special Setting Values] similarly you have
specified to these setting items become effective, and the print operation obeys these [Special
Setting Values].

Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09,
0A & 0b)] on the page 8-48 if you will change [Standard Setting Value] or [Special Setting
Value].

NOTE
Both the [Standard Print Mode] and the [Special Print Mode] can be specified separately to
each plain paper, tracing paper and film.
User Modes 8, 9 and A can switch between [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print Mode]
similarly but the corresponded print media is different among them.
Be careful not to select in the wrong User Mode.

User Mode 8 : Corresponded to the plain paper

User Mode 9 : Corresponded to the tracing paper
User Mode A : Corresponded to the film

8-173 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 8 times when the KIP80008000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U8.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 8 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 8 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-174 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When plain paper is used.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-175 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 8.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-176 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.9 User Mode 9 (Choice of Standard Print Mode /
Special Print Mode [Tracing paper])
[Function]

It is possible to select either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the necessity.
This setting is effective when you print with a tracing paper.
Print operation of KIP8000 obeys either of print modes presently selected.

Reference

If you select the [Standard Print Mode], all of [Standard Setting Values] become effective,
which you have specified in the Item Number “0A” (corresponded to tracing paper) of the
Adjustment Mode 0 of the Service Mode. Print operation obeys these [Standard Setting
Values].

If you select the [Special Print Mode], all of [Special Setting Values] similarly you have
specified to these setting items become effective, and the print operation obeys these [Special
Setting Values].

Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09,
0A & 0b)] on the page 8-48 if you will change [Standard Setting Value] or [Special Setting
Value].

NOTE
Both the [Standard Print Mode] and the [Special Print Mode] can be specified separately to
each plain paper, tracing paper and film.
User Modes 8, 9 and A can switch between [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print Mode]
similarly but the corresponded print media is different among them.
Be careful not to select in the wrong User Mode.

User Mode 8 : Corresponded to the plain paper

User Mode 9 : Corresponded to the tracing paper
User Mode A : Corresponded to the film

8-177 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 9 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “U9.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode 9 presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 9 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-178 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When tracing paper is used.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-179 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode 9.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-180 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.10 User Mode A (Choice of Standard Print Mode /
Special Print Mode [Film])
[Function]

It is possible to select either [Standard Print Mode] or [Special Print Mode] according to the necessity.
This setting is effective when you print with a film.
Print operation of KIP8000 obeys either of print modes presently selected.

Reference

If you select the [Standard Print Mode], all of [Standard Setting Values] become effective,
which you have specified in the Item Number “0b” (corresponded to film) of the Adjustment
Mode 0 of the Service Mode. Print operation obeys these [Standard Setting Values].

If you select the [Special Print Mode], all of [Special Setting Values] similarly you have
specified to these setting items become effective, and the print operation obeys these [Special
Setting Values].

Refer to [(10) Standard Setting Value / Special Setting Value Changing Modes (Items No.09,
0A & 0b)] on the page 8-48 if you will change [Standard Setting Value] or [Special Setting
Value].

NOTE
Both the [Standard Print Mode] and the [Special Print Mode] can be specified separately to
each plain paper, tracing paper and film.
User Modes 8, 9 and A can switch between [Standard Print Mode] and [Special Print Mode]
similarly but the corresponded print media is different among them.
Be careful not to select in the wrong User Mode.

User Mode 8 : Corresponded to the plain paper

User Mode 9 : Corresponded to the tracing paper
User Mode A : Corresponded to the film

8-181 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 10 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “UA.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode A presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 10 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-182 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are “0” and “1”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Meaning

0 Standard Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.)
1 Special Print Mode is applied in printing. (When film is used.)

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-183 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode A.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-184 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.11 User Mode B (Enhancement of isolated dot image)
[Function]

If an isolated small dot image (like 1 dot) looks weak, it is possible to make it clearer by the Dot
Enhancement Process.
Select any of 4 kinds of Dot Enhancement Levels.

Dot Enhancement Level 0 : Not enhanced.

Dot Enhancement Level 1 : Isolated dot image is enhanced.
Dot Enhancement Level 2 : Isolated dot image is more enhanced.
Dot Enhancement Level 3 : Isolated dot image is most enhanced.

Not enhanced Enhanced

NOTE
Selection of Dot Enhancement Level can be done also in the Service Mode.
Refer to [(36) Dot Enhancement Level (Item No.C7)] on the page 8-76.
The Dot Enhancement Level finally you selected in either Service Mode or User Mode is
effective as neither of them has the priority of setting.

8-185 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 11 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “Ub.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode B presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 11 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-186 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are from “0” to “3”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Enhancement level Contents

0 Dot Enhancement Level 0 Not enhanced.
1 Dot Enhancement Level 1 Enhanced.
2 Dot Enhancement Level 2 More enhanced.
3 Dot Enhancement Level 3 Most enhanced.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-187 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode B.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-188 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.2.12 User Mode C (Enlargement of trailing image area)
[Function]

A normal print has a trailing margin as the image area is finished purposely before trailing edge of
printing media.
But it is possible to print the image fully up to the trailing edge (no trailing margin is provided) if you
enlarge the image area in this User Mode C.

Normal Image area is enlarged

(Trailing margin is provided.) (No trailing margin is provided.)

The following 3 settings are selectable in the User Mode C.

Normal setting : Image area is not enlarged. (Default)

Enlargement setting 1 : Image area is enlarged. Interval between prints becomes longer.
Enlargement setting 2 : Image area is enlarged. Interval between prints is as usual.

NOTE
If you print some sheets continuously with enlarging the image area, the image on the trailing
edge of former sheet tends to be printed weakly on the next sheet. (It is called “ghost image”.)

If you select the Enlargement Setting 1, the interval between prints becomes longer and the
printer makes a special process to remove the ghost image during this interval.
Although the print productivity (sheet / time) is reduced, you can get a better print quality.

If you select the Enlargement Setting 2, the interval is as usual and the printer does not make
the special process.
Although the ghost image tends to appear, large number of prints can be finished earlier.

8-189 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

[Operation]

1) Press the [ MENU ] Key 12 times when the KIP8000 is in the normal condition.
[ MENU ] Key lights green and the Status Display indicates “UC.” on its 1st and 2nd digits from the
left showing that you are selecting the User Mode C presently.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Press [ MENU ] 12 times.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

2) The Status Display indicates the setting value on the 6th digits from the left.
Press the [ MENU ] Key.
The setting value flashes and it becomes possible to change.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value flashes.

8-190 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

3) Change the setting value pressing [ ] Key (increment) and [ ] Key (decrement).
Selectable setting values are from “0” to “2”, and the meanings are as follows.

Setting value Selected setting Contents

0 Normal setting Image area is not enlarged. (Default)
1 Enlargement setting 1 Image area is enlarged.
Interval between prints becomes longer.
2 Enlargement setting 2 Image area is enlarged.
Interval between prints is as usual.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

4) Press the [ ENTER ] Key to decide the setting value you selected.
The setting value stops flashing when decided.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

Setting value stops flashing.

8-191 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

5) Press the [ ONLINE ] Key to cancel the User Mode C.

MENU ENTER ONLINE

MENU ENTER ONLINE

8-192 K77sm8e9 (Ver. H.0)

8.3 Operational Explanations for KIP
Diagnostics
8.3.1 Connection of PC and printer, and communication
settings
1) Confirm both the PC and the printer are turned off.
Connect the COM1 terminal of PC and the Data Upload / Download Port of printer with the
RS232C cross cable.

FOLDER DIAG. IF-VIII(CH-B)

COM2 COM1

Data Upload / Download Port

Use the following type of RS232C cable.

Printer PC
(D-Sub 9 pins female type) (D-Sub 9 pins female type)
2 RxD 2 RxD
3 TxD 3 TxD
5 SG 5 SG

2) Turn on both the PC and the printer.

(You do not have to be care about the order to turn them on.)

8-193 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

3) Double-click [KIPDiag.exe] to start the KIP Diagnostics.
(Please put [KIPDiag.exe], [KipDiag.chm] and [KipDiag_JP.chm] in the same folder.)

KIPDiag.exe

8-194 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

4) Select [Serial Port] from the pull down menu of [Setting].
Change each setting value in the [Serial Port Dialog] as follows, and then click [OK].
(These setting values will be indicated as the default values. Therefore, you do not have to change
any value but simply click [OK].)

Serial Port

5) KIP Diagnostics starts communicating with the printer, and the information sent from the printer is
indicated.

8-195 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
Please click [Initialize] if the communication between
KIP Diagnostics and printer is interrupted.
Their communication will be recovered if you do so.

Initialize

8-196 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.2 Selection of Indication Tab
KIP Diagnostics has 6 kinds of Indication Tab.
If you click any Tab under the Menu Bar, concerning information is indicated.
What you can confirm and what you can do in each Tab are as follows.

Basic Screen Tab You can check the basic information about printer such as ROM version
or counter value.

Display Tab You can check or monitor the Input / output signal status and several
input data.
(Display Tab covers what you can do in the Input / Output Checking
Mode [Sub Mode No.1 of the Service Mode] and Data Monitoring Mode
[Sub Mode No.2].)

Setting Tab It is possible to change the setting value of several setting items, and it is
also possible to download or upload the backup RAM file.
(Setting Tab covers what you can do in the Adjustment Mode 0 [Sub
Mode No.4] and the Adjustment Mode 1 [Sub Mode No.5].)

History Tab Histories of errors and jams are indicated.

Each error and jam is listed with Error/Jam Code, Date/Time and counter
value.

Upload ROM Data Tab You can upload the new version of firmware.

Test Print Tab You can make a Test Print.

(Test Print Tab covers what you can do in the Test Print Mode [Sub Mode
No.8].)

8-197 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3 Explanation for each Indication Tab
8.3.3.1 Basic Information Tab
Basic Screen Tab indicates general information about the connected printer, such as firmware version
and counter value.

Machine ROM Version Version of the current firmware is indicated.

Information I/F Version Version of the Interface 8 is indicated
Max Length Maximum available print length is shown.
Architecture Selected print format (metric or inch) is indicated.
Print Speed Speed of the connected printer is indicated.
Counter Total Counter Total length of print is indicated.
Counting Unit is always metric (1m) regardless of Counter A/B
settings.
Counter A Count value of the Counter A is indicated.
Counter B Count value of the Counter B is indicated.
Status Printer’s status is shown precisely.
Toner Volume It shows how much percent of toner remains in the Cartridge.
Option When some optional device is connected to the printer, it is shown.
Condition Printer’s status is shown.
Deck / Manual Feed The following paper information is shown for each paper source.

Size (Paper width)

Media type
Remaining volume

Presently selected paper source is provided with [>>].

8-198 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3.2 Display Tab
You can check or monitor the Input / output signal status and several input data.
(Display Tab covers what you can do in the Input / Output Checking Mode [Sub Mode No.1 of the
Service Mode] and Data Monitoring Mode [Sub Mode No.2].)

(1) (2) (3)

(1) [Number] column shows several kinds of 4 digits code.

The left 2 digits of the code are either “10” or “20” which show the Sub Mode Number of Service
Mode.
(“10” means the Input / Output Checking Mode and “20” means the Data Monitoring Mode.)
The right 2 digits of the code are either Signal Code (in case of Input / Output Checking Mode) or
Data Number (Data Monitoring Mode).

(Examples)
1015 200A

Signal Code Data Number

Sub Mode Number of Input / Output Sub Mode Number of Data
Checking Mode Monitoring Mode

(2) [Name] column shows either Signal Name (Input / Output Checking Mode) or the contents of data
(Data Monitoring Mode).

(3) [Data] column shows the status of signal (Input / Output Checking Mode) or the input data (Data
Monitoring Mode).

8-199 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
Display Tab covers what you can do in the Input / Output Checking Mode [Sub Mode No.1 of
the Service Mode] and Data Monitoring Mode [Sub Mode No.2].
So we recommend you to understand these modes deeply.

Please refer to [8.1.2 Input / Output Checking Mode (Sub Mode 1)] on and after the page 8-6
to know the contents of Signal Codes or signal status.
Please refer to [8.1.3 Data Monitoring Mode (Sub Mode 2)] on and after the page 8-16 to
know the contents of Data Number or meaning of each data.

8-200 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3.3 Setting Tab
It is possible to change the setting value of several setting items included in the Adjustment Modes 0
and 1 of the Service Mode.
In addition, all these setting values can be downloaded and saved in a Backup RAM file, and this
Backup RAM file can be uploaded to the printer again.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(1) [Number] column shows several kinds of 4 digits code.

The left 2 digits of the code are either “40” or “50” which show the Sub Mode Number of Service
Mode. (“40” means the Adjustment Mode 0 and “50” means the Adjustment Mode 1.)
The right 2 digits of the code are Item Number.

(Examples)
4012 5090

Item Number Item Number

Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 0 Mode Number of Adjustment Mode 1

(2) [Name] column shows the subject of each Item Number.

(3) [Data] column shows the setting value presently specified to each Item Number.

(4) [Min/Max] column shows the selectable setting values or the changeable range.

NOTE
Please refer to the following pages to know the details about Item Number, subjects, default
setting values and the changeable range.

[8.1.5 Adjustment Mode 0 (Sub Mode 4)] (On and after the page 8-33)
[8.1.6 Adjustment Mode 1 (Sub Mode 5)] (On and after the page 8-81)

8-201 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

(1) How to change the setting value of each Item Number

NOTE
Please save all the present setting values in the Backup RAM file before changing each
setting value.
As for the way to save, refer to [(2) Saving all present setting values in the Backup RAM file
(Download)] on the page 8-205.

1) Move the pointer of the mouse onto the setting value (in [Data] column) you will change, and then
click the right button of the mouse.
As [Edit] is indicated, click it.
The Edit Dialog will be indicated, in which you can change the setting value.

Edit Diagram

Indicate [Edit] by right clicking.

NOTE
You can indicate the Edit Diagram in other 2 ways.

(1) Double-click on the setting value you will change.

(2) Select the setting value by single-click, and then press the [Enter] Key of the Keyboard.

8-202 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

2) Change the setting value in the Edit Diagram, and then click [OK].

Example) You will change the setting value from “900” to “880”.

Reference
You have 2 ways to change the setting value.
One is to select any setting value from the preliminary arranged values like this example.
Another is to input some optional value through the keyboard. (Setting value must be within the
changeable range.)

3) After changing the setting value, the concerning code (Item No.) is provided with [ (E) ] showing
that its setting value (Data) has been changed.
If necessary, please change other setting values in the same way.
When you have finished changing all the necessary values, click [Upload] to transfer these
changes to the printer.

[ (E) ] is provided after changing the setting value.

Click [Upload] to transfer the changed setting values to the printer.

8-203 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

4) When the new setting values have been transferred and they have become
effective, [Complete] is indicated as the right picture.
Click [OK] to finish the operation to change the setting value.

8-204 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

(2) Saving all present setting values in the Backup RAM file (Download)

It is possible to download the setting values from the printer, which are presently specified to all Item
Numbers of Adjustment Modes 0 and 1.
These downloaded setting values are saved in the Backup RAM file.

Reference

If you upload the Backup RAM file to the printer, you can recover all previous setting values
which had been so at the time you saved them in the Backup RAM file.

If you will change the setting value of some Item Number, therefore, please save all present
setting values in the Backup RAM file before you change.
You may lose your way when you are changing many setting items, but please upload the
Backup RAM file in this case. Every previous setting value will be recovered.

Please refer to [(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to the printer] on the page 8-207 for the
way to upload.

1) Click the [Backup] button.

Backup button

8-205 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

2) The following diagram is indicated.
Input a filename for the Backup RAM file, select the folder you will save it, and then click [Save].
Present setting values of all Item Numbers are downloaded from the printer and saved in the
Backup RAM file.

8-206 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

(3) Uploading the Backup RAM file to the printer

It is possible to upload (return) the Backup RAM file to the printer.

If you make upload, all setting values included in the Adjustments Mode 0 and 1 will become same with
the values saved in the Backup RAM file.
Please do it in the following cases.

(1) In case you have lost all setting values by some reason unfortunately, and you would like to recover
them.
(2) In case you would like to share completely same setting condition between 2 individual machines
(You will download the setting values from one machine and then upload them to another one.)

Please upload the Backup RAM file in the following way.

1) Click the [Restore] button.

Restore button

8-207 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

2) The following diagram is indicated.
Please select the Backup RAM file you will upload to the printer, and then click [Open].

3) KIP Diagnostics reads the save condition in the Backup RAM file.
If the present setting value of some Item Number is different from the saved one,
present one is replaced with the saved one. (Indication in [Data] column
changes from the present value to the saved one.)
[Complete!] will be indicated when all setting values have been changed
according to the save conditions.

Present setting values are replaced with the saved ones.

8-208 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

 NOTE
The contents of the Backup RAM file have not been effective yet on printer’s side at this time.
(Please understand that only the indication of setting values on the application is changed.)
To make them effective on printer’s side, it is necessary to transfer them to the printer in the
next step 4).

4) Click the [Upload] button, and the confirmation dialog will be indicated.
If you click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog, all the setting values indicated on the application are
transferred to the printer.

Click [Yes] to transfer the

setting values.

Upload button

5) When all the setting values have been transferred and they have become
effective, [Complete!] will be indicated.
Click [OK] to finish the upload operation.

8-209 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3.4 History Tab
History Tab indicates every error (Service Call Error) and jam recorded in printer’s memory.
(It is possible to clear the record of them.)

Error history

Jam history

(1) (2) (3) (4)

(1) [Number] column shows the order that the error or jam occurred.
Smaller number shows more recently occurred error or jam.

(2) [Code] column shows either Error Code (E-00XX) or Jam Code (J-00XX).

(3) [Date/Time] column shows the date and time the error or jam occurred.

(4) [Count] column shows the counter value at the time the error or jam occurred.

8-210 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

(1) Clearing error / jam histories

1) There are 2 [Clear] buttons on the History Tab.

One is for clearing the record of error and another is for clearing that of jam.
Click either of [Clear] buttons according to the necessity.

Clear buttons

2) The record of every error or jam will be deleted.

When [Complete!] is indicated, click [OK].

8-211 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3.5 Upload ROM Data Tab
It is possible to update the firmware by uploading the new ROM file to the printer.
(ROM file will be supplied from the manufacturer.)

NOTE
The present setting values specified to all setting items in the Adjustment Modes 0 and 1 will
be kept surely even if you make firmware update. (For the brand-new setting items, setting
values will become default.)
However, please save the present setting values in the Backup RAM file for the safety before
firmware update.

(1) How to update the firmware

1) Click [Browse] button on the Upload ROM Data Tab.

Browse button

8-212 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

2) The following diagram is indicated.
Please select the firmware (ROM file : *.rom) you will upload to the printer, and then click [Open].

NOTE
Firmware (ROM file) will be supplied from the manufacturer.

3) Confirm that the filename of ROM file and its path are indicated in [Filename], and then click
[Upload] button.
As the confirmation dialog is indicated, click [Yes].
KIP Diagnostics starts transferring the ROM file to the printer.
It will take some minutes until file transfer is finished, and [Progress] shows how much task has
been finished.

Upload button

8-213 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

4) Printer is restarted automatically when file transfer has been finished,
and [Complete!] is indicated on the application side.
Click [OK] to finish firmware update operation.

8-214 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.3.6 Test Print Tab
It is possible to make Test Print specifying test pastern, cut length, number of print and media type.
(Test Print Tab covers what you can do in the Test Print Mode [Sub Mode No.8].)

(1)

(2) (5)

(3) (6)

(4)

(7)

(1) Select any of preliminary arranged 8 kinds of test pattern.

(2) Specify any of Roll Decks 1, 2, 3, 4 and Bypass Feeder as the paper source.

(3) Select any of preliminary arranged cut lengths.

(4) Specify how many sheets you will print. Maximum is 999 sheets.

(7) Click [Start] to start printing.

[Manual Feed Setting] area becomes changeable if you specify “Manual Feed” to [Paper Deck].

(5) Select any of preliminary arranged paper widths according to the used cut sheet paper.

(6) Select any of “Plain Paper”, “Tracing Paper” and “Film” according to the type of used cut sheet
paper.

8-215 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.4 Explanation for Menu Bar and Tool Bar
8.3.4.1 File

Save You can save the indicated information of each Tab in the text file format.
(Basic Information, Display, Setting and History Tabs can be saved.)

Print You can print out the indicated information of each Tab through the Windows
Printer Driver.
(Basic Information, Display, Setting and History Tabs can be printed out.)

Print Font You can change the print font that is applied when you print out the information of
each Tab.

Exit You can finish the KIP Diagnostics.

8.3.4.2 Setting

Initialize When the communication between KIP Diagnostics and printer is interrupted, you
can initialize the communication and reconnect them each other.

Serial Port You can specify some communication settings between KIP Diagnostics and
printer.

Tool Bar Tool Bar is indicated when checked.

8-216 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

8.3.4.3 Tool

ROM Maker Only the firmware engineer on manufacturer side can use [ROM Maker].
No one on service side can access it therefore.

8.3.4.4 Help

Index You can search several functional explanations of KIP Diagnostics following
[Contents] or [Index].

About Some information like the version of KIP Diagnostics is indicated.

8.3.4.5 Tool bar

The meaning of each icon is as follows.

Help

Serial Port

Initialize

Print

Save

8-217 K77sm8eA (Ver. H.0)

 Chapter 9
Appendices

Timing Chart

Schematic Electronic Diagram

K77sm9e1 (Ver. H.0)

 KIP8000 Timing Chart
Condition : 1 sheet of A0 (L:1189mm x W:841mm) with Roll 1
Service Mode (Adjustment Mode) settings : 4-15 is 0.
4-16 is 1.
4-17 is 1.
4-bF is 1.
Request of print
Numbers in the graph show the time (msec.).

400

Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1)

Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
Separation Sensor (PH18)
Exit Sensor (LS2)
200 100 170
800 1040 2350 300 1010 2360

Drum Motor (M1)

Eraser Lamp
Image Corona
LED Head
Developer Bias (Positive)
Developer Bias (Negative)
Pre- transfer LED
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Separation Lamp
Cleaning Roller (+)
Cleaning Roller (- )
Variable 200200 500 200
500 100 3 20 100 1000

Paper Feed Motor (M2)

200 100
(Reversal rotation of M2) 1250

Roll Paper Feed Clutch 1 (MC1)

Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
10
Variable

Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22)

Cutter Motor (M3)

625

Fuser Motor (M5)

Fuser Solenoid (SL1)

900

Separation Fan (BL1)

Pressure Blowers (BL4 to 7)
Low

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) Low

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to 16)

A0, B1, 36", 34" & 30" A1, B2, A2, B3, 24", 22", 18" & 17" A3, 12" & 11"
BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON
BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :OFF
BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :ON BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF

9-1 K77sm9e2 (Ver. H.0)

 KIP8000 Timing Chart
Condition : 3 sheets of A3 (L:297mm x W:210mm) with Roll 2
Service Mode (Adjustment Mode) settings : 4-15 is 0.
4-16 is 1.
4-17 is 1.
4-bF is 0.
Request of print Request of print Request of print
Numbers in the graph show the time (msec.).

400 400 400

Roll Set Sensor 2 (PH2)

Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
Separation Sensor (PH18)
Exit Sensor (LS2)

800 1040 2350 1010 2360

Drum Motor (M1)

Eraser Lamp
Image Corona
LED Head
100 100 100
Developer Bias (Positive) 300 200 170 300 200 170 300 200 170

Developer Bias (Negative)

Pre- transfer LED
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Separation Lamp
Cleaning Roller (+)
Cleaning Roller (- )
100
500 100 Variable Variable Variable 200 200 500 200

Paper Feed Motor (M2) 100 100 100 100

3 20 3 20 3 20
(Reversal rotation of M2) 300 100 300 100 100

Roll Paper Feed Clutch 2 (MC2)

Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
10 10 10
Variable Variable Variable

Cutter Home Position Sensor (PH22)

Cutter Motor (M3)

Fuser Motor (M5)

Fuser Solenoid (SL1)

900 900 900

Separation Fan (BL1)

Pressure Blowers (BL4 to 7) Low

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3)

Low

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to 16)

9-2 K77sm9e2 (Ver. H.0)

 KIP8000 Timing Chart
Condition : 1 sheet of A0 (L:841mm x W:1189mm) from Bypass Feeder
Service Mode (Adjustment Mode) settings : 4-15 is 0.
4-16 is 1.
4-17 is 1.
Insertion of cut Request of print
sheet media
Detection of cut
sheet media Numbers in the graph show the time (msec.).
2000

Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31)

Bypass Start Sensor (PH20)
Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1)
Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
Separation Sensor (PH18)
Exit Sensor (LS2)
Variable 200 100 170
800 1040 2350 300 1010 2360

Drum Motor (M1)

Eraser Lamp
Image Corona
LED Head
Developer Bias (Positive)
Developer Bias (Negative)
Pre- transfer LED
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Separation Lamp
Cleaning Roller (+)
Cleaning Roller (- )
500 100 Variable

Paper Feed Motor (M2)

3 20
Bypass Feeding Motor (M10)
Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3)
Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4)
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7)
Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
10
625

Fuser Motor (M5)

Fuser Solenoid (SL1)

Separation Fan (BL1)

Pressure Blowers (BL4 to 7) Low

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3)

Low

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to 16)

A0, B1, 36", 34" & 30" A1, B2, A2, B3, 24", 22", 18" & 17" A3, 12" & 11"
BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON
BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :OFF
BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :ON BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF

9-3 K77sm9e2 (Ver. H.0)

 KIP8000 Timing Chart
Condition : 3 sheet of A4 (L:210mm x W:297mm) from Bypass Feeder by multiple feeding
Service Mode (Adjustment Mode) settings : 4-15 is 0.
4-16 is 1.
4-17 is 1.
Insertion of cut Request of print
sheet media
Detection of cut Request of print Request of print
sheet media Numbers in the graph show the time (msec.).
2000

Cut Sheet Set Sensor (PH31)

Bypass Start Sensor (PH20)
Roll Set Sensor 1 (PH1)
Leading Edge Sensor (PH12)
Separation Sensor (PH18)
Exit Sensor (LS2)
300 200 100 170 300 200 100 170 300 200 100 170
800 1040 2350 1010 2360

Drum Motor (M1)

Eraser Lamp
Image Corona
LED Head
Developer Bias (Positive)
Developer Bias (Negative)
Pre- transfer LED
Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
Separation Lamp
Cleaning Roller (+)
Cleaning Roller (- )
500 100 Variable 500 Variable 500 Variable

Paper Feed Motor (M2)

3 20 3 20 3 20
Bypass Feeding Motor (M10) 100 100

Bypass Feeding Roller Down Solenoid (SL3)

Bypass Reversal Roller Down Solenoid (SL4)
Bypass Feed Clutch (MC7)
Paper Feed Clutch (MC6)
Paper Feed Brake (MC9)
Paper Gate Clutch (MC5)
Paper Gate Brake (MC10)
10 10 10

Fuser Motor (M5)

Fuser Solenoid (SL1)

Separation Fan (BL1)

Pressure Blowers (BL4 to 7) Low

Exhaust Blowers (BL2 & 3) Low

Separation Assist Blowers (BL12 to 16)

A0, B1, 36", 34" & 30" A1, B2, A2, B3, 24", 22", 18" & 17" A3, 12" & 11"
BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON BL14 (SEPBLW2) :ON
BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :ON BL13 & 15 (SEPBLW3) :OFF
BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :ON BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF BL12 & 16 (SEPBLW4) :OFF

9-4 K77sm9e2 (Ver. H.0)